The Real Resident Aliens

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II, award-winning author and retired History professor, is the author of the Venus Rising trilogy. Final Countdown: Rockets to Venus and Cosmic Ray’s Excellent Venus Adventure are newest in the series. Dr. Keller's books explore various facets of conditions and life on Venus in many dimensions from a perspective of conspiracies, history, theosophy, ufology and current events, especially space research. To date, Venus Rising: A Concise History of the Second Planet, won awards at the Southern California and London Book Festivals. Dr. Keller has lived and worked in 44 different countries and has been writing about UFOs and paranormal activity since 1967. He was the founder and director of the Outer Space International Research and Investigations Society (OSIRIS) of Hilmar, California, as well as the publisher and co-editor of the New Millennial Star, a monthly pre-Internet tabloid newspaper with a circulation of 7,500 copies. He received his doctoral degree from West Virginia University in 2011 focusing on various aspects of the Basque settlement of Venezuela, and received his Master's degree from the same institution in 2004 in foreign language with an emphasis on Magic Realism in Latin American literature.

THE REAL RESIDENT ALIENS

Noted UFOlogist, Dr. Raymond Keller, believes the idea of extraterrestrials and even ultra-dimensional beings from many different planets and alternate realms living and working among us clandestinely is more than just another conspiracy theory. He has been amassing files of such purported cases since his days with the Cleveland Ufology Project (CUP) and the Aerial Phenomena Research Organization (APRO) in the 1960s, and feels there exists enough anecdotal evidence to support this conclusion. With this in mind, he made the time to organize this material into a highly readable, fully-illustrated and enjoyable book, which he proudly presents to you now as The Real Resident Aliens.

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II, a.k.a. “Cosmic Ray”

Headline Books, Inc. Terra Alta, WV

The Real Resident Aliens

by Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II, a.k.a. “Cosmic Ray” copyright ©2024 Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II, a.k.a. “Cosmic Ray” All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any other form or for any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopy, recording or any information storage system, without written permission from Headline Books, Inc. No part of this publication was written by AI. All words other than quotations are those of the author.

To order additional copies of this book or for book publishing information, or to contact the author: Headline Books, Inc. P.O. Box 52 Terra Alta, WV 26764 www.HeadlineBooks.com Email: mybook@headlinebooks.com ISBN 13: 9781958914458 Library of Congress Control Number: 2024940635

P R I N T E D I N T H E U N I T E D S TAT E S O F A M E R I C A

Table of Contents Introduction..................................................................................................................7 The Real “Resident Aliens”..........................................................................................9 Long John Nebel and His “Party Line” Radio Program �������������������������������������� 86 Two Of The Gabor Sisters’ Links to ETs And UFOs........................................... 114 “Cosmic Ray” Takes Us To The Interplanetary House Of Pancakes (IHOP)...................................................... 121 Field Location #2: Brown Mountain Lights of North Carolina ������������������������ 127 The Venus Gospel: An Account of George Adamski’s 1963 Visit to Denmark and Belgium................................................................. 136 On the Quirkiness of Ghosts and Revelation Musings of the “Cosmic Ray” Keller on Life in the Material World and Beyond............................................ 179 Inhabitants Of North America Put on Alert: Latter-Day Prophecies of UFO Contactee Paul Solem and Native American Chiefs Now Coming True................................................................................... 187 Coming Soon!.......................................................................................................... 223

3

4

Introduction The following is an interview conducted with my long-time friend and associate researcher into the paranormal, generally, and the UFO phenomenon, in particular, Dr. Raymond A. Keller, a.k.a. “Cosmic Ray.” In the 1960s, when we were both residents of Bedford, Ohio, a southeastern suburb of Cleveland, Ohio, we were designated as official UFO investigators of the Cleveland Ufology Project (CUP). When I was asked by Dr. Keller to write the introduction to this book, The Real Resident Aliens, my first thought was to conduct an interview with him, exploring his interest in the subject and his motivations for writing this epic work, a soon-to-be-required reading for every ufologist.

Mike: Cosmic Ray, you’ve been receiving a lot of attention lately with your books, West Virginia: Paranormal Gateway (2023) and Pennsylvania: UFO Portal (2024), both published by Headline Books of Terra Alta, West Virginia, but co-authored with Fred Saluga, an officer in the ranks of the Mutual UFO Network (MUFON). Where did you find the time to write another UFO book, and why about resident aliens?

Cosmic Ray: Apart from the program, Resident Aliens, starring Alan Tudyk and now ending its third season on the Syfy Channel, I believe that the idea of extraterrestrials and even ultra-dimensional beings from many different planets and alternate realms living and working among us clandestinely is more than just another conspiracy theory. I have been amassing files of such purported cases since our days with CUP in the 1960s, and feel there exists enough anecdotal evidence to support this conclusion. With this in mind, I saw to it that I made the time to organize this material into a highly readable, fully-illustrated and enjoyable book form.

Mike: Why have you chosen Germany to introduce this book to the world?

Cosmic Ray: I am scheduled to do two major presentations in Southern Germany. The first one will be on 21-23 June 2023 in the Memmingen City Hall with premier scientific ufologists from throughout German-speaking Europe.

5

Tickets have already been sold out for this event, and the theme of our talks will be the “Ultimate UFO Disclosure,” that we seem to be leading up to on the levels of government, Hollywood and personal encounters. The second conference, also sold out, will take place on 4-7 July 2023 at Hohenfels Castle on the German side of Lake Constance, with about 50 individuals associated with the metaphysical and contactee aspects of the UFO phenomenon sharing information on their personal encounters and insights. Titled, “From Venus with Love,” Omnec Onec, the Ambassador from Venus, and myself as the Venus historian, will be the headliners. I believe there exists a confluence with the technical and spiritual aspects pertaining to an extraterrestrial presence on Earth, and these two conferences are the most suitable locations for introducing a book like Real Resident Aliens.

Mike: Do you expect any aliens to show up at these conferences?

Cosmic Ray: They always have, Mike, but unbeknownst to the human attendees at such events. Remember Hebrews 13:2, that “We should always be kind to one another, for we entertain angels unawares.” And then there will at least be two aliens present, Omnec Onec and myself.

Mike: So how many different types of extraterrestrials can be found on Earth at this time?

Cosmic Ray: At the end of the last decade, Paul Hellyer, the former Defense Minister in Canada during the Pearson Administration, said on Russian television that he knew of about 80 species living and working among us. He claimed that some of them could morph into a human appearance, just as the Resident Alien on the Syfy television program, and go from Area 51 down to the Las Vegas Strip for shopping and playing slots, and no one could detect that they were really visitors from the stars.

Mike: Are they all good?

Cosmic Ray: Hellyer thought a few of them have suspect intentions toward us. But based on the Book of Jude in the New Testament, I’d say that number was probably higher, to maybe about one-third of all aliens on the planet at this time. The Book of Jude describes warring factions in the Heavens, with onethird of the angels in rebellion and Michael and his angels, the remaining twothirds, casting them out of the Celestial Realms and down to the material plane of Earth and other planets to wreak havoc.

Mike: What else is in store for us, on your timetable?

Cosmic Ray: I’m planning on taking an extended vacation, starting at Mt. Shasta, sometime in 2025 to visit some of my mentors like Clayton Parker and Annalee Skarin.

6

Mike: Thank you for your time and this interesting interview.

Cosmic Ray: Thank you, North Coast Mike. You are always a good and trusted friend. *** Dear Readers, I am sure you will enjoy The Real Resident Aliens. I know that I will. Yes, there are mysterious lights and phenomena in the skies. But moreover, Dr. Keller takes us into a deeper analysis of the alien presence largely undetected among us.

Michael A. La Riche Rootstown, Ohio 10 April 2024

7

8

The Real “Resident Aliens,” Part I

Actor John Tudyk as the shapeshifting extraterrestrial in the Syfy Channel’s hit series, Resident Alien.

See https://www.joblo.com/movie-news/resident-alien-alan-tudyk-syfy-series-new-trailer. For a full disclosure on real “resident aliens,” read on!

As an “old school” science fiction aficionado, I found myself strangely attracted to the Syfy Channel’s new series, Resident Alien, which comes across as a dark comedic blend of the Starman movie (Columbia Pictures, 1984), featuring Jeff Bridges as the extraterrestrial, and the My Favorite Martian situation comedy produced by CBS Television from 1963-1966 starring Ray Walston and Bill Bixby. Resident Alien is based on the comic book of the same name produced by the creative writing and art team of Peter Hogan and Stephen Parkhouse over at Dark Horse Comics.

The new science fiction series follows Harry, an alien who crashes on Earth and passes himself off as a small-town doctor in Colorado. Resident Alien stars Alan Tudyk as the shapeshifting extraterrestrial, a veteran of such sci-fi productions as I, Robot, Abraham Lincoln: Vampire Hunter, Rogue One and Doom Patrol, where he played a wide variety of roles. According to a television survey conducted by NBC-Universal, the premiere episode of Resident Alien reached 9

The Real Resident Aliens

They live among us…. The Reptilian Aliens. See https://www. deviantart.com/shaxer/art/LizardPeople-Reptilian-Alien-3D-SculptZbrush-765768023.

9.3 million viewers. The popular program has already been renewed for a second season.

It was the popularity of this Syfy program, Resident Alien, that inspired me to write the following chapters, insofar as many readers of my Venus Rising series of books have expressed an interest in knowing about the real resident aliens that thrive in our midst. Hope you enjoy and find illumination in the following series from my exclusive Venus Files. -Cosmic Ray

Scary Reptilian Aliens: “Be afraid…. Very afraid.”

As early as 1953, the prominent anthropologist, Dr. George Hunt Williamson of Prescott, Arizona, warned about reptilian aliens from the vicinity of the Orion nebula arriving on our world with evil intentions toward all of us humans. He outlined this information in Book 3, Chapter 6, titled “The Intruders,” in his opus work, Other Tongues - Other Flesh (Amherst, Wisconsin: Amherst Press).

Wrote Williamson: “The nebula of Orion is within our own galaxy and is a diffuse nebula….” and, “The ‘Serpent People’ of ancient legend are believed to have been Orion intelligences projected Earthward. Is the fabulous ‘Rainbow City’ under the Antarctic region a central location for such projections? ‘Serpent People,’ ‘Anti-Christs,’ or ‘Intruders,’- they all represent the same thing: negative polarity.”

The good space people, primarily from the planets Venus, Mars and Saturn in our own solar system, then went on to describe the modus operandi of the evil beings from Orion, which Williamson relayed to inquiring minds on Earth in his conspiratorial book, Other Tongues – Other Flesh: “Orion is the great hunter of the Universe. It is gorgeous in the skies and men of Venus know it very, very well. It is somewhat erratic; and like a great hunter, it is always after its preyespecially Taurus the Bull. Orion is surrounded by small round-ball bodies.

These are always in action between the Sun of our solar system and Orion. They are always ready for action and looking for trouble. Orion disturbs other planets and keeps them from operating in the correct manner. Also, Orion is not too highly evolved scientifically because they use the old-style craft. However, they are masters at projection.

“Orion interferes and holds back. People of Orion are not our kind of people.

They do not belong to our Confederation. They interrupt and are unruly. At 10

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

present time, there is a small group of people on Earth working for Orion. These people are sometimes small in stature with strange, oriental-type eyes. Their faces are thin and they possess weak bodies. They come among you to disperse all things not in keeping with their own ideas. They upset our plans. They run amuck and we avoid them. They prey on the unsuspecting. They are talkative; they astound intellects with their words of magnificence. While their wisdom may have merit, it is materialistic, and not of pure aspiration toward the Creator.

“We have our own personnel who watch over these pirates of Creation.

They have their own Council and the Orion Confederation; but they know little through their own ingenuity for they are the universal parasites. Disturbers, negative elements- soon they will be eradicated. Watch out for controlled persons in your midst. Our personnel will spot them and you will be informed of them. They come often in disguise; but we of the Confederation are never deceived. We know them!

“The Orion people are the Intruders in your world and they come from planets belonging to countless star-suns engulfed by the nebula of Orion. If the Orion beings fail in their mission of disturbance, they return not to Orion, but to Sirius. This is their cycle of return. They must learn the Great Path. They will learn; but in the meantime, we will not have them disturb our preparations and plans for the Earth planet. We try to help them and suggest work to aid them; but they are a stubborn race.

“They cannot enter your atmosphere usually by spacecraft, but they can and do reach the Earth world by projecting their intelligence into weak Earthly bodies which they completely control for short periods of time in order to perform their disturbances. Watch for them. Their numbers increase as the ‘sorrows’ of Earth increase. They will persist, but they will not succeed. But we will succeed, for our mission of the Creator’s authority and by His will we shall prevail. Worry not about these Orion influences if you are counted among those who serve the Infinite Creator. Pity them. Love them. Pray for them. Do these things, for those from Orion and those who serve their interests know not what they do.”

From this cosmic awareness, we come to understand that an effort has been continually underway among the agents of the Confederation of Light, which is led by the Venusians, to contain the influence of the Reptilian beings from Orion who were, essentially, snatching- as they could- the bodies of Earthlings by downloading their own intelligences into their brains, hence taking over their minds. From at least 1953 until the rapid rise in alien abductions beginning with the well-known Betty and Barney Hill case in rural New Hampshire on 19-20 September 1961, it appears that the Reptilian agenda was kept in check by the 11

The Real Resident Aliens

Confederation of Light. Interestingly, it was at this same time that the good news of the contactees was eclipsed by these horrific tales of alien abductions, complete with probe insertions and abusive medical exams, to include the embedding of implants by the nasty aliens for longitudinal surveys of their victims.

As the contactee era was coming to a close, some in the ufology community sensed this emerging trend toward further Reptilian disturbances. In a letter dated 10 March 1959 to Gray Barker, publisher of the Saucerian Press in Clarksburg, West Virginia, UFO investigator George F. Haas of 2418 Dwight Way, Berkeley 4, California, wrote: “I am doing research in anthropo-herpetology, that is, in the study of the Serpent Race or the reptile man, the anthroposaurian, the manlike snake. Reference to him is found in the legends, myths and fables, and in the religions of almost all peoples in all lands and ages.”

Haas informed Barker that he was, “now turning to the flying saucer or UFO field in search of traces of him (the serpent man) and I thought perhaps here you could help me.” In this regard, the ufologist specified that, “I am looking for UFO sightings or contact cases where the occupants are described as having Reptilian characteristics. A perfect example is the Braxton Monster case that is described in the United Press story (page 16 of your book, They Knew Too Much About Flying Saucers)1 as a ‘half-man, half-dragon,’ and with a foul odor.”

By the 1990s, the English conspiratorial theorist David V. Icke popularized the idea of shape-shifting Reptilians from another dimension in outer space controlling the Earth’s social-political-economic system through a matrix of mind control.

1 12

Gray Barker, They Knew Too Much About Flying Saucers (Clarksburg, West Virginia: Saucerian Press, 1956).

See https://www.redbubble.com/shop/ reptilian+stickers.

“Fight the Power!”

Got to give us what we want Gotta give us what we need Our freedom of speech is freedom or death We got to fight the powers that be Lemme hear you say Fight the power Fight the power Fight the power Fight the power Fight the power Fight the power Fight the power We’ve got to fight the powers that be!

—Public Enemy (1990)

13

The Real “Resident Aliens,” Part II

Reverend W. B. Gill’s drawing of flying Saucer and occupants as object hovered over mission school in Papua New Guinea on 26 June 1959.

When Aliens Visited a South Pacific Mission School Rev. Norman Cruttwell, a canon in the Anglican Church, would certainly be considered, by most, to be a man whose sincerity was beyond doubt. He assured a reporter from the Australasian Post of Melbourne, Australia, in an article that appeared in the 18 March 1965 issue, that “Strange things seen in the sky above Papua New Guinea were indeed UFOs, or- if you insist- ‘flying saucers.’” He based his conviction on a mass of corroborated evidence that he had personally gathered and painstakingly assembled into an extraordinarily detailed report telling of people staring up in amazement at unexplained lights at night and by day, flying objects that gave every indication of being manned spacecraft. This was particularly evident in one case where the apparently human figures aboard a flying saucer waved at the observers.

In the week prior to the article’s publication in the Australasian Post, Cruttwell sat down with a reporter to go over some of the UFO evidence he had amassed over the years in his Box Hill residence, located in a suburb of Melbourne.

The reporter was especially interested in the details of the Papuan case where 14

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

the UFOnauts actually waved at multiple witnesses. Cruttwell expressed no doubt that the UFO cases he had assembled were authentic. He insisted that he would simply discard any UFO case that he could not personally corroborate.

When Cruttwell was asked why he was so sure that the UFOs were physical craft manned by visitors from another planet, the reverend stated, “Where else could they come from? America and Russia would not be wasting time and such huge amounts of money trying to perfect rockets and other flying machines, knowing that they were already outdated by this other flying system, whatever its principle (of propulsion) might be. And if not America or Russia, what other country could it be?”

Of course, with Cruttwell being a theologian of high standing in the Anglican Church, the reporter wanted to know how a willingness to accept the existence of advanced civilizations on other planets affected this cleric’s religious outlook. The canon smiled and told the reporter that people were always asking him the same question and that, overall, the acceptance of the extraterrestrial UFO hypothesis was not at all incompatible with reverence for the Creator of the universe: “We know that God created everything. Nothing could change that. There are some references to Our Lord which perhaps we have not yet understood properly, such as ‘In my Father’s House there are many mansions….’” (John 14:2, KJV).

Cruttwell did admit that he did not always think this way about the UFO question. It wasn’t until he first heard about the report of the manned flying saucer seen by another Anglican priest, Father William Booth Gill on 26 June 1959 at a mission school in Papua New Guinea, that he started to take UFO reports seriously. Cruttwell had written in his personal diary that, “I could not believe the reports (of UFOs and aliens) were true and dismissed them as the sort of wild tales which often get around by ‘bush telegraph,’ and in which there is often little or no substance of truth.” But soon after he received and read the contents of a “fat envelope of typescript” from Father Gill in the mission field detailing a close encounter of the third kind, Cutwell began to change his mind on this matter.

The cover letter to Cruttwell in the mailed package from Father William B. Gill began: “Here is a lot of material, the kind you have been waiting for, no doubt; but I am in some ways sorry that it has to be me who supplies it.

Attitudes at Dogura in respect to my sanity vary greatly; and like all mad men, I myself think my grey cells (brain cells) are OK….” It is clear that Father Gill had kept a good sense of humor about the whole incident. As to the material enclosed in the large envelope, Gill notes that, “This is the original data. Please make whatever copies or photographs you like, but please send it back to me by 15

The Real Resident Aliens

return ‘Maclaren King,’ if possible, as I regard it with a sense of value….” General reports of Father Gill’s encounter had been published before, but I felt privileged in tracking down the original material that was initially reported by Gill to his ecclesiastical superior, the Canon Cruttwell in Melbourne.

There had been many reports coming from Papua New Guinea with respect to “flying things” and “strange lights in the sky,” even before the age of flying saucers ever began. Such strange lights are referred to by the natives as being “like a Tilley lamp,” which is the usual form of illumination used in the islands when electricity goes out or is not available in more remote areas. But it was on Friday, 26 June 1959 at 6:45 p.m., that Father Gill left his dinner table and walked out the front door of his mission home, overlooking a small patch of lawn fringed by a few trees including coconut palms. Fifty feet below that was the shingled beach. He glanced up at the clear night sky, looking for the familiar planet Venus, which he quickly identified. But there was also another “sparkling object” out there, one that completely mystified him. In his own words, the reverend explained that, “I saw Venus; but I also saw this sparkling object which to me was peculiar because it sparkled and because it was very, very bright. It was above Venus and so that caused me to watch it for a while. Then I saw it descend towards us.”

Two of the mission teachers also joined Father Gill in watching the UFO. The three observed the “Tilley lamp-like object,” noting that, “It appeared to wax and wane in brightness, as though it were approaching and receding.” One the UFO seemed to move in quite close, it paused and hovered at what was judged to be between 300 and 400 feet above the ground. It was definitely circular and had a wide base and a narrower, upper deck. Beneath it were what seemed to be a set of legs, or landing gear. At times, the UFO would produce a shaft of blue light that shone up into the sky at an angle of about 45 degrees. But strangest of all, four human figures appeared on top of the hovering object, beginning around 25 minutes into the sighting, at about 7:10 p.m. Father Gill described the scene thusly: “As we watched it, men came out from the object and appeared on top of it on what seemed to be a deck on top of the huge disc. There were four men in all: Occasionally two, then one, then three, then four. We noted the various times the men appeared. And then later on, all those witnesses who were quite sure that our records were right and that they agreed with them and saw the men at the same time as I did, were able to sign their names as witnesses of what we assume to be human activity or beings of some sort on the object itself.”

On the following day, Saturday, 27 June 1959, what was presumed to be the same object, but not necessarily, showed up again. This time it was around 6 16

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

p.m. and the Sun had just gone down behind the mountain, so there was still some light available. Father Gill had emphasized that it would have been really dark just 45 minutes later, as it was on the night of the first sighting. According to Cruttwell’s analysis, the time of the second night’s sighting “rules out any possibility of the object having been a planet, such as Venus.”

Father Gill’s commentary on the second sighting follows: “We stood in the open to watch. Although the Sun had set, it was quite light for the following 15 minutes. We watched figures appear on top, four of them. There is no doubt they were human. Two of the figures seemed to be doing something near the center of the deck. They were occasionally bending over and raising their arms as though adjusting or ‘setting up’ something (not visible). One figure seemed to be standing, looking down at us (a group of about a dozen).

“I stretched my arm above my head and waved. To our surprise, the figure did the same. Ananias (one of the mission teachers) waved both arms above his head, then the two outside figures did the same. Ananias and myself began waving our arms and all four seemed to wave back. There seemed to be no doubt that our movements were answered. All the mission boys made audible gasps (of joy or surprise, or perhaps both).

“As dark was beginning to close in, I sent Eric Kodawa for a torch (Australian term for flashlight) and directed a series of long dashes towards the UFO. After a minute or two of this, the UFO apparently acknowledged by making several wavering motions back and forth in a sideways direction, like a pendulum.” The canon wanted to know if the priest Gill had tried to communicate with the flying saucer occupants by voice. Gill said he and the rest of the observers shouted and made beckoning motions for the UFOnauts to descend from their vehicle; but there was no response other than the waving of the occupants and motion of the UFO. Interestingly, neither the men nor their strange machine made any sounds whatsoever.

I asked the physicist Martin Gottschall of UFO Research Queensland in Brisbane, Australia, about this particular aspect of the case when I was working with a lighting crew at the World Expo there in 1988. Gottschall remarked that the late contactee, George Adamski, when visiting Australia on his world tour in 1959, had informed him that the electromagnetic drive unit of the flying saucers was completely silent, and that most extraterrestrials, from planets in our solar system, at least, usually do not speak out loud in their first contacts with Earthlings, insofar as they (the extraterrestrials) possessed mental telepathic abilities and could, therefore, successfully impart their peaceful intentions to all concerned in any given area where their ships or bodily presence are being 17

The Real Resident Aliens

observed. “As far as the Gill case goes,” said Gottschall, “I imagine that is probably the way it went down.”

There was a total of 38 witnesses to both of the UFO appearances at the mission, and 25 of these signed Father Gill’s report of the incident, attesting to the document’s veracity. Among those that signed were five Papuan teachers and three medical assistants, so the encounter is certainly one of the most credible in the history of ufology. Cruttwell emphasizes that the Gill case was certainly not a fluke in the islands, however, as he cataloged hundreds of UFO sightings from that once Australian trust territory. In July 1959, with reports of UFO activity coming in from all over the islands, Cruttwell instituted a nightly sky watch, from sundown to 9 p.m. at his own mission house in Menapi. However, when a UFO did zoom in at Menapi, it came in not at night but in the morning.

The Anglican canon made a notation of this event: “This was the first daylight sighting; and by incredible bad luck, I missed it by seconds.

“It was 9 a.m. on Tuesday, 21 July 1959. I had been delayed by various duties and had not come up to the school line, as I usually do, but was still indoors.

The school children were just marching into church for their morning service.

About half of them and several of the teachers had passed into the building, but perhaps 100 children, two male teachers and six girl pupil teachers were still outside.

“Suddenly, some of the children caught sight of a bright point of light moving in the clear blue sky. It had appeared from behind the wooded hill to the west of the station and was drawing nearer and increasing in size. Soon all the children and teachers were staring, fascinated.

“As it drew nearer, it appeared elongated and became larger until it was clearly seen as a shining, metallic disc with a dark ring around it. Teacher Augustine reckons it was a ‘little smaller than the Sun.’ “It passed to the north of the station at an elevation of perhaps 30 degrees, travelling ‘faster than an aeroplane’ and making no sound whatever. There was no vapor trail at all…. Its transit must have been fairly rapid, probably no more than a minute, perhaps less. Unfortunately, they were too fascinated to shout, and much time was wasted before Augustine took it into his head to look for me.

“He (Augustine) wasted more time by going into every room looking for me instead of calling. When at last he had found my mother and she had shouted out, ‘Norman, quick, there’s something in the sky!’ I rushed out, snatched up telescope and camera and ran beneath the mango trees to the playing field.

“But I was just too late. Everyone was staring at the point where it had disappeared. Though we kept a watch all day, it never came back.

18

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

“This sighting cannot be doubted. The object was seen by over 100 people all known to me. They all agreed to the appearance of the object- ‘like a silver plate.’

I told Augustine and Abel, the two senior teachers, straightaway to take pencil and paper and draw what they had seen. I made them sit at opposite ends of the classroom, unable to see each other’s papers, and I myself watched to see that there was no collaboration. I drew up a report then and there, and the teachers signed it.”

Despite Canon Cruttwell having obtained from Father Gill the audio recordings of a majority of the credible witnesses in the case of the encounter with UFO occupants, critics in the Australian scientific community have not taken the UFO reports as serious as they should. The Down Under scientists have opined that as objective skeptics they can rightly judge that sincerity on the part of the UFO observers is simply not enough. This is because witnesses, though sincere, may be mistaken.

19

The Real “Resident Aliens,” Part III Aliens at Cape Canaveral?

On Friday, 3 June 1966, astronauts Gene Cernan and Thomas P. Stafford, manning the Gemini 9, were launched into orbit from the rocket base at Cape Canaveral, Florida. But in the city of Cape Canaveral, there were rumors of two mysterious visitors, astronauts from another planet, who showed up on the beach, apparently to get a good look at the historic launch.

Tom Longhurst, a reporter from the Orlando, Florida, Sentinel newspaper, was down in Cape Canaveral to cover the launch from the perspective of locals who live in and along the Cape. His report of these strange events appeared in the Sunday, 5 June 1966 edition of the Sentinel.

In Longhurst’s article, “Did Two Men Drop from Sky?” the Sentinel correspondent noted that there were three boys playing in the back of the Winslow Apartments in Cape Canaveral who allegedly sighted a “space ship” or a “flying sub” that landed just beyond the breakers. There were also two strangely attired men on the beach who stepped onto some kind of powered disk that shuttled them off to the space ship, which they boarded.

James Harkins of Unit 52 in the Winslow Apartments told reporter Longhurst that his two sons, Michael, age 6, and James, age 7, were playing with their 8-year-old friend Steve behind the apartment complex, which faces the beach, around 7:30 p.m., when they first viewed this unusual event, beginning with a “rocket or jet” that flashed overhead and apparently dove into the sea.

“The three of them came in to the apartment and asked my wife if they could go over to the beach to see where it (the UFO) went;” said Harkins, then adding, “So, we let them go.”

The boys returned in less than five minutes. They were ashen faced and frightened with what they witnessed on the beach. The told the Harkins boys’ father that once they reached the beach, they saw two men standing with their backs to them about 30 yards away. These two men were talking; but what was 20

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

really strange about them was that they were wearing “glass-encased helmets, grey suits and what look like scuba tanks on their back.” One of the lads let out a sharp whistle, which startled the men. Then these “visitors,” for the lack of a better word, dashed into the water and jumped onto some kind of flat “round white thing” that sped them off to a mysterious vessel about 100 yards off the beach. The boys noticed that this craft had windows in it through which they could “see people inside.” There was also a gray star painted on its side together with the capital letters “HU HR PS RED.” James Harkins’ two sons told him that they started fleeing from the scene at almost the same time the two men did. When they looked back, they expected to see the craft take off; but instead, it submerged and vanished.

The father said that young Steve ran home to tell his parents about the sighting. Therefore, he separated his sons to get their accounts independently; and later also questioned their friend Steve. He got substantially the same story from all three of the boys. “They all came up with the same letters each time I questioned them separately; and all mentioned the same details,” said Harkins, who dismissed the suggestion that the boys made up the story: “They are just not that type of boys.” Harkins did concede, however, that perhaps his sons and their friend may have seen some “Navy frogmen exercises or scuba divers working from a submarine.”

Harkins did call both the Cocoa Beach and Canaveral police departments insofar as he thought he had a duty to at least report the incident. “But I didn’t want to make a big deal about it. It sounds so crazy.” He did, however, ask the police if they could contact Patrick Air Force Base personnel to see if they did have some type of advanced aircraft like a flying submarine. Police dispatchers did make such an inquiry on behalf of James Harkins, but there was no comment forthcoming to affirm or deny the existence of such an aircraft or the carrying out of any frogmen operations in the area.

21

The Real Resident Aliens

“Space X, 0; Aliens, 1”: UFO that blew up Space X Falcon 9 rocket at 1 September 2016 Cape Canaveral launch. See Kanishk Singh’s 3 September 2016 article, https://tecake.in/alien-ufodestroyed-spacex-falcon-9-rocket-launch-pad-watch.

The Past is Prelude: UFOs interfering with space missions in the sky and possible alien saboteurs messing with these space missions on the ground at Cape Canaveral are nothing new under the Sun. Space X Falcon 9 exploded in the midst of its launch countdown on Thursday, 1 September 2016, at 9:07 a.m. Eastern Time, which led to huge loss of capital and also disrupted other Space X activities. Several other launches were delayed after the explosion and the blast also destroyed Facebook’s Internet.org satellite, disrupting all of its services.

Alien hunters are now claiming that a UFO interrupted the countdown of the Falcon 9 and was ultimately responsible for blowing it up.

According to reports, the UFO had no wings and appeared similar to a standard automobile-size disk. What surprised the alien hunters is that if extraterrestrials are responsible for destroying this rocket, then imagine how much havoc they can wreak for other higher-level reasons.

UFO Sightings Daily (Mutual UFO Network, Cincinnati, Ohio) editor Scot C. Waring said, “This makes me wonder if Elon Musk has betrayed the public’s trust by allowing the United States government to load a spy satellite or weapons satellite onboard this rocket. You know, when you see aliens involved in an explosion of a rocket, that the rocket could have had massively bad implications on humanities future. It looks like Space X is

22

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

becoming an arms dealer of weapons of mass destruction. Just lucky the aliens destroyed it before it started WWIII.” The incident took place on the pad at Launch Complex 40, a rocket site in Cape Canaveral, Florida. The launch pad and the rocket have been destroyed and the equipment, worth millions of dollars, had been burned almost beyond recognition. Fortunately, no one was injured in the alien attack.

23

The Real “Resident Aliens,” Part IV “UFO Creature” Sighted on Lake Erie Beach Reports of a creature that emerged from a UFO that landed on an Erie, Pennsylvania, beach on the night of Sunday, 31 July 1966, made headlines around the world, thanks to a United Press International dispatch of 3 August 1966. There were even reports that an officer from the United States Air Force was dispatched from Project Blue Book at Wright-Patterson Air Force Base in Dayton, Ohio, to investigate this close encounter. He was allegedly seen by multiple witnesses in the vicinity of the UFO landing site on Tuesday, 2 August 1966. When news reporters called the offices of Project Blue Book about the Erie, Pennsylvania, case, their calls were transferred to the Public Affairs liaison at the Dayton base, Major William S. Hall, who casually informed that, “All findings resulting from the search must be released by the Secretary of the Air Force.”

The story begins on the evening of Sunday, 31 July 1966, when Betty Jean Klem, 26, of Jamestown, New York, said that she and three friends were sitting in their disabled car on the beach in the Presque Isle Peninsula. With their car broken down and nothing else to do, they were watching the sky when they saw what appeared to be a star moving in the sky in a contrary direction to the fixed stars.

“You could see it coming down,” said Klem. “It was metallic, sort of silvery. It faded between the trees.”

The others with Klem were Douglas Tibbetts, 18, of Greenhurst, New York; Anita Haisley, 22, and Gerald Labelle, 26, both neighbors of Betty Jean Klem in Jamestown. According to Tibbetts, Betty Jean Klem went into shock when a six-feet “The object appeared to be cubetall “formless creature” emerged from this landed shaped, whitish or metallic in color.” He UFO and walked right up to her car.

24

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

also noted that, “When the object landed, a series of lights turned on and a tripod array of landing gear could easily be seen.”

While Tibbetts was able to keep his composure when speaking with a reporter from the United Press International, Klem appeared to be in shock, speaking incoherently when she began to describe the mysterious object. Basically, what she related was that Haisley and her two children had been sitting in the car while Tibbetts had gone for police to come and investigate the landing area.

She also said that a “formless creature” appeared in the bushes, standing just five feet from her automobile. The alien being was about six feet tall. She could make out a head and shoulders but saw no legs, insofar as it was up so close to the car. Klem then began peeping the horn, summoning Tibbetts to return to the vehicle. He did so, in the company of a policeman, only to find Klem in total shock.

When Klem was asked if the UFO made any noise, she replied, “It sounded like the noise in a telephone receiver, only louder, of course.”

In the light of day, depressions from the UFO’s tripod landing gear were found at the supposed sight where the object came down. These depressions were photographed by Richard Vaubel of 2279 Westmoor Road in Rocky River, Ohio, and were published in the Cleveland, Ohio, Plain Dealer newspaper of 2 August 1966. Plaster casts were also made of the depressions by an officer of the Erie, Pennsylvania, Police Department.

25

The Real “Resident Aliens,” Part V Alien Psychology Explored Toward the end of 1969, many in the ufology community had already become firm believers in the extraterrestrial hypothesis of UFOs, i.e., that these objects were piloted by beings from other planets who have actually landed their spacecraft on Earth and, in some cases, may even be living among us in one capacity or another. If this were the case, some ufologists began to speculate about the possible psychology of these strange visitors from other planets, at least so far in better understanding their motivations for coming here in the first place.

Did you ever get the feeling that you John M. Frytz, a ufologist writing in the don’t belong to this Earth, that you are “trapped in a world you never made?” If November-December 1969 edition of the so, Howard the Duck, a current resident UFO Report newsletter (Volume 1, Number of Cleveland, Ohio, welcomes you to 2), edited by Armand Laprade and published the club. Source: Howard the Duck (Universal Pictures, 1986). out of Worcester, Massachusetts, noted that, “Anyone who believes in the extraterrestrial theory of UFOs must have and support some other theory that will explain just why UFOs are here in the first place. This assumes, of necessity, a motive on the part of the alien intelligence; and as motives are a part of psychology (a very involved part of it), speculation into the nature of alien psychology is then a part of every believer.”

Frytz’ article, “Alien Psychology,” is a classic in being one of the first to explore the UFO phenomenon from possible alien points of view. Of course, speculation into even the known areas of knowledge can be a difficult enough task. But the realm of alien psychology was then, and still is, so completely unknown that 26

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

speculation has become pure guesswork. In dealing with this subject, however, it becomes apparent that alien motives, from an Earth-bound perspective, can only be described in the light and knowledge of human motivations. Therefore, Frytz must be commended for at least taking an initial stab in exploring this phenomenon.

Given the above, here are some possible motives that Frytz came up with that can be ascribed in explaining the UFO presence on our planet: 1. Maternal: A few writers in the past, and more so recently, have put forth the theory that the human race (and indeed, perhaps, all life on Earth) are offspring from a super outer space race, with UFO visitations the maternal watching over us. This is a very interesting theory, but one which has little supporting evidence; and what evidence offered is of a nature as to be speculation based on many bits of an inconclusive nature, the kind of thing where all the unknowns can be molded to fit almost any preconceived idea thought of. Although it certainly cannot be disproven yet, proponents certainly have a rough job ahead if they are to put their ideas out of the realm of speculation into theory based on a platform of solidly supported facts.

Comments: Since Frytz expounded on this motivation, advances in DNA research have bolstered the probability of this theory being accurate. Attention is invited to the sections “DNA Drama,” “Mystery of the Junk DNA,” and “Biological SETI,” on pages 237-246, of my book, Venus Rising: A Concise History of the Second Planet (Terra Alta, West Virginia: Headline Books, 2015). Stepping outside a purely religious context, there are those in the scientific community who maintain that over the centuries alien DNA has managed to creep into the human genome, slowly transforming and “stepping up” our species to a higher evolutionary plateau.

2. Political: Here many writers have suggested conquest as a motive for UFO visitations, particularly in the early years of the UFO phenomenon (1947-1957). However, in this, I am in perfect agreement with the United States Air Force in their early statements that UFOs present, and have shown, no threat to the security of the United States, or for that matter, the world. To what degree of alienness alien technology might be, it is hard to comprehend or understand why they have waited so long for their conquest, if that be their motive. It is illogical to assume they wait for us to get stronger. Indeed, if they have the means of crossing 27

The Real Resident Aliens

space, they should have the intelligence and the technology to vastly outdo us in military capability; so why not get it over with? No, after all this time, conquest is surely not a viable motive, as it is in any alliance.

It’s unlikely that the UFOs and the government who built them want to form any alliance with the Earth since they must be so much more superior to us. It would be like the United States forming an alliance with the bushmen tribes of Australia against the treat of World War III with Russia- Why bother? And even if this were the motive, why the long wait? Indeed, the failure of the UFO occupants to make contact with the Earth’s governments after all this time is the major stumbling block when assessing the motives of the aliens.

Comments: One can readily find agreement with Frytz’ assessment of the situation, as did a now deceased contemporary of him, the preeminent esotericist and Fortean researcher, John A. Keel (1930-2009),2 who reached the following conclusion regarding the entirety of ufology in 1969: “So the whole bag is far more complicated than just sitting around waiting for the Venusians to land on the White House lawn. If they were going to do that, they would have landed at the Vatican in 1600; or they would have landed in London in 1200, or they would have landed in Jerusalem, or what have you.” The same can even more so be said of conquest by extraterrestrials: If they were going to take over down here, they would have done it long ago.

3. Adventure: It is perhaps possible that a family outing to Earth might be to the aliens as a camping or boating trip is to us and perhaps could be very exciting for an alien- something new and different- a place to “get away from it all,” so to speak. I can just hear an alien wife saying, “But dear, we’ve vacationed so often on Saturn’s rings and Jupiter’s moons are so common place; let’s go somewhere different this year- I know, Earth!

It’s not expensive and not dry like Mars. I’ll bet it’s really fun to watch Earth barbarians and scare Earth airline pilots and besides, Klobbpy needs to get an unusual pet for school, which are abundant on Earth.

After all, the Jones’ did it last year….”

And, of course, I guess the mother or cigar ships could be alien cruisers or some such. But it is a bit too much to take, and bit disrespectful, to perhaps think of ourselves as a tourist attraction or museum for aliens from outer space.

2 28

Raymond A. Keller, Flying Saucers from Venus (Terra Alta, West Virginia: Headline Books, 2021), See Chapter 6, “Evolution of an Enlightened Ufologist.”

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

Comments: Perhaps this ascribed motivation of adventure is not as far-fetched at Frytz seems to think it is. Attention is invited to Chapter 3 of my book, Vast Venus Conspiracy (Terra Alta, West Virginia: Headline Books, 2020), titled the “Kenneth Arnold Files,” where we explore various cases of the Venusians and other friendly extraterrestrials visiting the Earth for the purposes of camping, fishing, horseback riding, practicing nudism, swimming, and conducting various other outdoor activities. There is also a section in that chapter, “Venusian Tourism on Earth, George Adamski Speaks,” where the late California contactee opines on the importance of educational and recreational visits of our nearest planetary neighbors to the Earth. Adamski highlighted the importance of this motivation to the Venusians and other members of Confederation planets in coming to our world when he said that, “One never grows so old as to stop attending classes of instruction. Periodic travel on their planet and elsewhere through the cosmos in their luxury space liners is enjoyed by every individual on Venus, regardless of age. They have learned well that, although one can learn many things through the study of records and miniature replicas, travel is a source of unending practical education which gives not only pleasure, but lessons of lasting pleasure, never forgotten.”

4. Social: Might then, as has been suggested, UFO visits be social visits?

Is the Earth a place where aliens can release their castoffs, perhaps, or a place to help relieve alien overpopulation pressures? This is very unlikely. To use the Earth as their dumping grounds would presuppose the aliens to be able to exactly fit in with our society. They would have to look identical to humans, which is incomprehensible. Besides, what of past history? What of birth certificates and all the pieces of identification one is blessed with in today’s world? How would the aliens get that?

Certainly, it would seem to be easier for the aliens either to conquer us and then populate the Earth, or adapt to some other uninhabited planet than for them to infiltrate here in small numbers.

29

The Real Resident Aliens

5.

Neanderthals in the Pyrenees Mountains of Western Europe 60,000 years ago watching aliens unloading intergalactic criminals on the Earth, a veritable “prison planet.” Source: Human Exile On Earth – Earth Is A Prison Planet (ancestryofman.com).

Comments: As has been suggested in various science fiction books and movies, perhaps the Earth has served as a sort of intergalactic prison colony, much as Australia once served the interests of the British Empire as a dumping ground for its criminal element. While ufologist Frytz tended toward dismissing the social equation in UFO visitations, the DNA evidence and legends of ancient astronauts like the Annunaki creating humans as a slave race through interbreeding with local inhabitants, needs to be seriously weighed in the balance. If the Earth is a penal colony and humanity is a slave race, then the prisoner who believes himself free, will not rebel against his slavery, he will merely bow his head in silent acquiescence, blinded by illusions, his mind ensnared, bound within chains of ignorance. If the Annunaki never left, are we still living under a matrix system imposed upon us by them countless millennia ago?

6. Self-Preservation: Authors have mentioned that the UFO flux did not really begin until just after the world had entered the atomic age, hence a correlation or connection has been assumed, that UFO occupants are scared of us or scared of what we would do in waging atomic warfare and/or just using nuclear power in, and hence contaminating, space; and that is why UFOs occupants are keeping an eye out for us and on us.

There is no real reason to believe that UFOs really became numerous after World War II. That records and other observations from the past are not as frequent is true; but that does not mean that UFOs were not around in as great numbers. Anyway, there is surely no proof of this 30

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

and, no doubt, UFOs could forcibly stop us if they were so worried. I’m sure that fact that we have nuclear bombs and other potential peaceful nuclear devices, like power plants, is of no great concern to the aliens, even if they are to ourselves. Just as the bows and arrows of the Native Americans were of no great concern to the American settlers when compared to our rifles, so our A-bombs must seem primitive to UFO aliens. And our nuclear capacity does not endanger the region of outer space to us through contamination, not compared to natural radiation already present in space.

Comments: Intelligence gathered on UFOs since 1969 has provided a contraindication of Frytz’ assertions. That there are so many UFOs being reported near nuclear facilities and military installations worldwide— and why there isn’t more urgency on the part of the United States government to assess their potential national-security threat, have been top concerns voiced by a team of high-ranking former United States Department of Defense and intelligence officials, aerospace-industry veterans, academics and others associated with To the Stars Academy of Arts and Science. To the Stars Academy of Arts and Sciences is a company co-founded by Tom DeLonge, guitarist of Blink-182 and Angels and Airwaves; Harold E. Puthoff; and Jim Semivan. The company is composed of aerospace, science, and entertainment divisions and located in Las Vegas, Nevada. The Academy team has been investigating a wide range of these sightings— and advocating more serious United States government attention. For additional information, see the recently updated To the Stars Academy of Arts and Science official website at To The Stars Academy of Arts & Science (Accessed 7 March 2021).

7. Contact: One universal favorite is the contactee; who, in this writer’s opinion, should be taken with a grain of salt. In this category, it is assumed that UFO aliens are deeply religious and their mission is along missionary lines. However, there is no pattern in UFO phenomena, nor any other reliable proof that aliens are religious or could even care less about converting us down here. Anyway, if UFOs have been around for at least 22 years, with no attempt along these lines, excepting the very fortunate contactees, of course, it certainly seems they are not very ambitious at converting us…. Now are they?

31

The Real Resident Aliens

Comments: It seems to me that the UFO occupants may be more interesting in utilizing the contactees as a vanguard in planting the seeds of illumination preparing the human race for its coming transition into a greater galactic community. Much of the knowledge imparted by the contactees about conditions conducive to life on other planets or even in other dimensions or planes of existence, have been vindicated with the ever-onward march of scientific investigation and discovery.

8. Economic: Although not thought of too awfully seriously, some writers have suggested interplanetary trade as a motive and a solution. However, it is unlikely we would have anything of economic value to offer these aliens; and again, why have they not manifested themselves and stated their desires?

Comments: Nuclear physicist and prominent ufologist Stanton T. Friedman (29 July 1934 – 13 May 2019) had another opinion in regard to the Earth as a source of natural resources with extremely important economic value to an alien civilization. In addressing the 12 June 1971 Midwest UFO Conference in St. Louis, Missouri, Friedman exploded many misconceptions previously held by many in the scientific community about UFOs, including Frytz’ economic contentions: The nuclear physicist declared: “I should stress that the Earth also has readily available supplies of substances which we weren’t aware of or at least didn’t care about until recently. Hydrogen isotopes are here in profusion and might be used to fuel fusion propulsion systems. Liquid water is a far more convenient form of hydrogen than a gaseous ammonia or hydrogen itself. Water, incidentally, has more hydrogen per cubic inch than has liquid hydrogen, strange as that may seem.

“Many other isotopes are also available along with the previously mentioned metals; and others, many of which were only lab curiosities until this century, such as uranium, rhenium, tantalum and zirconium. The density of the Earth and the presence of water vapor, oxygen, nitrogen and a magnetic field can be determined from off the Earth.

“The Earth is also an attractive site for the growing of a fantastic variety of substances requiring water and sunlight and fertilizer of one sort or another, especially if one has access to all locations with an Earth Excursion Module (Friedman’s term for an alien spaceship visiting our planet). Just consider the variety of farming conditions available in terms of type of soil, latitude, growing 32

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

season, altitude, humidity, etc. The sunlight is free and readily available. The atmosphere, ocean and surfaces also provide a convenient source of raw materials for chemical processing, either here, onboard the mothership or on the Moon.”

9. Other: The only thing that I can think of as “other” is the time-worn theory called the Hollow Earth theory, whereas the subterranean Earth is the home to another race, far in advance of us, who use flying saucers to journey around. This idea has no supporting evidence for it and plenty of evidence against it, as anyone with a remote knowledge of geology, math and physics can testify or assert. Only the extreme outer limits of the lunatic fringe have religious faith in it; and any further consideration of it here is a waste of time, energy and paper.

Comments: The idea that extraterrestrials have secret bases hidden from view, or even cloaked, undersea, in orbit, positioned on the far side of the Moon or stationed in vast subterranean caverns is not a new one. The reader’s attention is invited to my book Lady Columba Venus Revelations (Terra Alta, West Virginia: Headline Books, 2020), where 1950’s and 1960’s contactee Columba Krebs provides a detailed account of her visits to some of these saucer bases. There may even be some evidence linking the presence of cavern dwellers to an ethereal region, as I noted in the series of articles on the “Riley Crabb Revelations” that I wrote for Lon Strickler’s Phantoms and Monsters website.

10. Scientific: This leaves me with the final grouping of motives, presented last as I feel it has the largest potential for being the correct solution.

Other motives by themselves or in combinations together as listed above might be classified as sub-motives; but the motive is scientific. Why? For any race capable of advanced technology, curiosity, and hence an understanding of science, is a must of necessity. If one word, in fact, could be applied to describe the human being, it would have to be curiosity.

The same should be applied to aliens. Raw materials plus intelligence plus ability plus curiosity equals knowledge; and technology is probably a universal law scattered throughout the millions of extraterrestrial societies in the vast cosmos.

It is curiosity in the above formula which led man to explore the universe and compel him to journey outward and explore everything which crosses his path. The same must of necessity be assumed and applied to aliens. Curiosity is the motive that I believe drove the 33

The Real Resident Aliens

UFOnauts here. Perhaps our atomic explosions attracted this curiosity, although I believe UFOs have been around in fairly great numbers for more than just 22 years. Perhaps it was a chance encounter by an alien ship that has now led to the armada of ships. Perhaps it was a planned, routine survey taken once every 10,000 years in the monitoring of the Earth.

In any event, I do believe it was curiosity that led the UFOs here, much the same as curiosity makes man explore Antarctica. Already and clearly, there is enough evidence available to indicate that the UFOs are carrying out a widespread investigation of the Earth. Speculation into this area, along with reported UFO observations and data of UFO phenomena, could fill many volumes, to be sure.

It is doubtful the aliens have any personal interest in it other than a scientific one. They would, perhaps no doubt, look at us as we do at a society of ants. And it is my prediction that when the UFOnauts finish their work, whether for good or until the next routine survey 10,000 years from now, they will leave, leaving us with the unsolved mystery we have had for the past 22 years. Attempts on our part toward communication will be unsuccessful since “they” have clearly no desire to talk with us.

Why should they? And if they did, why haven’t they, in the last 22 years, even tried? I neglect the unsupported fables of the contactees, of course.

It is funny we are spending such much time and energy to study UFO aliens, when most likely they are having a much easier time of it in studying us.

Comments: Clearly, there is something of great import in the message of the contactees for all of humankind. Despite individualized apperception of the UFO phenomenon on the part of each contactee,3 the fact remains that they are the harbingers of a new age of enlightenment on the cusp of humankind’s more active participation in the greater cosmic community. A true sense of this was captured as early as 1959 by the great Swiss psychologist Dr. Carl G. Jung in his classic work, Flying Saucers: A Modern Myth of Things Seen in the Sky (Brooklyn, New York: Harcourt Brace, 1959). Jung was particularly obsessed with the case of the California contactee Orfeo Angelucci, with whom he placed a lot of confidence.

3 34

Raymond A. Keller, Flying Saucers and the Venus Legacy (Terra Alta, West Virginia: Headline Books, 2021), Chapter 1, “Apperception in the UFO Phenomenon.”

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

John M. Frytz predicted in 1969 that, “The work of the ufologist will not get any easier. They cannot ‘prove’ the existence of UFOs now; and it seems unlikely they will in the near future; and that future shouldn’t last much longer as any day the aliens’ work or curiosity could be finished and satisfied and they will go back to where they have come from, leaving us to our frustrations. Perhaps the UFO phenomenon of today will then become the “Atlantis legend” of a couple of thousand years from now.”

It was clear that Frytz had been overly sold on the so-called “scientific approach” to the UFO phenomenon. It has now become apparent that UFOs and the search for extraterrestrial or ultra-dimensional intelligences goes far beyond the reach of objective science; and closely parallels sundry aspects of the paranormal, shifting the focus on the subject more to the realm of subjectivity.

UFOs and their occupants may have more to do with a consciously projected future of super science and abundance for humankind as explorers in space and time than it every did with any test tube analysis of crashed saucer material and dead alien bodies, insofar as physical trace evidence for their existence is concerned.

35

The Real “Resident Aliens,” Part VI People from Other Planets Are Living Among Us As the co-editor of the Flying Saucer Report (Bedford, Ohio, 1967-1972), I was always keeping an eye out for any references to extraterrestrials among us. One of the more popular magazines at the time, dealing with paranormal phenomena of every kind and published out of Hicksville, New York, was Beyond; and I made sure that I snatched up every monthly issue from the local newsstand. In their June 1969 edition, there was a letter to the editor from an individual, Miss V. Paxton of West Virginia, who claimed to be originally from another planet. It read as follows: Nyockha of Pegasus “I am originally from Pegasus. My home planet orbits a dense, compact star.

Our atmosphere is more like a bluish haze. There are no clouds such as are found on Earth. The terrain consists mostly of large, black craters and high, flat-topped mountains. Plant growth is not green, as our planet is nearer to our sun than the Earth is to its own Sun; therefore, the plants take on more of a chartreuse shade.

I have been in spiritual contact with my original parents since childhood. They brought me here to be born on Earth. I even remember the trip here. My soulname is Nyockha.”

While the magazine only gave West Virginia as her Earth address, the editors had the envelope and knew of the exact location; but when they followed up on it and tried to get in contact with Ms. Paxton to conduct an interview with her for a follow-up article to her letter, nothing turned up at that address. Martin M. Cummings, a staff writer for Beyond, reported in the November 1969 issue, that Ms. Paxton’s letter was not the only one where the writer claimed to be an alien. Since the publication of the June issue until the November issue was out in print, four persons had written to the editorial offices with similar claims of extraterrestrial origin, either for themselves or someone they knew.

36

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

One letter came from a subscriber living in Lima, Peru, who told of a 64-yearold woman living alone on the outskirts of the small village of Cerrado, Peru, about a five-hour journey distant by car from the capital city. The elderly, greyhaired woman, Carmen del Playa, was then working part time at the ceramic factory in Cerrado. The Beyond subscriber insisted that her friend Carmen was indeed from another planet and had arrived on Earth 30 years ago in a spaceship made of organic material that disintegrated immediately upon contact with the surface of our world. She has never been married and has neither children nor relatives on the Earth, at least none that anybody has any knowledge of.

According to her own telling of the story, she does have a father, a mother and two brothers living on a planet a little larger than the Earth, called Plazenile, that orbits a red star situated on the rim of the Andromeda galaxy.

“I was one of three citizens chosen to undertake a space exploration in a specially prepared craft,” said Carmen del Playa to, adding that, “It was powered by an energy consumption system similar to that used by the human body itself and constructed of organic materials capable of withstanding pressure and producing oxygen and food through systematic growth on its walls.

“At the time of the craft’s departure from our planet, I was roughly 364 years old, or in early middle age according to standards of Plazenile. My two companions were younger. We were trained in the science of ‘Utente,’ or the gathering of knowledge through osmotic perception of environment.

“Our task was to explore any inhabited planets we found, and return to our own planet with information that could be used to solve Plazenile’s greatest problem- a shortage of water which may destroy all life there within the next few thousand years.

“Unfortunately, some ingredient in the soil of Earth caused our craft to disintegrate as soon as we landed one dark night in the jungle, not far from this village.

“In the confusion, I became separated from my companions. I do not know what became of them. But I wandered into this village and was fed and clothed by kind people. Since I cannot return to my world, I have remained here ever since, leading the quiet and productive life which all citizens of Plazenile consider the highest and most noble.”

In Cummings’ article in Beyond, where he provides a synopsis of the lives of the four alien letter writers, he reports that the residents of Cerrado found Carmen sitting in the village square one morning in 1939. She was wearing a dress of strange fabric that looked like something akin to “dried grass.” At first, she did not understand anything that the people said to her and did not 37

The Real Resident Aliens

say anything in return. After several days, however, she began to miraculously speak fluent Spanish, telling a strange tale of this other planet, Plazenile, and of learning to speak Spanish and obtaining a knowledge of Peruvian customs through Utente.

She was named “del Playa” because of the name she gave for her planetPlazenile. She threw herself into hard work and settled down in the village, becoming a good neighbor to all. Everyone in the village said that, apart from her “crazy story,” she was generous, kind and extremely intelligent. Cummings noted that everyone who came to know her, came to quickly realize that Carmen del Playa’s vocabulary and education were far beyond that of the average Peruvian peasant woman and that she never gave any indication of emotional derangement.

Carmen noted that one day her friend from Lima asked her why she, a middle-aged 364-year-old on her home planet, had aged so rapidly in the past 30 years since her arrival on Earth in 1939? She shrugged and replied that the organic environment on Earth was different from that on Plazenile and that her rapid aging was due to the lack of certain necessary hormones provided by Plazenile’s atmosphere.

“I am not sad about this, though,” insisted Carmen del Playa, noting that, “This is a good Like the mystic Sufi poet Rumi, some place and these people are kind; but I do not come to an understanding early in life that Earth is not their real home. wish to live the average Plazenilean life of 700 or Source: Fodor’s Travel Guide (https:// 800 years without my family, friends or home.” www.fodors.com/).

Soul Traveler from Deruel Another interesting case emerged from Perugia, Italy, where 79-year-old Arturo Senziadorro claims that he was transported to Earth by “soul travel” from another planet. Like our dear friend Omnec Onec, the Venusian master from the Fifth Dimensional Plane of Venus (Venus Etheria, as it known among esotericists), Arturo maintains that his extraterrestrial soul had entered the body of a dying child, the real Senziadorro, at the moment when that child’s own soul had departed to the heavenly realms. Of course, the strictly Roman Catholic residents of Perugia did not know what to make out of Arturo Senziadorro or his fantastic claims. But all of his neighbors insisted that Arturo had been telling these “wild tales” ever since he was old enough to talk.

38

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

“I was only a child myself,” wrote the white-bearded farmer Arturo in his letter to Beyond, adding that, “My real father was one of the most renowned metaphysicians on the planet of Deruel, far distant from the Earth.

“Deruel was dying. Clouds of fire covered most of our terrain. The sea was a turbulence of great waves and the land heaved and rocked with quakes. Fire spouted from the barren, stone deserts north of our home.

“My father knew that our world was doomed. He had no thought for himself; and my mother was dead. I, his only child, was the one he chose to send across the universe by soul travel to enter the body of a child.

“The immense mental and spiritual effort necessary for this made it impossible for my father to come with me, or send others.

“There may have been other metaphysicians who sent themselves or their loved ones to Earth, the planet chosen because of its similarity to Deruel, but I do not know of them.”

Arturo Senziadorro, who lives in a small, stone house about three miles outside of Perugia, claims that his soul occupied that of the dying boy when that original Arturo was but three years old. The neighbors recall that once upon a time, when Arturo was three years old, he was desperately ill, suffering with a severe attack of pneumonia. They were all surprised, however, when the child had a miraculous recovery, even after a doctor from Perugia had said that he didn’t think the young Arturo was going to pull out of his dire condition.

When Arturo was old enough to talk in relatively complete sentences and make himself understood, when he was about four years old, he began to tell his neighbors where he was from and what had happened to him on the dual dimensional planes. His story was essentially the same as when he wrote about it in his letter to Beyond. Like Carmen in Peru, he has been thoroughly examined by doctors who have certified him to be basically sane, except for his one fixation about being an extraterrestrial. “Though I speak with the brain and the tongue of another person’s body,” asserts Arturo, “I retain clear memories of my home planet.”

He further explained, “It was hot- much, much hotter than Earth; but we Deruelians were constructed to stand heat better than Earth creatures. I don’t remember many machines. I think our civilization was more spiritually advanced than Earth, but less advanced technically. I was too young to know much about what went on in our world; but I don’t remember any talk of wars.

Everyone seemed to love each other more than on this planet.

“My most vivid memory is of our food. We ate only leafy plants which provided us with water so we didn’t need to drink liquids. Our bodies were 39

The Real Resident Aliens

similar to those of Earth creatures, except that the heads were much larger. Our homes, I think I remember, were all the same- low, mound-shaped domes made of some sort of stone.”

“Implanted ET Knowledge” Cummings, the writer for Beyond, says that a correspondent from a prominent French newspaper sent him the following story about yet another extraterrestrial living their life out on Earth: Georges Drounelle, twenty-seven, an assistant hospital pharmacist, claims that he was born on another planet and transported here in a spacecraft several months after his birth.

Drounelle, who was found on the doorstep of an orphanage in Nantes, France, insists that his still immature brain was “implanted” with the knowledge that he was of extraterrestrial origin.

He further says that the space craft, which left him on Earth, then returned to his home planet in another galaxy, leaving him to grow up on Earth and learn as much about Earth culture as possible. At some undetermined time in the future, he says, the craft will return to pick him up and take him back to his home planet, where he will deliver his information about the Earth.

Drounelle says he remembers nothing about his home since he was brought here as an infant, and only provided with the knowledge of his mission by “implanting” techniques he cannot explain.

He does state, however, that he is sure he I not the only child from his planet brought to Earth. There are at least a dozen others living near enough to him to make him feel their presence, Drounelle claims.

Are the aims of his planet friendly toward Earth?

“I don’t know,” he says. “It is no concern of mine. My first allegiance is to my own planet, far away. If they chose to be benefactors to this planet, I will help them in that also.”

In a series of tests given by a psychologist interested in Drounelle’s tale, he showed abnormal ESP abilities, and what was termed a “remarkable” ability to concentrate the powers of his mind and will.

Once, at a theatre performance, when a hypnotist tried to hypnotize Drounelle, the curtain had to be rung down because Drounelle himself hypnotized the hypnotist and ordered him to set himself on fire, which he did.

According to those who know him, Drounelle also seems to possess an abnormally high amount of static electricity in his body. Sparks leap from his fingers when he touches metal.

40

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

Crashed Space Capsule in Turkey Another relevant report has been received from Ankara, Turkey, where police had been engaged in an all-out search, lasting six days, for the missing occupants of what has been termed a “space capsule” which crashed to Earth in a virtually deserted industrial area on the outskirts of the city.

One of the occupants was a young woman of approximately 25 years of age. She was found stunned near the remains of the craft and wearing a onepiece, blue garment of metallic cloth. After being taken into custody, she told authorities that she had been accompanied by two others and that all three of them were from another planet. This young female alien explained that the intellectual adjustments that were common to all inhabitants of her native world enabled her to easily speak Turkish after a couple of days. She also said that she and her two companions were sent to Earth because it is a planet very similar in size and atmospheric composition to her home world. She hoped that the some of the plant life found on Earth might prove suitable as a source of seeds that she could take home with her to help alleviate a possible food shortage on her own planet.

There had been a flash of intense light streaking toward the ground, followed by a loud explosion in the area that brought police and crowds of onlookers rushing to the apparent crash site of a mysterious object. Unfortunately, when her space craft, or what was left of it, had been found, there was nothing but a heap of shattered, twisted and totally unrecognizable metal at the scene, about the size of a large American car. How that young woman, who initially was in a state of shock and unable to move, survived such a violent crash has not been determined. As to her companions, the extraterrestrial woman said that they were unharmed, and after tending to her, moved out in a northerly direction to conduct a reconnaissance of the region. They had planned on coming back to get her with help when it would be safe to move her. Not believing her story about being an extraterrestrial, the Turkish authorities assumed the wreckage to be that of an automobile of unknown make; but they had been unable to explain her strange costume.

In his article, Cummings stated that, “Reliable sources are pressing for a thorough scientific examination of the young woman, it having been suggested she could be the carrier of an as yet unidentified plant disease, which might result in disastrous damage to crops all over the world.” In the meantime, she was held incommunicado; and reports that were leaking out from of place of detention suggested that she had gone on a hunger strike. There were other unusual reports, however, that declared that the woman did not need to eat 41

The Real Resident Aliens

any more than twice a month, as is allegedly the case with the all the other inhabitants of her native planet.

Cummings queried persons at the Turkish national intelligence service headquarters in Ankara and was told that a “security lid” had been placed on all information concerning the crash and crash area. Authorities at the top of the organization even insisted that no such incident ever occurred, despite numerous photographs and documentation that appeared in local newspapers.

Cummings also mentioned that the editorial offices of Beyond received one more alien report just before the November edition went to press. It seems that an elderly man had been discovered in a small town on the outskirts of La Paz, the capital of Bolivia, who claims to have arrived on Earth from a distant solar system in an organic space craft fitting the description supplied by Carmen del Playa in Peru about the spaceship that brought her to our lovely planet.

Cummings reported that all the personnel at Beyond were already on the case, attempting to verify any similarities with Carmen del Playa’s story.

42

The Real “Resident Aliens,” Part VII

“What’s a president gonna do? I built a 50-foot wall at El Paso and this smart aleck alien showed up with a 51-foot ladder! Maybe Joe Biden will figure out a better immigration policy.” See “Weird News,” Huff Post, 31 August 2015.

An Illegal Alien, of the Extraterrestrial Kind Official UFO was a mass market magazine published nine times yearly during the 1970s and 1980s by Countrywide Publications (New York, New York). In the May 1975 issue of this publication, editor Russ A. Rueger, Ph.D., revealed that one of Official UFO magazine’s staff writers was actually an extraterrestrial.

“As you can imagine,” wrote Rueger, “staff come and go at the offices of Official UFO. Government pressures, nervous breakdowns, and a generally stressful environment all contribute to the rapid turnover of personnel. If you’re completely sane when you start working here, we like to say that you won’t stay that way for long! Unfortunately, sometimes that turns out to be true.”

It was January 1975 and one of the ace correspondents for Official UFO was out on assignment. Everything was fairly quiet around the office, so Rueger and the other personnel decided to leave early from work one Thursday afternoon.

43

The Real Resident Aliens

But when they returned on Friday morning, they found an unusual manuscript on the desk of one recently hired staff writer, William Cobb, who was nowhere to be seen.

In Rueger’s estimation, Cobb showed great promise as both a UFO investigator and staff reporter. He was sad to see him go. The editor and other staff had noticed that Cobb always seemed nervous. He never wrote articles under his own name. When Rueger asked Cobb why he was always writing under different aliases, the staff writer simply replied, “I needed to protect myself.”

The editor felt that it would be unfair to reveal exactly which articles were written by Cobb under the sundry aliases over the few months he had been working at Official UFO. “With all due respect to Mr. Cobb,” wrote Rueger, “we will not divulge exactly which articles because some of them were risky and inflammatory.”

Slightly more than four months had passed since Cobb first disappeared.

“Since we discovered this manuscript, we haven’t seen nor heard of Mr. Cobb, and he hasn’t even returned to pick up his last paycheck,” noted the editor, who added that, “This was very unusual behavior, particularly for Cobb. So, William, if you’re out there reading this, we hope that everything is all right and that you will get in touch with us.”

Despite editing a magazine that deals with exceptional phenomena, Rueger was of the opinion that the story Cobb left behind in the manuscript was “patently ridiculous” and only served to demonstrate what working in a hectic office environment can do in shaking up one’s sanity. It was good, however, that Rueger went ahead and published Cobb’s manuscript exactly as he and the office personnel had found it. A photo of William Cobb was published in the Official UFO magazine asking readers who might know where he is to make a report to the editor at the publication’s mailing address of 257 Park Avenue South, New York, New York 10010. He never did check back in with the office; and here we have another case of one intimately tied to the ongoing UFO saga of completely disappearing off of the face of the Earth.

The last manuscript of William Cobb, staff writer for Official UFO, follows, detailing information on the alien he was working with, side-by-side, on a daily basis and why he (Cobb) decided to disappear: The Moon is out now; and I can see it coming in through the blinds. It used to comfort me but it doesn’t anymore. I’ve got to get out of here; but I guess I owe it to the readers of Official UFO to tell them what’s going on. I hope I have a chance to finish it.

44

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

I took the job as reporter here because I believe that the government is trying to suppress information about UFOs. I have seen several of them myself at various points in my life, so I know they exist. When I was young, I used to think that everybody saw them; and it wasn’t until later I realized that many people still don’t even believe they exist. So, I finally decided to share my knowledge with the public through this magazine. But the time has come for me to move on; so, I am telling my last news story.

One of the writers at this magazine has astonishing luck in getting great stories. No matter what he sets out to investigate, he always comes back with an amazing revelation. I have followed him in order to learn his journalistic secrets, but to no avail. My first reaction was jealousy, but soon that gave way to stronger emotion.

Frequently, readers of this magazine have certainly read his material. He writes under many names, most frequently “R. J.” At first glance, he appears perfectly normal; but there is a strange glint in his eyes at all times; and he always seems to be laughing at some private joke that only he can hear. One thing about him is certain, though, and that is he is one of the most important journalists of the decade. People who work for this magazine do not get nominated for Pulitzer Prizes because the world doesn’t believe what we are telling them; but if we were, “R. J.” would probably be the first to be so rewarded. Still, how he got his great scoops remained a mystery to me.

He kept strange hours, did strange things, ate strange goods- and soon I began to suspect the truth. “R. J.,” a writer for Official UFO, was himself an alien! Suddenly everything made sense. He was not a reporter so much as a publicist. When the aliens decided to reveal information about the human race, “R. J.” would bring it into the office, write it down and publish it. Our entire organization was acting as a front for aliens.

I had not fully convinced myself of this by any means because it was admittedly a little far-fetched. If aliens wanted to transmit information to Earth, they could disrupt our television communications or our radio waves without even trying. When then, would they send an alien in human form to our offices?

The idea was too silly to consider.

Still, I began following “R. J.” with renewed vigor. This was the story I had been waiting for. If it was true, then I could…. could what? Without knowing “R. J.’s” purpose, I would not be able to say anything. One day I cornered him as he was putting on his coat at lunch time.

“Why are you here?” I asked him; but all he did was look confused. I don’t know whether he suspected what I was up to, but it was a stupid move on my 45

The Real Resident Aliens

part all the same. If his intentions were hostile, he might have killed me right there. I had to be more careful.

My golden opportunity for research came this month when “R. J.” was sent away on assignment. He was investigating new evidence of ancient astronauts unearthed at the south of France and was not expected to return for several weeks. I began staying late in order to pursue my investigative work. I searched his desk and found nothing except some paper clips, a red pen, a sheet of KoRec-Type and a prize from a box of candy. I was amused by how mundane it all was and applauded “R. J.” for being so careful to cover his tracks. He was sneakier than I thought. I would have to work harder.

I unearthed every article he had written and began going over them with a “finetoothed comb.” I immediately noticed several things. Most of the stories centered on ancient astronaut controversies and all the evidence that he reported supported the existence of aliens in our past. Other stories involved locating alien interference at specific times in human history.

Still others reported finding evidence of aliens in everyday life.

What emerged from all these stories was the idea that aliens were beneficent creatures who had been helping mankind along the path to maturity since we were small one-celled lifeforms. Aliens have always been with us and have always helped us, but always in secret.

William Cobb, a staff writer for Official They have chosen when to reveal themselves, UFO, right before he disappeared.

Apparently, Cobb knew too much about more and more frequently in recent times. flying saucers, for his own good.

If all of this was a well-kept secret, why was it being revealed in the pages of Official UFO? Either “R. J.” was a renegade alien who was no longer a part of the extraterrestrial master plan or he was a major part of the plan. Both views made sense; but the second one made even more sense than the first. With the space program faltering and man wallowing in the 1970s, accomplishing nothing, the time had come for more severe measures to be taken by the aliens. So, “R. J.” had come to the offices of Official UFO in order to start acclimating humanity to the idea of aliens. Once humanity is sufficiently “prepared,” then the lid can come off and the aliens can reveal themselves.

46

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

That’s the story of “R. J.,” as far as I can determine. On the back of one of his pads of paper, I found some doodling, but doodling unlike any I’d ever seen.

It was a solar system, but one totally unlike ours, with a pulsating binary star and six ringed planets. Written underneath the drawing was something- I don’t know what- because it isn’t in any language I’ve ever seen on Earth. So now I am writing this.

Should I have revealed “R. J.’s” plan? What will they do to me when they find out? It’s obvious that I will have to develop a whole new identity. I will also need a new job. The world doesn’t need me to tell them about UFOs anymore. They’ve got “R. J.” Goodbye.

—William Cobb 10 January 1975 New York City, New York

47

The Real “Resident Aliens,” Part VIII UFOs Themselves as Living Organisms The man who inaugurated the “Age of Flying Saucers,” civilian pilot Kenneth Arnold of Boise, Idaho, when interviewed by a reporter from the Portland, Oregon, Journal (17 October 1975), stated that he was more convinced than ever that the nine UFOs he reported as flying in formation over Mt. Rainier in Washington State on 24 June 1947 were “something real.” At the time of the interview, Arnold had turned 60 years old and had grown somewhat wary of media. Arnold expressed concern that a synopsis of his views, if unaccompanied by an extensive background on the subject of flying saucers, would make him “sound like a crackpot.”

To assuage his fears, the reporter said that he could present Arnold with written questions so that the flying saucer pioneer could take his time and write out all of his answers. Arnold agreed to these terms. Arnold informed the Portland reporter that, “I got into this thing (ufology) by accident; and I’ve been bugged about it for 30 years. I have never tried to exploit this subject and I don’t want to be exploited.”

Arnold remarked that, “These things (unexplained aerial phenomena) have never really been investigated.” Despite the alleged “scientific” conclusions arrived at in the so-called Air Force-sponsored Condon Report on UFOs conducted at the University of Colorado at Boulder and published in 1969, Arnold expressed little respect for the final document. “Flying saucer is a misnomer, of sorts,” explained Arnold, adding that, “Most of these objects are raffe-shaped. They look something like the axes that were used to behead people back in the Middle Ages.”

Since making the famous 24 June 1947 report, Arnold had five other occasions in which he encountered UFOs. Based on these observations, he has developed his own theory about the true nature of the objects: That UFOs are not spacecraft, but are themselves living organisms. “It’s the way they move,” 48

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

explained the experienced pilot. “It’s more like something alive than a mechanical craft. The Air Force never released the best pictures of these things. They have a spot in the middle that pulsates like a heart.”

As far as the implications of this theory, Arnold was asked by the reporter, “How does a living organism do what UFOs do?”

“I don’t know. I have no answers,” Arnold honestly replied. “It’s a mystery; just as it is a mystery why the grass grows or a mystery how Christ walked on the water.”

Arnold felt that he needed to clarify the last statement, so he commented that, “I’m not bringing religion into this. I’m not a religious man, in the conventional sense.”

Two days after Arnold’s historic sighting of nine “saucer-like objects” flying at a high speed in the vicinity of Mt. Rainier in the Cascade Range, the Associated Press ran the above national wire story as printed in the Montreal Gazette (Quebec, Canada) on 26 June 1947. The story gets a couple of facts in the case wrong: Kenneth Arnold was a fire extinguisher salesman who was returning from a business trip when he spotted the UFOs; and Mt. Rainier is located in the state of Washington, not Oregon.

49

The Real “Resident Aliens,” Part IX Aliens Are Landing in Flying Saucers An interesting article in the 20 July 1974 issue of the National Star (New York City, New York) by Roger Langley, “Have UFOnauts Landed on Earth?” details how the world’s then foremost authority on UFOs, Dr. J. Allen Hynek, came to the conclusion that UFOs, for the most part, were manned vehicles from other planets and that in many cases involving the actual landing of UFOs, beings have been seen onboard the ships, disembarking from them or embarking into them. Hynek, an astrophysicist from Northwestern University in Evanston, Illinois, first became involved in UFO investigations when he was hired by the Air Force back in 1947 as a scientific consultant to investigate the phenomena for them under Project Sign (1947-1949), Project Grudge (1950-1951) and later Project Blue Book (1952-1969). In all the time that he was looking into UFOs on behalf of the United States Air Force, Hynek investigated more than 1,200 UFO landings; and in 300 of these cases, beings or creatures were reported in or around the craft.

In some of the more outstanding cases looked into by Hynek, there was or were: • Two fishermen in Pascagoula, Mississippi, who swore that they were taken aboard a spaceship and examined by silvery-skinned creatures with no eyes.

• A police chief in Alabama, following a radio call to check out a possible flying saucer landing, took photos of a six-foot being in a metallic suit who ran off faster than the chief ’s own police cruiser could possibly pursue it.

• An Italian engineer who photographed an alleged spaceman emerging from a flying saucer.

50

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

•

An Anglican priest in Papua New Guinea who described in detail a UFO landing and some humanoids working on the top deck of the saucershaped craft.

Up until the closure of Project Blue Book in 1969, Hynek was bound to follow the Air Force directives to debunk the credibility of UFO reports on every occasion; but in 1974, as an independent scientific investigator, he was no longer bound by these restrictions. To this astrophysicist, it was beyond reason to dismiss all of these UFO reports as “lies, practical jokes, hallucinations, hypnotism or mad delusions,” as the honchos at the Air Force had insisted that he do when he worked on the various UFO projects with them. Back in October 1973, Hynek was down at Pascagoula in less than two days from the time that the two fishermen had reported their examination by strange creatures aboard a flying saucer. “It was a terrifying experience for the men,” Hynek told National Star reporter Langley, adding that, “They were very shaken. Neither of these men, Charles Hickson and Calvin Parker, had any sort of reputation as tellers of tall tales. I was impressed with their general sincerity. The general attitude in the town was that if Charles said it happened, it probably happened. I honestly believe that they believe that it happened. It might have been some sort of religious experience or something akin to that.”

Of course, since Hynek did not outright dismiss the two gentlemen as “kooks” upon hearing of their encounter, it is not hard to see why he would stand head and toes above other UFO investigators of his time, who were always quick to cast aspersions on the credibility of the witnesses while ignoring the details of the actual UFO report. In further discussing UFOnauts, flying saucer occupants and humanoid-like aliens, Hynek reinforced his objective stance by declaring, “I would gladly omit this part if I could without offense to scientific inquiry. Unfortunately, one may not omit data simply because they may not be to one’s liking or in line with one’s notions. We balk at reports about occupants even though we may be willing to listening attentively to accounts of other UFO encounters.

“Why? Why should a report of a car stopped on the highway by a blinding light from an unknown craft be any different in essential strangeness or absurdity from one of a craft from which two or three little animate creatures descend?

There is no logical reason, yet I confess to sharing a prejudice that is hard to explain. Is it that encounters with animate beings, possibly with an intelligence of a different order than ours, gives a new dimension to our atavistic fear of the unknown?

51

The Real Resident Aliens

“Another thing bothers us: The humanoids seem to be able to breathe our air and to adapt to our air pressure and gravity with little difficulty. Something seems terribly wrong about that. This would imply that they must be from a place, another planet, very much like our own. Perhaps our own?

“But how? Or are they robots, not needing to adapt to our environment?

Our commonsense recoils at the very idea of humanoids and leads to much banter and ridicule, and jokes about little green men. They tend to throw the whole UFO concept into disrepute. Maybe UFOs could exist, but humanoids?

“Are all reporters of UFOs truly sick? Are they all affected by some strange virus that does not attack sensible people? It would be helpful, one feels, if we could demonstrate that reports of UFO landings differ systematically from other UFO sightings. Then we could, with some comfort, dismiss them. But they don’t, except that the relative number of cases with more than one witness is somewhat less; and that there are not as many observers having any degree of technical training.

“There are no pilots, air traffic controllers, radar operators or scientists who have reported humanoids, according to my records. There are, however, people holding other types of responsible positions: clergymen, policemen, electronics engineers, public servants, bank directors, military men, miners, farmers, technicians, mailmen, railroad engineers, medical doctors, etc. Clearly, it is not only kooks who report humanoids. Indeed, I do not know of a report of this kind to have come from a person of demonstrated mental imbalance.”

As to the fishermen from Pascagoula, Hynek explained that, “When I got there, within 48 hours of it happening, Charlie Hickson, the older of the two men, was still in a state of shock. He was a very shaken man. There was no doubt about it.”

Who could blame Hickson, or anyone else undergoing such a traumatic experience? After Hynek’s questioning of the two, the following is a summary of the events that transpired with Hickson and Parker on that fateful night of 11 October 1973: On the date of the event, Charlie Hickson was 42 years old and Calvin Parker was 19 years old. They were both workers at the Walker Shipyards in Pascagoula, where Hickson was a foreman. Both of the men had excellent work records and neither was known to be a heavy drinker. After work hours, at around 7 p.m., the men decided to go fishing in the Pascagoula River off an old pier on the west bank. No sooner had they reached the desired location, that they noticed a strange aircraft up in the sky that seemed to be emitting a bluish haze. The

52

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

object began moving closer until it was hovering about three or four feet above the water.

“Then,” Hickson claims, “three ‘whatever-they were’ came out, either floating or walking, and carried us into the ship. The things kept us about 20 minutes, photographed us and then took us back to the pier. The only sound they made was a buzzing-humming sound. They left in a flash.”

The fishermen described the entities as being “eyeless, silver-skinned humanoids.” Each of the beings had a slit for a mouth and three, carrot-like protrusions instead of a nose and ears. Parker says that he fainted when he first espied the three humanoid creatures climbing out of their spacecraft; and he did not regain consciousness until he had been released back onto the pier. That night, after their release by the aliens, they reported the incident to Captain Glen Ryder of the Pascagoula Sheriff ’s Department. Ryder questioned the men; and at first, he thought that they were playing some kind of joke on him. The captain called in some other deputies on duty that night and to assist him in further questioning the UFO experiencers, who had been separated, being placed in different rooms. “We did everything we knew to break their stories,” maintained Ryder, “but both of their stories fit. If they were lying to me, they should be in Hollywood.”

When Hynek arrived in Pascagoula he immediately went to the site of the fishermen’s UFO experience to see if he could find any physical evidence of the encounter. “I was hoping to find some disturbed ground or some broken tree branches or something like that,” said the scientist. Being more specific as to what that “something” might be, Hynek explained that “Something would indicate something physical- nuts and bolts- had been there. But I didn’t find anything. The whole thing had a sort of dream-like quality. No, dream-like isn’t quite correct. Incoherent would be better. I can think of no reason why these two men in rural Mississippi would fabricate such a story. They certainly were not going to gain anything from it. They got some notoriety, but they did not seem to be enjoying the attention. I don’t understand the Southern ways and mentality; but they struck me as extremely simple folks. They were without guile. Charlie just told the story in a very unassuming way.

“I would characterize this case as not as good as some of the other cases I have come across. It gained national prominence because of the abduction.

But it must be taken in the context of the wave of cases being reported around that time. We (Hynek and the staff at the Center for UFO Studies, a non-profit organization established in Chicago, Illinois, in 1973, by Hynek, with himself

53

The Real Resident Aliens

as director) had about 1,000 or so cases during that period. This was just one of them. But it is the only case that we heard of that involved actual creatures.

“Charles Hickson kept asking me, ‘Do you think they’re coming back again?

What did they want? Why did they pick me?’ He said it in all sincerity. I will say, and I’ll stick to it, that those guys were scared as hell. It was just as if they had been in a very gory automobile accident, a very traumatic experience that you are not capable of calmly describing all the detail. Your conscious mind tends to block out large parts of it, and this is exactly the impression I got from these two guys. They had undergone such a shocking thing that they could not put it exactly into words. Whatever happened to them definitely affected their rationality.”

The sheriff ’s deputies did take statements from Hickson and Parker and then left them together in a room with a hidden tape recorder, thereby attempting to check out the veracity of their story. “That tape made when Charlie and Calvin thought they were alone was, I think, one of the most convincing things to me,” said Hynek. “To hear them talk to each other,” the experienced UFO investigator added, “it was obvious that there was no sign of collusion. And when Charlie left the room, one could hear Calvin praying to himself. He was saying things like, ‘Oh God, it’s awful. It’s hard to believe. I know there’s a god up there. Why did it happen to me?’ It was a real experience for them; but I can’t offer a shred of evidence that it was a real, solid, physical thing.”

The Pascagoula case also involved hypnosis. Dr. James Harder, a scientific consultant for the Aerial Phenomena Research Organization (APRO), a civilian UFO research group operating out of Tucson, Arizona, arrived on the scene at the request of Hynek. Harder, besides being an engineer at the University of California at Berkeley, was also an expert hypnotist and had previously assisted Hynek in several other UFO investigations. Harder hypnotized both of the men and was satisfied that their accounts of the incident checked out.

“The hypnotism added credence to their stories,” asserted Hynek, noting that, “Dr. Harder was quite successful in getting Charlie to describe his early birthday parties and other pleasant experiences from his past life. But whenever he approached the UFO experience itself, Harder would say, ‘Well now, Charlie, you’re not going to be disturbed. Everything is going to be fine. Be calm. Now tell us about the two men who fishing the other day on the Pascagoula River.’

Suddenly a tenseness would develop in Charlie’s body; and sweat would break out on his forehead. And it was pretty clear that whatever it was, he did not want to relive that experience. The fact that they would not talk about their

54

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

experience while hypnotized strengthened my belief that for them, it had been an extremely traumatic experience, whatever it was.”

At Northwestern University, Hynek served as director of the Lindheimer Astronomical Research Center as well as the chair of the Astronomy Department, so anything he had to say about UFOs carried quite a bit of weight in influential circles. The fact that he placed so much importance on the UFO occupant sightings collected by Project Blue Book when he served as that government project’s scientific consultant, only served to heighten the credibility of those reports. During one of the busiest years at Blue Book, Hynek recalled that out of the thousands of UFO sightings that were reported that year, 48 of the cases involved landings, in which there were 12 cases where humanoids were sighted coming out or going into a landed object, usually the typical saucer-shaped craft.

And apart from the official Air Force investigation that year, Hynek tallied 223 other humanoid cases coming in from various areas of the world, just from the files of one private UFO group, APRO. But in returning to the Blue Book findings, Hynek pointed out that, “Two of the 48 landings were attributed to hallucinations; six were ascribed to the somewhat more vague term ‘psychological;’ two were ascribed to ‘unreliable report,’ which in Blue Book terminology really means crazy; six were ascribed to hoaxes, but on slim evidence; while the majority was attributed to ‘insufficient data,’ a favorite term with the Blue Book when it appeared that it would be too much trouble to acquire additional data. Generally, there was little or no follow-up in these cases. There were nine cases of reported landings of unknown aircraft; yet no attempt was made to ascertain further facts.”

Of the majority of reported cases that involved contact between the humanoids from outer space and Earthlings, Hynek lamented that they were not given sufficiently serious scientific consideration because there was only one individual UFO experiencer.

One of the more highly touted cases referred to often by Hynek was that of a police officer named Herbert Shirmer of Ashland, Nebraska. Shirmer insisted that he had a close encounter with aliens who took him aboard their flying saucer and even demonstrated to him how it functions. The Shirmer encounter took place on 3 December 1967, when a saucer-like object landed on, or hovered slightly above the highway, some 40 feet in front of him. The police officer watched the UFO, and then reported that it took off at a high speed. But when Shirmer filed his report, there were 20 minutes that he could not account for, no matter how hard he racked his brain. Dr. R. Leo Sprinkle, a professor of psychology at the University of Wyoming, who was also a state-certified hypnotist, was called in 55

The Real Resident Aliens

to examine the police officer. Incidentally, Dr. Sprinkle wrote the introduction to my first book in the Venus Rising series, Venus Rising: A Concise History of the Second Planet (Terra Alta, West Virginia: Headline Books, 2015), for which I am eternally grateful. As Dr. Sprinkle put Shirmer under hypnosis, the Nebraska police officer relived his UFO experience. Until he was hypnotized, Shirmer had no idea what had happened for 20 minutes of his life; but after the session with Dr. Sprinkle, the officer understood that he had actually been onboard an alien spaceship. Hynek was impressed with the Shirmer case; but like so many others, this one involved only one experiencer.

With respect to Shirmer, Hynek told National Star reporter Roger Langley that, “Officer Shirmer was hypnotized and told a fascinating story. But how does an impartial observer assess the reality of the situation? The man is not lying.

For him, it was a very real experience.

“But what actually happened that night? Was it a real, nuts-and-bolts thing that you could see, or was it some strange paranormal thing? In a single-witness case, such as this, what can an investigator really do? If you told me that you had a dream about purple peach trees last night, how could I substantiate it or prove it? This is the same problem with one-witness cases.”

Another case that attracted Hynek’s personal interest took place in Socorro, New Mexico, on 24 April 1964, and also involved a law enforcement officer, a New Mexico Highway Patrol Sergeant Lonnie Zamora. This was the first case that Hynek investigated in New Mexico, the “Land of Enchantment.” It concerned the highway patrolman’s encounter with an egg-shaped UFO that landed a little distance off the main state route in the vicinity of his hometown of Socorro. Officer Zamora was just about to wrap it up for the day. It was 5:45 p.m. and his shift was about to end in 15 minutes. Out of the blue, a speeder raced

by Zamora’s position, moving like a “bat out of hell.” The patrolman was about to chase the speeder when suddenly there was a loud explosion coming from the rear. Also, when Lonnie Zamora heard the fierce clapping noise, he turned around just in time to catch sight of an eerie light blue flash of light that washed over him, his patrol car and the surrounding desert shrubbery.

Zamora followed in his patrol car a dirt path to a small shack about 200 feet back from the highway, whence the blue flash and the explosion emanated.

That’s when he spotted the source of all the commotion, a shiny, ovular object descending from the sky with a smokeless blue and orange flame emitting from its underside. The officer described the object as resembling, “a car turned upside down…. standing on its radiator or trunk.” At this point, Zamora got out of his vehicle and started to approach the now landed object to within 100 feet on foot.

56

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

Two personages in white coveralls had disembarked from the strange object.

“One of these persons,” noted the highway patrolman, “seemed to turn and look straight at my car and seemed startled- seemed to quickly jump somewhat.”

Patrolman Zamora described the UFO occupants as “normal in shape, but possibly they were small adults or large kids.” The officer radioed for backup but continued to keep his distance from the object and the beings that descended from it. The oval-shaped UFO had no visible windows or even the seams for a doorway. It sat upon girder-like legs. The craft was marked, however, with a red insignia that was about two-an-a-half feet wide. The UFO occupants, on the other hand, were not going to remain in the area for long insofar as the armed patrolman was there observing their activities. In the next five minutes, the two aliens quickly terminated their activities, got back into their craft, and took off.

Zamora witnessed the UFO quickly ascend and then move over a mountain in the distance, whence it quickly sped out of sight, but not out of mind. Just a few minutes after the aliens’ departure, fellow officer Sergeant Sam Chavez of the New Mexico State Police arrived at the scene in response to Zamora’s radio call for backup. Officer Chavez, while he did not see the object, did observe the stillsmoldering brush the UFO had landed and taken off. He also noted four burn marks and four V-shaped depressions pushed into the ground where the object had rested. These impressions were between one and two inches deep and each one measured eighteen inches in length.

One of the chief skeptics of the era, Dr. Philip J. Klass, the editor of Aviation and Space Technology magazine, opined that Zamora had simply made up the whole story in order to increase tourism in the area. However, in a report submitted to the Central Intelligence Agency by the then director of the Air Force’s Project Blue Book, Major Hector Quintanilla, the highest military authority on the UFO phenomenon declared that, “There is no doubt that Lonnie Zamora saw an object which left quite an impression on him. There is also no question about Zamora’s reliability. He is a serious officer, a pillar of his church, and a man well-versed in recognizing airborne vehicles in this area. He was puzzled by what he saw, and frankly, so are we.” Keep in mind that the Bluebook director came to these Lonnie Zamora witnesses conclusions based on the field research out in Sergeant landing and takeoff of oval-shaped New Mexico conducted by Dr. J. Allen Hynek UFO, to include its occupants.

The officer also noted a bright red on his behalf. inscription on the side of the alien object. See https://i.ytimg.com/vi/ ZUA_etT1GVI/hqdefault.jpg.

57

The Real Resident Aliens

The revelation of Dr. Hynek’s involvement in the Zamora case was leaked in the 30 April 1964 edition of the News-Sun newspaper of Hobbs, New Mexico.

Despite the official pronouncements by Project Bluebook personnel that there was no evidence linking UFOs to extraterrestrial spaceships, the Air Force’s overwhelming interest in this Socorro, New Mexico, UFO landing incident suggested otherwise. The “genie was out of the bottle,” so to speak, and getting him back in was not going to be an easy task.

Looking back on the Lonnie Zamora encounter, Hynek informed journalist Langley of the National Star that, “I visited the site several days after the actual incident and found landing marks and charred plants near where Zamora said the space craft had landed. Although there were other reported witnesses to the UFO in the area, only Officer Zamora, like Officer Schirmer, was in a position to have seen the occupants. At first, I tried to shake his story apart, but I couldn’t. I was impressed by the high regard in which Zamora was held by his fellow officers. Hynek noted that Zamora, like other people who claim to have had contact experiences with seemingly extraterrestrial beings associated with UFOs, remain “rock-ribbed” in their belief that their encounter was real.

Two years prior to the interview with Langley, Hynek had just come out with a book, UFO Experience (Chicago, Illinois: Henry Regency, 1972), in which he provided extensive background information on some of the more prominent cases he had investigated in his role as a scientific consultant to the Air Force for over 20 years. “The reason I called my book, the UFO Experience,” said Hynek, “was that after 20 years or so with the Air Force, I questioned many hundreds of people, and by and large, these people were convinced they had had an actual experience. They were puzzled. They tried to explain it to themselves by some logical way at first and couldn’t. Time and time again, they were very disappointed when I couldn’t give them an explanation. They had sort of the attitude, ‘You’re the one from the Air Force. You are supposed to know about these things.’ And when I said, ‘Well, look, I’m just as puzzled as you are; I don’t know what it was,’ they were really, generally quite disappointed.” While Hynek wished he could have done more to assure the anxious and inquiring minds of these UFO experiencers, he soon realized that he was faced with the challenge of overcoming formidable mental blocks these experiencers had built around themselves based on their deep-seated and often paranoid belief systems they were carrying around in life like so much unnecessary baggage.

Hynek explained: “I had a student at Northwestern who did a term paper on this very question. He sent out 100 questionnaires to people who had UFO experiences at least five years before. The questionnaire ran something like this: 58

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

‘Now, after five years, what do you think? Are you still puzzled? Have you found an explanation? Do you still talk about it?’

“He got some interesting results. He got about a 40 percent return, which is good for a questionnaire. And with only one exception, everyone was still puzzled. They still did not honestly know what they had seen; yet their belief in what they had seen remained unshaken.

“We are very glib about what we call real. When the Angel Gabriel appeared to the Virgin Mary and said that things were going to happen, was that real? Was it physically real?

“It was an experience. And when people have a religious experience of one sort or another, it is real to them. But maybe what we call real isn’t the complete story. Maybe there are other dimensions to reality that we do not appreciate.

“I know humanoid cases are more spectacular; but they simply have a lower credibility than others do. I don’t know exactly why that is so. Maybe solid citizens who have an experience like that would not report it, whereas they might be willing to report something that is less bizarre. One just never knows with humanoid reports whether the creature actually produced an image on the witness’ retina or whether it was a just a plain, first-class hallucination. Only when you have cases where there has been damage on the ground do you have something solid and physical to go on.”

59

The Real “Resident Aliens,” Part X Negative Rh Blood Factor Provides Genetic Link to Aliens In January of 1977, contactees from throughout North America were coming together for the purpose of exploring a possible genetic linkage they shared with the extraterrestrials. This connection with our space brothers and sisters was the Rh-negative blood factor; and the organization these contactees established was known as the Venus Venous Research Corporation, headquartered in San Lorenzo, California. The corporation sponsored the publication of a monthly newsletter from its very inception, Bloodline, where readers exchanged ideas on sundry issues of concern to the contactee community.

In an editorial by Mabel Royce, she gave the following instructions to fellow members wishing to get in touch with their higher self: “You must first relinquish your ego before you can grasp the concept of a universal soul. You can be so wrapped up in this life you are living today that you have no concept of the past or future. You can only receive telepathic communication if your mind can accept concepts from without it. You must be able to alter your way of thinking, to accept alien thought waves as your own. Only the complete submission of self can achieve this. You must be able to sacrifice your original personality to acquire a greater one. No one can change you. You must change yourself. You can change yourself into anything you want to be. If you will just look at yourself, you will know what must be done. No one likes to look at themselves the first time. But once you do, you will have help to change anything necessary.”

Thousands more were coming to the realization that they were immortal spiritual beings from higher dimensional worlds temporarily inhabiting physical bodies for the purpose of learning lessons of eternal value on this planet Earth, a type of cosmic schoolhouse preparatory for the soul’s advancement into realms of light. Royce explained it thusly: 60

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

“Once you establish a psychic link with the universal consciousness, any question you ask will be answered. If you look, you will find the answers. We must ask the previously unaskable. The Rosicrucians teach about perspective.

Everything is relative. It depends on your perspective as to what you see. Picture a ballgame going on behind a fenced park. The fence has a small hole in it. If you stand with your eye to the hole, you can see the game on the other side. If you stand back a few feet, all you will see is the fence with a hole in it. It all depends on your perspective what you see….”

Much more on perspective as it relates to the observation and apperception of sundry phenomena was examined in the various issues of Bloodline, with articles by staff writers Mabel Royce, her sister Bonnie Royce, esotericist Ivan Boyes and many others with metaphysical leanings, but all sharing the Rh-negative blood factor. As the role that these individuals would play in the organization and society at large, Mabel Royce wrote: “We hope we can help our people become aware of who they are and learn to utilize their powers. We will gather all the latest scientific discoveries relating to our people through questionnaires and surveys.”

As to the goal of such investigations, Mabel Royce noted that, “We will be presenting all the latest data on UFO contacts, Atlantis, Antarctica, Hollow Earth material, messages from our space brethren, psychic predictions on earthquakes and UFO landings.”

In helping members and readers explore their true points of contact with the wider universe, Mabel Royce recommended the following books, which even to this very day of 18 March 2021, I still heartily endorse: 1. Asimov, Isaac, Genetic Code (London, United Kingdom: Orion Press, 1962).

2. Asimov, Isaac, Living River (London, United Kingdom: AbelardSchuman, 1959).

3. Binder, Otto, and Flindt, Max, Mankind: Child of the Stars (Greenwich, Connecticut: Fawcett, 1974).

4. Blavatsky, Helena P., Secret Doctrine (London, United Kingdom: Theosophical Society Publications, 1888).

5. Holtzer, Hans, UFOnauts (Greenwich, Connecticut: Fawcett, 1976).

6. Keel, John A., Why UFOs: Operation Trojan Horse (New York City, New York: G. P. Putnam’s Sons, 1970).

7. Landsburg, Alan, Outer Space Connection (Sydney, Australia: Corgi, 1976).

61

The Real Resident Aliens

8. Lawler, Sylvia D., Human Blood Groups and Inheritance (Cambridge, Massachusetts: Harvard University Press, 1951).

9. Steiger, Brad, Gods of Aquarius (New York City, New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1976).

10. Velikovsky, Emmanuel, Worlds in Collision (Garden City, New York: Doubleday, 1950).

11. Von Däniken, Erich, Miracle of the Gods (New York City, New York: Delacorte Press, 1976).

Sacred Texts: 1. The Bible (King James Version), 1611.

2. Book of Mormon (Palmyra, New York: Church of Jesus Christ of Latterday Saints, 1830).

3. Lost Books of the Bible and the Forgotten Books of Eden (New York City, New York: World Bible Publishing, 1968).

As to the ongoing work of the Venus Venous Research Corporation and its newsletter, Bloodline, that was distributed free to members (those with Rhnegative blood types), Bonnie Marie Royce put out a request in the first issue that, “Anyone who wishes to donate their help or knowledge in any way you can, we would be most grateful. Just drop us a line and let us know in what way your talents lean. No task is too trivial. We need all of you, whether it is calling in often to your local radio-news, talk shows, etc., regarding the negative blood types; give our address whenever you can. Each person you find will be another that you helped save.

“It will be a most gratifying experience, I promise you. Any of you who will be in San Francisco in the near future are most welcome and needed to get the job done. We must all pull together.” Clearly, an urgency was felt to locate as many of the starseeds as possible. Royce and the other members certainly believed that something would soon be going down that would significantly impact the lives of those with Rh-negative blood types, those having definitive extraterrestrial genetic connections.

Royce continued: “It would be almost impossible for me to put on these few pages all the things I most immediately want you to know; but I want you to feel free to write me and ask me any questions. I’ll answer all inquiries the best way I can and if it is something I don’t know, then I will do my best to tell you where you can probably find it.”

62

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

In order to help the seeker in better defining their paranormal connection, Royce added that, “If you would like some pen pals, just write and state you are most interested in, such as genetics, UFOs, Hollow Earth, Atlantis, visions, auras, thought transference, radionic therapy, cave drawings, ancient astronauts, etc. First send your name and exact blood type. Include an approximate number of how many pen pals you would like to write to. In which case, we would appreciate your sending a photocopy of any interesting responses you get and mail it to us. Every strange or amazing tale fits somewhere into this gigantic puzzle of life.”

Then Royce explained just how she and others at Venus Venous Research Corporation were going about in attempting to put the sundry pieces of this puzzle together: “We are in the process of trying to piece together and prepare ourselves for immortality. There are so many things we could all learn if we had forever to learn it. In my estimation, forever will be beginning very soon. Are you ready for that great and glorious day? The saints (we) have marched in. The dead have risen. All things are being revealed and this, the most important, the master key to the mysteries of the universe, is the one that comes from “The Two,” who are the fruit (children) of the olive tree (royal negative bloodline).”

This cryptic reference to “The Two” gave me some reason for concern with respect to the operations of the Venus Venous Research Corporation, however, insofar as the leaders of Heaven’s Gate, the former Presbyterian minister Marshall Applewhite and nurse Bonnie Nettles, who formed that San Diego, California, UFObased religious cult in 1974, began to claim that they were the two witnesses described in the Book of Revelation4 and occasionally visited Cosmic Ray explores possible links churches or other spiritual groups to speak of The between the UFO-based Heaven’s Gate their identities, often referring to themselves as religious cult and the activities of the “The Two,” or “The UFO Two.” They believed Venus Venous Research Corporation. they would die as martyrs and then be restored to life and, in full view of the entire world via satellite television, transported onto a spaceship. This event, which they referred to as “the Demonstration,” was to prove their claims. Was the Venus Venous Research Corporation being utilized as a recruitment arm for “The Two,” the latter-day UFO prophets of the Heaven’s Gate cult?

4

Revelation 11:1-14 (KJV). Note the cryptic references to the “olive tree” as made in this scripture cited by “The Two,” as well as Venus Venous Research Corporation associate Bonnie Marie Royce.

63

The Real Resident Aliens

In any event, the first phase of this process, as described by Royce, involved a gathering in of those individuals with Rh-negative blood types. These are the initial ones called apart because of their starseed connections. Royce explained further: “I’d like to recommend to all of you who are interested in corresponding with other negatives or doing your new job: Broadcasting the good news, as much as you possibly can. There must be some of you who are ‘night owls’ nationwide, who can call in to all night talk shows and give out your post office box number over the air. This is the best way to avoid kooks. Please keep us informed of the brethren (negatives) you find. Send a list each month with their names, birthdate, blood types, heritage and address; and if possible, have them send in a filled-out copy of our questionnaire. We are constantly updating the questionnaire as it is constantly revealing and verifying life similarities among respondents. For example, we recently discovered that exposure to neon lights affects negative blood type people by making them dizzy.

“We are currently trying to determine how many survivors of major disasters have negative blood? This may give us some indication as to whether they are being watched over, or guarded by higher beings. Also, from any of you who are into genetic studies, we would be most grateful for a report on the latest developments and statistics. And for those experiencing the phenomenon known as stigmata, we would like to know what is the blood type oozing from them?

Until next month, this is your sister in blood, the goddess Venus-Thaddeus.”

The self-proclaimed goddess reported the following astrological information: She was born as Bonnie Marie Royce on 3 February 1941 at the Highland Hospital in Oakland, California, at 2:22 a.m. She emphasized that she was born under the sixth of the Chinese Zodiac symbols, that of the Snake.

Canadian Representative Besides the articles from the two Royce sisters from California, the Venus Venous Research Corporation’s Bloodline newsletter ran an interesting piece from their Canadian representative, Ivan Boyes of Toronto, Ontario. Boyes was born in Toronto on 8 January 1946, and expressed an intense interest in all matters esoteric and occult. Long before the technology of the so-called “med beds” came along, Boyes pointed out that ancient Egyptian scrolls and Mayan reliefs show what appeared to be “womb chambers for creation.” As to the restoration of the technology behind these chambers of antiquity, the Canadian correspondent wrote that, “Through the rediscovered science of radionics, we too can start new creations of life forms on this planet very easily, just by utilizing the right frequency and several subjects we want to genetically cross; not mess 64

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

with, just cross. Put a negative photo of the two on the plate of the radionic instrument and broadcast. New forms of plants will emerge within no time.”

Boyes urged those readers who thought this to be insanity, or at best wishful thinking, to read Joseph Goodavage’s Magic Science of the Future (New York City, New York: Signet Books, 1976). The Canadian noted that he had already been able to cure diseases and regrow organs in the body with the application of radionics. He also suggested that it might be used to help us regain all of those extrasensory powers that had been lost to us over the centuries, through suppression or underusage. To the readers of Bloodline, Boyes asked, “Are other Rh-types already creating new life forms on this planet; and how do we explain the life forms appearing such as the flying moth men in the United States or the Bigfoot? Is the Bigfoot another radionic creation to show us and these hominids that our extraterrestrial ancestors created us for adaptability to conditions on this planet?”

Boyes remarks that, “Ancient cultures that were predominantly Rh-blood types reveal in their arts and legends all forms of clues as to who we are. The Hallstatt Culture of Central and Western Europe, going back as early as the 12th century B.C.E., displays Martian map designs on its pottery of the Hellas area and also is exact in where the equator is, polar areas and river beds of the Red Planet are located. This latter was only recently confirmed by the Mars probes.

How did they now, unless they had been or were from there? Romanian pottery of the Neolithic Age also shows star maps and migration routes through the stars to Earth. The Egyptian texts say that Ra and his train came from a city on the Moon. The National Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA) has allegedly discovered just such a space city on the far side of the Moon, but is keeping it a TOP SECRET in the interest of national security.”

Boyes also explains other anomalies about the Moon: “The NASA and Russian space program finds on the Moon show that it is artificial and hollow, and four times the age of the solar system (20 billion years). It contains structures resembling those of the Memphites of Egypt and Monolithic structures in Peru.

Whoever built the Moon as a massive spacecraft and put these structures on it, also built those on Earth; and they were the Rh-space colonists, us and our ancestors.” For additional information about the Moon as a space platform for launching ships used by the extraterrestrials in observing the evolution of humankind on Earth, Boyes invites the Bloodline readers to check out Don Wilson’s classic book, Our Mysterious Spaceship Moon (New York City, New York: Dell Publishing, 1975).

65

The Real Resident Aliens

The astute Canadian researcher points out that, “Even as far back as the Carboniferous Age, machine shop metal alloy objects and man’s footprints have been found. Also, on the Moon as well, by the Apollo astronauts. Whoever built the pyramids on Mars and in Egypt? Scientists now say the same people did.

Who sculptured the face on Mars and the some of the many mountains here in North America with faces and bodies? Who built all of those now ruined palaces and fabulous temples being discovered all over the floor of the Atlantic Ocean? Rh-people did; and they were space and time travelers.

“These are only a few things being revealed so far. What about the vast underground cities of the Inner Earth, right below our feet? Under New York State, Arizona and the Black Mountains, also Mount Hood, Oregon- some of these cities are abandoned, others controlled by Deros or Teros. Here is where we have to explore down into them and find out what has been left to us. The ancient legacies of Teutonic myths state this is to be used by the direct descendants of Odin in the Age of the Wolf, or Space Age (Aquarius). Bonnie, Mabel and myself are these direct descendants from the family of Bar, which means the same as “Royce” or “Boyes.” Other translations of the name are Baradda, as of the Druids, Goth, Gin, or those of the race of the Blue Jann who came to Earth eons of years ago from the stars with the El race. And this is the true House of Israel, through which the Biblical prophets came. They too were like you and I, awakened Rhnegative blood types.”

Boyes revealed that the leadership of the Venus Venous Research Corporation was planning expeditions to the Hollow Earth from a base in southern Brazil; and that other people with whom the leadership of the corporation were in contact with would soon be presenting to their respective country’s government leaders and United Nations diplomats a petition to the United Nations granting official recognition for governments in place in the various Hollow Earth civilizations.

“In the last year,” said Boyes, unknown forces have been at work, directing things- lectures for me and expounding Inner and Hollow Earth data, drawing those who were supposed to, to me; escorting me around North America to lost cities, showing another colleague the secrets of the Northlands and of space cities in the Arctic. Finally, the Inner Earth people came out and said they were responsible. Then I met Bonnie and Mabel Royce. I knew I was to meet them months before. I was told also I would soon go on the biggest mission yet. This is it, to gather our own people together.”

66

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

Is Rh-negative blood an exotic bloodline or random mutation? For further information, read the article

by Caleb Strom on the Ancient Origins website, https://www.ancient-origins.net/human-origins-science/ rh-negative-blood-exotic-bloodline-or-random-mutation-008831, dated 22 May 2020.

The Canadian admits that he was once in the dark on all these matters, before he contacted Mabel and Bonnie Royce. Being skeptical at first, Boyes wrote that, “As a researcher, I continued to look into all of their ideas, especially concerning Bonnie being the goddess Venus-Thaddeus (in her higher self). With intense radionic scans and with the help of top psychics, I found out that everything they were saying is true.”

While it was the fondest wish of all those at Venus Venous Research Corporation for all of its members to get to work right away in starting to build a new age, it was comforting to realize that each, in her or his own way, was helping their brothers and sisters with the Rh-negative blood type, to find their true birthrights among those to whom Otto Binder and Max Flindt From Keller Venus Files: An artist’s conception of Ivan Boyes’ UFO referred to as the “Children of the Stars.” experience.

67

The Real Resident Aliens

Dipping into “Cosmic Ray’s Mailbag” On 5 March 2021, the Cosmic Ray received a question about this very issue of the Rh-negative blood types and their connection with the legacy of interplanetary beings on Earth, sent to Rob Potter of the Promise Revealed and the special mailbag from a reader of the Venus Rising books, “Eilene,” that he forwarded to my e-mail. The following was the Cosmic Ray’s prompt response: Dear Eilene: Many thanks for your timely and pertinent question.

It was Helena Blavatsky, the co-founder of the Theosophical Society, who first postulated in the 1880s that around 18,000,000 years ago, a Venusian contingent on Earth was responsible for creating the race of god-kings who populated the ancient continents of Atlantis and Lemuria.

She also claims that the Venusian bloodline was carried over into Europe by some of the survivors of Atlantis’ destruction. Today we know their descendants as the Basques, inhabiting the area of the Pyrenees Mountains, situated on both sides of the French-Spanish border.

A recent United Nations study confirms the highest concentration of the Rh- negative blood group on the planet as being situated in the Basque region of the Pyrenees Mountains. Brad Steiger, a paranormal researcher in the tradition of the late John A. “Keel, was the first to point out that those with the Rh-negative blood factor possess an encoded extraterrestrial DNA and are, therefore, the prime candidates for contact

by Venusians and other aliens operating on Earth. The last chapter of my Venus Rising book, “Gods of Aquarius,” under the subtitle of “Dolores is Orthon, Here’s Why,” goes into much greater detail about the actual physical characteristics that differ between persons with the Rh-negative blood factor (alien component) from the general Earth population.

Hope this answers your question.

Your cosmic friend, -Ray

68

The Real “Resident Aliens,” Part XI

From Keller Venus Files, sketch “Cosmic Brotherhood” by Canadian science fiction artist Gene Duplantier of Willowdale, Ontario. “No problem, Mr. Thor. Take two tablets with breakfast and drink lots of water. If you need any more, don’t hesitate to drop in to my office next time you visit Earth.”

Mexican Doctor who Examined an Extraterrestrial The last few months of 1977 saw several member countries of the United Nations holding “high-level conferences” designed to look into the possibility of organizing a global network to investigate the appearance of UFOs all over the planet. Unfortunately, the persistent efforts of some of those countries’ United Nations ambassadors to pique the interest of that international body’s General Assembly have gotten nowhere. Each time that an ambassador brought up the issue of UFOs to the General Assembly, it was shelved for discussion at a later, but unspecified date.

One of the more vociferous proponents for a serious study of UFOs on the part of the United Nations has been the Honorable Eric M. Gairy, the Prime Minister of the tiny Caribbean- island country of Grenada. Speaking before the General Assembly at the end of 1977 on behalf of the ambassadors from 69

The Real Resident Aliens

numerous countries seeking an official inquiry into the UFO phenomenon, Gairy asked that the members of that body issue an official declaration of the coming year of 1978 as the “International Year of Unidentified Flying Objects.”

He also urged other member states of the United Nations to join Grenada in issuing postage stamps commemorating great moments in the history of ufology.

Up until January of 1978, however, the Prime Minister was unable to persuade the representatives from the larger countries to cooperate in an international investigation of UFOs. Nevertheless, sources close to Gairy informed a correspondent from the UFO Review, an independent tabloid newspaper published in New York City, that the door to initiating such an investigation may have been opened, albeit just a small crack. Gairy allegedly informed the UFO Review’s reporter that in the forthcoming months, “There may be a big change in the attitude of certain countries, which will very likely come out and take a much more positive stand on the UFO matter. When the next session of the United Nations General Assembly convenes, a special presentation will be made concerning close encounters in each of the countries belonging to that world body. Top UFO researchers will provide the overwhelming documentation that Earth does, indeed, have visitors from afar” (UFO Review, Vol. 1, No. 1, 1978).

Prime Minister Gairy stated that in the first week of April 1977, behind locked doors, the Ambassador of Grenada to the United Nations, Francis Redhead; the Assistant Secretary for Science and Technology of the United Nations, Joao F. da Costa; and the officer in charge of the United Nations Technology Applications Section, Bertrand Chapel, entertained a visitor from Mexico with a personal account of contact with an extraterrestrial being, a story that all of these officials took quite seriously.

In the Mexican visitor to the United Nation’s account, it was during October of 1975 that a “gigantic mothership” was sighted by hundreds, hovering over the city of Guadalajara in Central Mexico. Cars throughout the city had stalled. As the drivers and passengers got out of their cars, they looked up in the sky and watched the huge, sleek craft as it glided over a nearby mountain range. There were also additional UFO sightings at the time throughout Central Mexico; and the visitor to the United Nations described the people of that region as having suffered a bout of “UFO fever.”

It was during the peak of this UFO flap that an established medical doctor in Guadalajara found himself confronted with a new, and what would come to be a most unusual patient. It was a man who complained of being “seriously ill” and requiring the immediate assistance of the doctor. The doctor immediately ushered the ailing gentleman into his examination room. The patient further 70

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

explained that he was feeling fatigued and asked the good doctor if he could carry out a complete physical examination of him. The doctor then informed his new patient to strip to the waist so that he could check him over to appropriately determine the cause of his dire condition.

According to the correspondent for UFO Review, “As the patient unbuttoned his shirt, the doctor noticed that the color of the man’s skin was unusually pink, almost like that of a child’s. He also noted that there was not a single hair on the upper portion of his body (face, underarms and chest included), save for that on his head. Taking his stethoscope, he listened to the heartbeat of the patient, but could find no irregularity.

“At this point, the doctor requested that the man strip totally. When he was completely naked, the doctor again noticed the fact that his patient was entirely hairless. The area around his genitals looked as if they were shaven clean. In actuality, there were not even hair follicles on any part of his body, something that is completely unknown to biology on this planet.”

The patient sense that the doctor was flustered. He then explained that, “I wanted to show you that I am not one of your kind,” at which time he started talking about the immensity of the universe, intelligent life on other planets and the reality of UFOs as spaceships from those far-off worlds. The patient remarked that, “Alien beings from other planets, some nearby, have been visiting Earth on a regular basis and that the occupants of the flying saucers were particularly concerned about the Earthlings’ slow spiritual development that had lagged far behind our technological accomplishments with atomic science and rocketry.”

The doctor and the alien conversed for a brief period, in which time the doctor was informed of “many things of a technical nature,” things that he had no way of knowing on his own. After their scientific chat and completed medical exam, the doctor was utterly convinced that his patient was actually an extraterrestrial being, so much so that he felt obligated to report the incident to “someone in authority.”

The doctor called the local newspaper, El Occidental, and spoke to someone at the news desk. “Who would I report anything having to do with UFOs and space aliens?” asked the doctor.

The individual on the other end of the line said that she was only a secretary and heard of some UFO groups in Mexico, but didn’t know how to contact them.

“But there was an article about this United Nations ambassador from some Caribbean country who is presently in Mexico investigating UFO sightings. If you standby, I will get his contact information.”

71

The Real Resident Aliens

The secretary asked the reporter who wrote the article and he gave the name of the ambassador, Francis Redhead, and the local hotel where he could be found, the Rui Plaza in the downtown district. The secretary passed this information onto the doctor; and the doctor called the hotel clerk, who patched his call up to the diplomat’s room. A meeting was agreed upon for the following day, whence the doctor went over all the details of his encounter with the alleged extraterrestrial for the benefit of Redhead. So convinced was the ambassador with the doctor’s claim, that he invited him to go with him to the United Nations headquarters in New York City, all expenses paid by the government of Grenada, to tell his story to a special UFO investigations committee.

The Caribbean country of Grenada, much to its credit, was one of the first nations to officially recognize that we are not alone in the universe and that we are truly being visited by intelligent beings from other planets. The reporter from the UFO Review revealed that a high-ranking official of the government of Grenada had actually met with a flying saucer occupant in the summer of 1977. The incident allegedly occurred while two UFOs were hovering over the shoreline. One of the UFOs then landed; while the other remained in a hover mode about ten feet above the ground. An extraterrestrial being emerged from the landed ship and conversed with the government official, a prominent politician on the island, for about fifteen minutes. Then the entity got back into the landed UFO and both of the craft, each about 50 feet in diameter, took off for parts unknown. The alien was said to be a beautiful, blonde-haired woman, about 5’4” in height, who was “very human in appearance.”

72

The Real “Resident Aliens,” Part XII

The Zeroids are composed of pure electrical energy and can assume any appearance. They can appear and disappear at will. Photo source: Wonderstanding TV.

Invasion of the “Zeroids” Since the UFO pioneer researcher and pilot Kenneth Arnold speculated that some UFOs could themselves be living organisms, more and more ufologists were jumping onto his bandwagon. Five years after Arnold proffered this speculation, in January 1981 leading space researchers announced a mindboggling discovery vindicating the pilot’s theory on the true nature of the elusive UFOs. According to these scientists, the bizarre beings that we have come to refer to as “flying saucers” and “UFOs,” are actually super-intelligent creatures that have been visiting Earth and roaming through the cosmos for literally billions of years. They frequently manifest as bright balls of light in the sky.5 5

John Blackburn, “Top Researchers’ Stunning Discovery…. Many UFOs Are Actually Living Creatures,” National Enquirer, Lantana, Florida, 27 January 1981.

73

The Real Resident Aliens

Needing a name to classify these enigmatic organisms, the scientific researchers opted on “Zeroids.” What they discovered about them is summed up below: • They often look astonishingly different to each observer because they can telepathically project and appearance they want, from glowing lights to golden-haired space people.

• They flash across the sky at tremendous speeds, making “impossible” 90-degree turns and disappearing at will.

Veteran ufologist and the author of numerous books on the UFO enigma and other paranormal phenomena, Brad Steiger (19 February 1936 – 6 May 2018), noted that, “After years of research, interviews with hundreds of credible eyewitnesses and actual personal sightings, which I photographed, I am totally convinced these creatures exist.”

Because Zeroids are composed of pure energy, experts like Steiger came to believe that these creatures were capable of amazing feats. “They can appear and disappear at will,” remarked Steiger, adding that, “They can change their shape and size whenever they want. They are a unique form of life which indicates a highly advanced intelligence.”

Steiger’s research also revealed that the Zeroids have the amazing ability to project images directly into the minds of human beings. He recalled a case in upstate Wisconsin where three people observed a Zeroid at the same moment, yet all three of these witnesses saw it and described it as a different creature.

Steiger put it this way: “One of the witnesses saw it as a hideous apparition, right out of a science fiction movie, with waving tentacles and bulging eyes. Another witness saw it as a little green man; and the third observer said it was a beautiful space woman with golden hair and glowing eyes who talked of peace and love.

“The Zeroids,” continued Steiger, “can become luminous at will. And they can switch off instantly. That is what leads to reports that glowing UFOs ‘shot away’ at incredible speeds. But they don’t shoot away. They just become invisible.”

Dr. Frank Ruehl, a nuclear physicist, aerospace consultant and expert on extraterrestrial life, agreed with Steiger and declared: “There’s a wide body of evidence supporting the presence of such life forms. These Zeroids are intelligent creatures who are able to survive in space. They are made of pure energy; and since energy cannot be destroyed, these creatures are immortal. The Zeroids are also super, super intelligent. Nothing is beyond their power. They can make themselves completely invisible. They can also change their size, from microscopic to gigantic, and can change their shape.”

74

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

Another long-time UFO researcher, Vincent Gaddis, the author of the bestselling book, Mysterious Fires and Lights (New York, New York: Dell Books, 1967), told John Blackburn, a reporter for the National Enquirer, that, “Infrared photographs, which detect the heat given off by the Zeroids, leave me in no doubt these sky creatures exist. There have been many, many authentic, firsthand eyewitness reports.”

Science writer and Zeroid expert Richard Toronto concurs. He claims to have taken at least 25 infrared photographs of the creatures since 1975. “They can make sudden 90-degree turns at high speed and erratic, zig-zag movements,” testified Toronto.

Yet another paranormal expert, John White, the former director of education for the Institute of Noetic Science, a research center founded by the ex-astronaut Edgar Mitchell, the sixth man to walk on the Moon, in Petaluma, California, opined about these mysterious entities: “I have been investigating the Zeroid phenomenon for several years. There’s no shortage of incontrovertible evidence that these creatures exist out there (in space). They have been measured on sensitive electromagnetic detectors when nothing else was visible to the naked eye. They have even been picked up on Air Force radar.”

Clearly, these researchers have based their startling conclusions on solid, scientific evidence accumulated over many years. They attest that the Zeroids have been tracked on radar, photographed and filmed with special equipment and detected with the most sensitive instruments that were specifically designed to pick up electrical energy and heat emitted by the space creatures.

Strolling Down “Electric Avenue” The National Enquirer article of 27 January 1981 prompted Leo Bartsch of 744 South 4th Street, Coos Bay, Oregon 97420, to submit a letter encapsulating his theories about the nature of the Zeroids, or beings of pure energy, to Gray Barker of Clarksburg, West Virginia, the editor and publisher of the Saucerian, a magazine about the UFO phenomenon. While Barker never published the letter, it is interesting that he maintained the document in his files. It is being presented here because of the increasing relevance that the esoteric theory of the UFOs themselves as being the actual space creatures has attained in the ufology community.

Bartsch is intrigued that our eternal electric energy is still such a mystery.

“Why is it written, ‘God’s face has the appearance of lightning?’ And why are UFOs consistent in causing magnetic effects all over the world?” He sees some definite spiritual aspects to the UFO phenomenon insofar as a spirit is invisible, 75

The Real Resident Aliens

and so is electricity, and sincerely asks, “Are UFOs trying to awaken our invisible, eternal and electric soul that still sleeps (Ephesians 5:14)?” To find out the answers to these thought-provoking questions, read on in Bartsch’s speculations concerning the “UFOs as Electric, Living Creatures,” abridged and paraphrased: The body without the spirit is dead (James 2:26). His Spirit is found in the inner man (Ephesians 3:16). And without Christ, ye can do nothing (John 15:5).

The most powerful particles known to humankind are called “electrons.” These bombard each and every one of us daily and penetrate everything. This includes our bodies, every minute. Atomic particles are discovered that do not seem to fit any existing theories.

Jesus once said, “I have many things to say unto you, but ye cannot bear them now” (John 16:12). And now this mysterious eternal energy called electricity is like a living angel to a human being when transformed into television eyes and sent forth, from the Earth to Mars, and to return from 40 million miles away; and just 100 years ago, who could bear this kind of talk? God is a Spirit and a consuming fire (Hebrews 12:29). We only see the result of that which He does.

Electricity is invisible and we only see the result of what it does. God touches the hills and they smoke (Psalms 104:32). When lightning touches the hills, they smoke and this smoke smells like brimstone (Yes, brimstone).

When the Lord descended in fire upon Mount Sinai, he warned Moses not to let man or beast even touch the border of the mount (Exodus 19:12-21). So, what was the whole mount charged with?

When Jesus spoke to Paul, his light was brighter than the mid-day Sun (Acts 26:13). And Jesus said, “For as the lightning shineth from one part of heaven to the other, so shall the Son of Man ‘be’” (Luke 17:24). He shall be revealed from heaven in flaming fire (2 Thessalonians 1:8), and he destroys with the brightness of his coming (2 Thessalonians 2:8).

So, if we want to know what UFOs are and where they come from, we need to first find this mysterious, eternal energy called “electricity” is and where it comes from. Are you ready?

The letter is signed; and in the margins Bartsch notes that, “Electricity is still a mystery” and “Electric eels can generate shocks of 1,000 watts, powerful enough to stun a man or possibly kill a horse, according to Encyclopedia Britannica.”

Bartsch is of the opinion that, as the Bible states in 1 Corinthians 1:27, that, “The weak and the foolish will confound the wise and mighty.” It is no wonder to this electrical wizard and theologian that the first shall be last and the last shall be first. However, since Bartsch informed Barker that, “This will 76

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

be updated,” and since the Saucerian publisher never received the follow-up letter, it is no wonder he omitted the contents from being disseminated in any of his periodicals. Also, the heavy religious overtones may have discouraged the Clarksburg, West Virginia, publisher as well, at least insofar as he was not known to favor a spiritual approach to the UFO phenomenon over a physical “nuts and bolts” approach.

77

The Real “Resident Aliens,” Part XIII Aliens Helped Spawn Life on Earth Aliens may have been walking around on the Earth millions of years before humankind ever started to evolve on this planet.

At least that is what B. W. Saylor of Licking, Missouri, a reader of the UFO Review newspaper (New York City, New York) had come to think after coming across a set of strange footprints imbedded in a solid rock that he estimated to be anywhere from three to five million years old, not too far from his home. Saylor took a photo of the rock and sent it to Timothy Green Beckley, the editor of the UFO Review newspaper, which was published for the first time in the number 13 issue of that periodical, simply dated for 1982.

“The peculiar thing about the rock is a human-like footprint smack dab in its middle. This is a left-footed print,” wrote Saylor, adding that, “There is also a right heel print on the edge of the rock. The prints are imbedded six inches into the rock and the center-located one is over ten inches long. Not only can you clearly see the imprint of a human foot, but it looks more like a shoe than anything else.

“The imprinted rock was found on a steep hill where a bulldozer recently made a road.

When this track was made, the earth in this area was completely flat. No animal on Earth then or now had such features,” noted Saylor, adding that, “During the time these features were made, humans probably were not even Rocking in the free world…. Missouri crawling out of the sea. fossil hunter finds ancient alien footprint.

“The imprint may have been left behind by Source: UFO Review, Issue Number an alien. This should prove that humankind did 13, 1982.

Spanish Ufologist Tracks Alien not originate here on Earth.” When Timothy Encounters Green Beckley, the editor of UFO Review, 78

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

interviewed Saylor on the telephone, he asked him to elaborate on that theory, to which the Missouri fossil hunter and photographer replied, “I think that giant UFOs thousands of miles long and hundreds of miles wideeach one a sort of interplanetary Noah’s Ark, spawned life on this planet.”

Gary Richman, a European correspondent for the National Enquirer (Lantana, Florida), wrote a fascinating article in the 11 September 1984 edition of that weekly tabloid periodical, titled “Incredible Encounters with Space Aliens,” based upon his interviews with the prominent, world-renowned ufologist Juan J. J. Benitez, Spanish ufologist. See www.planetabenitez.com.

Jose Benitez of Lejona, Spain, the author of 20 books on alleged contacts by Earthlings with otherworldly beings.

Benitez explained to Richman that, “Alien beings have frequently been seen by witnesses from all walks of life. The extraterrestrials vary in appearance, which leads many people to think UFOs come from more than one source.”

Huge Creature on Spanish Air Force Base One of the more amazing encounters investigated by Benitez involved an actual shoot-out with a huge extraterrestrial creature that occurred just outside the perimeter of a Spanish Air Force base. From what the diligent ufologist could uncover, three guards at the Air Force base heard a high-pitched, whistling sound that was so acute that it actually hurt their ears. As they cupped their hands over their ears, however, their attention was diverted to the sky overhead where there appeared an enormous burst of light. Suspecting a possible attack by saboteurs, the guards went in search of the source of the weird noise; and in a small clump of trees close to the base, the air patrolmen came face-to-face with a 10-foot-tall being bathed in a bright, green light. One of the guards tried to fire his automatic weapon at the horrific creature. Before he could even begin to aim his rifle, however, he lost control of the autonomic functions of his body, became blinded and fell to the ground, completely paralyzed. His two companions immediately opened fire on the enigmatic being, getting off about 50 shots between them, before the alien shimmered and then vanished into thin air.

A spokesperson for the Spanish Air Force said a follow-up investigation of this alleged incident failed to turn up a single bullet or find even a bullet hole 79

The Real Resident Aliens

anywhere in the vicinity of the purported encounter. Fortunately, the guard who was blinded by the creature did regain his sight, but later suffered recurring bouts of momentary blindness. Air Force doctors were unable to treat this problem, according to the air patrolman, who just had to learn to live with the condition.

Bizarre Beings Sighted Along Spanish Mountain Path Yet another encounter in Spain involved a woman, age 20, who claims she encountered two bizarre beings while walking along a mountain path enroute to her grandmother’s house. All of the sudden, she could not take another step and sat down on a large rock beside the trail. She closed her eyes, hoping that when she opened them the two mysterious entities would have disappeared, whereby she could simply dismiss them as mere figments of her imagination. But when she opened her eyes, she saw the two beings standing right in front and over her; and she was also completely paralyzed. According to the witness, “They (the beings) were dressed in strange, shapeless tunics. The beings did not have lips, only a straight line for a mouth which moved and uttered unintelligible sounds.

They had two slits instead of a nose, large eyes and slanted brows.” In Benitez report on this incident, he notes that the woman informed him that the two beings seemed to be talking to each other for several minutes while taking turns in pointing to her. Then they simply vanished right before her eyes, at which time she was free from the paralysis and just ran home in terror. Afterwards, she lost her appetite, suffered from insomnia, as well as a strange eye irritation for several weeks.

Benitez later discovered that around the same time that the Spanish woman was having her encounter, a Spanish amateur astronomer and photographer, Ricardo Rodrigo Lora, snapped four amazing photos of two UFOs while he in the process of photographing the Moon from the observatory that he had built at his home in the mountains. With a telephoto lens, Lora was able to obtain two photos of a large, red UFO with a smaller one at its side. The Spanish photographer says that the smaller object seemed to merge with the larger one, at which time the now integrated UFO changed color to white with a reddish halo, before it disappeared completely from view, passing beyond the horizon.

Lugging Water for UFOnauts in South Africa From a rural area of South Africa comes the next close encounter of the third kind. An engineer from the British Isles working in South Africa, identified only be his initials of “H. M.,” was flagged down one night as he was driving down a lonely country road, looking for a shortcut that he never found. Suddenly, in 80

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

front of the headlights of his car, appeared a man who waved him down. H. M. stopped his rented car and the man who flagged him down went over to the right-side window and made the request, “I need water.”

“OK,” said H. M., inviting the man into his car, whence he turned back to a small bridge that crossed a stream about a mile back. H. M. grabbed a flashlight and the two walked safely down to the edge of the stream, whence his waterseeking passenger filled up a can that he had brought with him. Then H. M. drove his passenger back up to the place where he had picked him up. It was then that the engineer noticed a strange, landed object about 300 feet from the road. It was saucer-shaped, about 30-45 feet in diameter and rested on struts.

Invited by the man he had helped, H. M. entered into a large circular room inside the saucer where there were four beings, one of whom was lying down with the other three standing directly over him. The engineer’s escort explained that the one who was lying down on the floor had suffered a small accident, burning himself. The escorting alien then took the can of water and handed it to the attending extraterrestrials. According to the testimony of H. M., “The beings I saw in the room were wearing large, beige laboratory jackets, slacks and shoes.

They had pronounced foreheads; soft, feminine hands and no whiskers.”

H. M. was permitted to stay for about 20 minutes until he was escorted off the ship. He returned to the landing site on the following day; but the only indication that the flying saucer was there were some strange marks on the ground, apparently left by the landing struts.

81

The Real “Resident Aliens,” Part XIV

Was she plagued by an extraterrestrial or a demon from Hell? Illustration source: https://scatterscott.bandcamp.com/track/aliens-or-demons.

Italian School Teacher: “The Devil made me do it!”

Rosa Amuso, an elementary school teacher from Palmi, a city in the Calabria province of Italy, claimed that an extraterrestrial had burrowed into her head and was commanding her to do all sorts of things that she could not resist carrying out. In the 13 March 1984 edition of the tabloid Sun newspaper of American Media in Boca Raton, Florida, an article appeared highlighting Amuso’s travails with this pestering alien. Titled, “Space alien takes over girl’s brain,” the article says that in early 1984, the then 26-year-old teacher traveled to the island of Sicily and visited a Catholic priest specializing in exorcisms, Father Teodoro Tomaselli at the cathedral in Messina, a city not far from the Mount Etna volcano.

Previous to seeking out the priest, Amuso’s mother Erminia, age 50, had taken her to several psychiatric doctors in Palmi and the surrounding area.

While some of Rosa Amuso’s neighbors thought that she was insane, the medical experts felt differently, speculating that she was only temporarily traumatized due to suffering through some jarring incident in her life that she wasn’t ready to discuss with them, as yet. The priest, however, felt differently. After meeting with Rosa Amuso, Father Tomaselli decided that she was possessed and had to have an evil spirit exorcised out of her body.

82

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

Rosa believed that her mental torment was due to incurring a split personality.

“I wanted to be exorcised,” she explained to a reporter from the Sun. Rosa Amuso was aware that she was doing all of the deviant sexual acts that the creature who lived inside her was telling her to do; but she did not have the will power to resist. Her mother said that this was because, “Rosa is a nymphomaniac. She chases men around, undresses on the street and copulates in public.”

Sadly, Rosa affirmed that what her mother was saying about her was true.

“The Devil won!” she cried, adding that, “I am his slave!”

According to Erminia, her daughter’s problems began back in 1977, when Rosa was on vacation in Sicily. “Suddenly she felt a pain in her head. She started vomiting and felt dizzy. We thought she’d had a heart attack or a cerebral hemorrhage. But a few days later, Rosa knew what had happened. She heard this voice in her head. It said, ‘Well, here I am; and I am taking you over.’ It was a creature from outer space, from another planet, that had burrowed into her head and lived in her stomach. I believe it is really the Devil who is living in her in the guise of an extraterrestrial; but Rosa says it is really an alien.”

Erminia noted that the creature living inside her daughter had done some things that left no doubt in her mind that he is really the Devil. “Once the voice told her to go to a cemetery to find a young man who had been killed by his fiancée. The voice wanted her to see the grave because it belonged to the one had possessed before her. The voice told her all kinds of details, names, ages, things my daughter could never have known. When she got to the grave, she found out all the facts were correct.”

The mother and daughter seemed to have exhausted every avenue of approach with regard to this dire situation. While the first exorcism failed to work, Erminia stated her belief that, “Maybe we should try a better exorcist.

Maybe Father Tomaselli did something wrong. I think, at this point, that exorcism I our only hope.”

Office “Space Cadet” May Be an Undercover Alien Maybe there’s a weird gal or guy at the office who occasionally gets on your nerves. Now UFO experts are saying that such individuals may be spies from outer space. Back in early 1990, Brad Steiger (19 February 1936 – 6 May 2018), the famous paranormal researcher and author of over 100 books on such phenomena as ghosts, bigfoot sightings, ESP, UFOs, etc., told a reporter from the Globe tabloid newspaper of Boca Raton, Florida, in an interview that took place at Steiger’s residence in Phoenix, Arizona, and as published in its 27 February 1990 edition that, “Space aliens work everywhere, from small businesses to large 83

The Real Resident Aliens

corporations. By working in ordinary trades and professions, the aliens gain invaluable insight into our society. To identify a co-worker space alien, you must look for behavior patterns and personal habits.”

The ufologist Steiger provided a list of ten ways in which a space alien, operating in disguise, can be identified: 1. Aliens do not understand our style of dress and may wear shorts on a cold day or a plaid shirt with a striped blouse.

2. Aliens display bizarre eating habits, such as putting cream in soda or ketchup on toast.

3. Aliens call in sick frequently or are often late. Aliens find it difficult to adhere to a strict work schedule.

4. Aliens do not understand Earth humor and may tell jokes that no one understands.

5. Aliens display intense curiosity.

6. If a co-worker is constantly taking notes, he or she may be a keeping a record for his or her alien masters.

7. An alien never talks about its personal life.

8. An alien may use a screwdriver to open a letter or try to make soup in a coffee pot.

9. An alien has difficulty in getting ideas across.

10. An alien becomes elated or depressed around machinery.

Putting the Spotlight on Alien Neighbors Arthur Brown has literally succeeded in “alienating” his neighbors in the city of Heritage, Pennsylvania, located in Mercer County some 60 miles north of Pittsburgh. In an article appearing in the 2 November 2015 issue of the National Examiner tabloid, published in New York City, New York, Brown, then age 78, informed that publication’s correspondent Malia McCarrick, that he has taken somewhat drastic steps to deter unfriendly extraterrestrials, who had moved into his neighborhood. First, he wrapped his home in tin-foil, to keep the aliens Art Bell: “If you are not paranoid by and those under their spell from psychically now, you haven’t been watching the news.” See https://blog.nbmpub.com/ penetrating his domain and reading his mind. tag/paranoia/page/3/.

Second, he began shining intense spotlights onto all of his neighbors’ properties.

84

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

One of his neighbors, living directly across the street from the paranoid Brown, and interviewed by McCarrick, the then 72-year-old Nancy Raich, noted that, “Over the years, he (Brown) has become a real problem.” She then explained that, “He has a lot of issues fearing aliens. Little by little, we learned that he thought we were ‘they,’ and that we are the ones the aliens were contacting to get to him.” Raich had since become so frustrated with Brown that she put her home up for sale; but no one is interested in purchasing it since they, too, would probably have to start putting up with Arthur Brown’s shenanigans.

“Who wants to buy my house when this yahoo across the street decides he wants to shine lights on me?” rhetorically asked Raich, adding that, “I’ve had a lot of nice couples come and look at my house. You can’t get a second look until that’s cleaned up with the ‘alien lights guy.’”

Another perplexed neighbor, Donna Misinay, commented that, “He used to have an alarm that would go on and off and on and off and that was very annoying. He finally had to get rid of that. Now his new thing is to come out here and chase you with a spotlight.”

Early in 2015, a judge from Mercer County ordered Brown to take the lights down. If he failed to comply, the judge said that he would impose a $500-perday fine. Unfortunately, the alien-fearing defiantly refused to obey; and as of November 2015, his fines have amassed to a total exceeding $20,000. Since Brown would not comply with the county judge’s order, the city of Hermitage sought an injunction to get the lights removed. The city manager Gary Hinkson insists that, “It’s a violation of the city’s zoning ordinance to have excess lighting that adversely affects neighboring properties.”

85

Long John Nebel and His “Party Line” Radio Program, Part I

From the Long John Nebel Papers at Syracuse University (New York): Southern California contactee George Adamski (L) being interviewed by radio personality Long John Nebel (R). Adamski was a frequent guest on Long John Nebel’s Party Line radio talk program on New York City’s WOR at 710 on the AM dial.

Long John Nebel Revives Radio In 1954 radio was in competition with the burgeoning media of television for the capture of ever bigger audiences. It looked like radio was losing. But then the owner of an auction barn in New Jersey, the 43-year-old, lean and lanky John Zimmerman (1911-1978), a.k.a. “Long John Nebel,” approached the manager of the powerful 50,000 watts WOR (710 AM) Class A, clear-channel radio station in New York City with the idea of a call-in talk show centered on popular paranormal subjects, but particularly the ever-elusive flying saucers that everyone had been reporting over North American skies since 1947. This was three years before the Soviets launched their first Sputnik satellite. Nevertheless, WOR’s powerful signal extended to 32 states and several eastern Canadian provinces.

The hierarchy at WOR carefully considered the idea. They felt they had nothing to lose as their scheduled format offered nothing to distinguish itself from the offerings of the many other radio stations in the New York City market.

To give Nebel a try-out with such a program, they placed it in the late night time slot of midnight to 5:30 a.m. and called it the Party Line, thereby to catch 86

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

all of the “night owls,” insomniacs and truck drivers. The station manager’s betting on Long John Nebel paid off handsomely. By the beginning of 1958, Long John’s aptly-named Party Line program had long since rocketed to the top of the ratings. Long John Nebel had become the nation’s hottest personality and ruler of the talk airwaves, without competition since its start four years earlier.

Argosy Magazine Correspondent It was in early 1958 that Long John Nebel permitted a correspondent from Argosy, a men’s magazine, also headquartered in New York City, to visit the WOR broadcast studio in downtown New York City one night to observe the production of the Party Line program in the process of researching an article about the increasing popularity of the show and growing fascination with the topics being discussed nightly.

The correspondent, Herbert Bailey, noted that, “I was in WOR’s studio being amazed by the incredible goings-on that developed minute by minute. He (Long John Nebel) told his radio listeners, ‘Argosy magazine isn’t a puff sheet. By that, I mean Bailey, who is writing a story about me and my show, isn’t going to write a glowing account of Long John Nebel and his Party Line. He isn’t going to say I’m a great guy and that Party Line is the very end when it comes to radio shows. He doesn’t write publicity releases; and Argosy isn’t the type of magazine that would print them, anyway. He’s a pretty cynical guy; and I expect to be slammed, but plenty.’

“Well, cynical or no, I was jolted. It happened that I was just thinking of a suitable, glowing and non-cynical adjective to describe Long John’s show. And now I can’t afford to think of it or write it. I’ll have to disregard my personal opinion of his show and write a hard-boiled, tongue-in-cheek piece. I can’t afford to let Long John down. So, I’ll describe the gangling, twangy-voiced gent who was characterized in Argosy in 1951 (when Long John Nebel was just a salesman and not on the radio) as the, ‘man who can sell anything;’ and I’ll add a phrase, ‘but buys almost nothing.’ For John, having sold such diverse products as firecrackers, ‘mind readings,’ and orange squeezers, is not a man who is easily convinced by a slick-tongued tale. His favorite expression, both on radio and off, is, ‘I won’t buy that.’ And yet, by a seeming paradox, he has built a phenomenally successful show on what most people would term, ‘tall tales.’”6 Bailey talked to many people before showing up at the WOR studio and discovered that Long John Nebel was the most talked-about personality in radio. He felt that Long John’s idea of a talk show featuring paranormal topics, 6

Herbert Bailey, “Madness at Midnight,” Argosy magazine, New York City, April 1958.

87

The Real Resident Aliens

especially flying saucers, was truly original. It seemed as though the Party Line program had no taboos, except those relating to obscenity and good taste, at that point in time. His growing audience never tired of hearing about these supernatural themes and continually demanded more of the same. For WOR’s board of directors and New York’s advertisement-generating community on Madison Avenue, Long John Nebel turned out to be the golden goose that just kept giving.

Flying Saucers Are a Media Sensation Long John Nebel always kept his fingers on the pulse of the American people and knew that almost everyone was wondering about those enigmatic flying saucers. Most of the callers to his Party Line program insisted that the United States government was ignoring or suppressing information about aerial phenomena witnessed by thousands of people since the dawn of the Age of Flying Saucers, with the sighting of nine disc-shaped objects flying in formation over Mt. Rainier in Washington State by the civilian pilot Kenneth Arnold back on 24 June 1947. These same callers firmly believed that people from other planets were visiting the Earth in these flying saucers; and Long John had to admit that perhaps they had a genuine point since the American and Soviet governments were then soberly announcing plans to begin massive programs for the exploration of the Moon and eventually the neighboring planets of Venus and Mars. Somehow the ideas expressed on the Party Line in 1958 did not seem as crackpot as they did before October 1957, in the pre-Sputnik era.

Close Encounters Sometimes one flying saucer encounter will stand out above the rest, and therefore deserves a show all of its own. One such case involved an Illinois state police officer, Lieutenant John Henry from the city of Champaign, Illinois, who confirmed reports from two highway patrolmen of an encounter with a lowhovering “flying saucer” that caused their car’s radio to go dead. Besides this reported electromagnetic effect, the report itself was corroborated by scores of Illinois residents who also witnessed the same object at the same, albeit from a more distant perspective.

But when it came to shows about flying saucers on the Party Line, not only did Long John invite people who had witnessed these mysterious objects, but also those who claim to have experienced contact with the occupants of these strange craft. These were known as the “contactees;” and there were some that even went so far as to assert that they had taken short jaunts to the Moon, 88

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

Venus and Mars. These were not claiming to have been abducted, as many in the contemporary time, but say they took these special trips at the friendly invitation of our brothers and sisters from other planets. On the Party Line, the contactees would go into great detail in describing their experiences with the space people. Unlike George Noory of today on his Coast-to-Coast A.M. radio show, Long John Nebel proved to be a tough interrogator of the contactees. And he wasn’t alone. Other specialists from many fields would also take turns on the air, as members of a panel, in the asking of hard questions to all of Long John’s guests.

89

Long John Nebel and His “Party Line” Radio Program, Part II Esoteric Subjects Abound

Long John Nebel’s Party Line radio program brought its listeners numerous experts in many fields who, in turn, delivered to them substantial knowledge on a wide variety of esoteric and certainly controversial subjects.

Hypnosis Explained Two such experts who were frequently brought to the Party Line were the worldfamous Hungarian hypnotist, Dr. Franz Julius Polgar, a practicing psychologist in New York City who obtained his Ph.D. in psychology at the University of Hungary in Budapest; Hypnosis was just one of the many and Joseph Edelman, the president of the esoteric subjects discussed by Long John Nebel on New York City radio National Federation of Hypnotists who gained station WOR’s Party Line program. a significant degree of fame in the boroughs Photo Source: Argosy magazine (New York City, April 1958) of New York City after he successfully used hypnosis to rid Brooklyn Dodgers pitcher Don Newcombe of his flying phobia in 1957, just one year before he and his team moved out to Los Angeles, California.

The sundry programs on hypnosis proved quite informative to Long John’s radio audience, for they learned what hypnotism was as well as some of the secrets of the great hypnotists. Most of the listeners knew about the use of hypnosis in stage shows; but thanks to Long John’s program, they began to appreciate the therapeutic use of hypnosis in the laboratory or doctor’s office by degreed and accredited psychologists. In years to come, hypnosis would also become 90

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

an important tool for trained psychologists in investigating and evaluating the claims of the alleged victims of alien abductions.

Extra-Sensory Perception (ESP) Long John Nebel also had the foremost authority in the world on extrasensory perception (ESP) on his program, Dr. Joseph B. Rhine, the head of the Department of Parapsychology at the Duke University Medical Center in Durham, North Carolina. Many Party Line listeners called in to explain occasions where they experienced hunches or premonitions that came true. Dr. Rhine took the time to explain to both Long John Nebel and his audience just how far science had come in studying these types of phenomena, and just how far science still had to go in the investigation of these still largely unexplored qualities inherent in the human mind. Interestingly, Long John noted that those contactees with a background in Theosophy, like George Adamski or Dorothy Martin, a.k.a. “Sister Thedra,” also pointed out that one of the reasons for the extraterrestrial presence on Earth was to work behind the scenes to help select individuals develop some of the psychic powers that were latent within them, so that they, in turn, could use their new-found psychic powers to help elevate the levels of consciousness of the whole human species.

Controversies An occasional but extremely charged controversial topic was not out of bounds for Long John Nebel and WOR’s Party Line radio program. One program that generated a great deal of “heat,” so to speak, dealt with the subject of euthanasia, commonly called “mercy killing.” When another human being is suffering horribly from a pain from which there is no medical relief, and they specifically ask for help in terminating their life, is it morally permissible for one to help such a friend pass over onto the “other side of the veil,” as it were? And back in the second half of the 1950s, many people unfamiliar with the concept of reincarnation were introduced to it by sundry guests on Long John Nebel’s Party Line. Yet another controversial subject tackled on the program was that of the fluoridation of our drinking water. Many at that time, and even today, wonder if the alleged benefits outweigh the costs and risk in fluoridating out water supplies. And let us not forget the performance of unnecessary surgery. Even today, this is still a critical issue that requires more discussion by all involved in the health care process, both informed patients and medical personnel. Yes, nobody else on the air was talking about these subjects, on radio or television, so we see how Long John Nebel was filling a vital societal role.

91

The Real Resident Aliens

Format When Long John Nebel was first given the late night time slot, WOR management did not think the show would last because radio surveys showed that not enough people were awake during those hours to make it profitable for advertisers. However, at that time, the all-night music format of most stations was putting their listeners to sleep. But the lively panel discussions and engaging topics of the Party Line were consistently drawing in new listeners and expanding the audience base substantially. Apart from the insomniacs, very few marketers realized just how many people worked at night, i.e., actors, artists, cabbies, doctors, milk men, nurses, truck drivers, writers, etc., and that all these people kept their radios on in the background, closely paying attention to the Party Line to find out what Long John Nebel and the experts had to say on almost any uncanny subject like the value of taking vitamins or even the Venusians who clandestinely live among us and walk our streets.

92

Long John Nebel And His “Party Line” Radio Program, Part III

“Midnight Madness” at WOR: Long John Nebel (right), his panelist (center) and guest (left) debate the nature and possible origin of sundry paranormal phenomena. Photo source: Argosy magazine (New York City, April 1958)

Unique Panelists Panelists on Long John Nebel’s Party Line were just as unique as the program’s guests. All of the regular panelists on the show were living in the New York City metropolitan area; and among these were: Bill Preston, Artist and Comedian Bill Preston, an artist and comedian, first came to the attention of Long John Nebel when he read a newspaper account of Preston’s visit to Mexico in order to paint the bull fights but ended up fighting the bulls himself.

William Neff, Magician William Neff was one of the foremost illusionist-magicians in the United States; and in 1957 he was so recognized as being the greatest in that category through his selection as the winner of the Bernadette-Orson Welles Award.

93

The Real Resident Aliens

Joseph Markoff, Retired Army Major Long John Nebel relied heavily on Joseph Markoff for obtaining background information on both the guests and subjects featured on the Party Line program.

Nebel described Markoff as a “walking encyclopedia who knows something about everything.” A retired military officer, Markoff had traveled extensively through many countries on duty assignments, picking up much concerning the cultures and languages he encountered along the way.

Mel Schilloni, Semanticist Mel Schilloni could always be counted on by Long John to ask the most probing and challenging questions. Interestingly, Schilloni considered himself an expert on Arthur Conan Doyle’s Sherlock Holmes books.

“Tex” Dumont, Science Writer and Ghostbuster “Tex” Dumont was a pseudonym to protect this popular science writer’s real identity. Long John considered Dumont his primary authority on extra-sensory perception (ESP) and poltergeists, i.e., those annoying ghosts who toss plates around and generally create havoc among the human beings so unfortunate enough to run into them. Naturally, back in the late 1950s, if the editors of the newspapers and science journals who published Dumont’s articles knew that he was investigating ESP, ghosts and other psychic phenomena, he would most certainly receive a pink slip and find himself in the unemployment line.

Roy Benson, Comedian Roy Benson was a popular night club comic on the New York City scene.

David Bell, Psychologist Besides being an accredited psychologist, David Bell was also considered to be a scholar in all areas related to the higher functions of the human mind.

Charles Leedham, Investigative Journalist Charles Leedham, an investigative journalist, always approached the subjects discussed on the Party Line in a skeptical vein.

Morris Paley, Police Sergeant Morris Paley was a police sergeant in the Perth Amboy, New Jersey, Police Department. When guests or topics dealt with possible infringements of the law, the presence of Sergeant Paley on the panel proved most effective in getting to the truth of the situation.

94

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

Occasional Panelists While all of the above regular panelists lived in the greater New York City area, the following panelists, living further afield, would occasionally visit Long John Nebel in the WOR studio when they happened to be visiting the metropolis, or especially called in for Long John to tap their expertise: Richard Himber (band leader); Ivan T. Sanderson (animal trapper and cryptozoologist); Will Oursler (religion and inspirational writer); and Jules B. St. Germain (attorney).

Some Remarkable Guests One who lived back in the day when Long John Nebel ruled the radio airwaves might rightly acknowledge that every guest on the Party Line had something remarkably “off-beat” to say about a subject that would never be discussed on any other radio stations at the time, being then considered as “taboo” by most American and Canadian listeners. A few of the more popular guests included: Harriet M. Shelton, Medium Harriet reportedly spoke with Abraham Lincoln on a daily basis. Sometimes when she was on the Party Line, she would even channel Lincoln’s comments on some of the more dire contemporary issues. She even wrote a book containing a collection of the messages she channeled from the late Civil War president, Abraham Lincoln Returns (New York City: Evans Publishing Company, 1957).

When Long John asked her what Lincoln thought about paranormal phenomena, she noted that she had channeled this message from him in 1955, “To believe in what you can see and touch is no belief at all; but to believe in the unseen is a triumph and a blessing.”

Dr. Frederic Wertham, Psychiatrist This doctor devoted his life to crusading against the alleged corrupting influence that comic books exercised over the minds of children everywhere.

Dr. Wertham explained why he thought comic books were so pernicious: “They give children motivation and exact details for accomplishing murder, rape and other forms of anti-social behavior.” When Long John asked him to provide some examples, the psychiatrist denoted four DC Comics characters: Superman, Batman and Robin, and Wonder Women. Apparently, Superman is representative of a master race, inspiring fascist and racist tendencies, a la Friedrich Nietzsche.

Batman and Robin are leading children into the consideration of a homosexual lifestyle, and even worse, pedophilia. And as for Wonder Woman, always being tied up by a villain, she was apparently being set up for rape or acts of sexual 95

The Real Resident Aliens

deviance carried out against her will. The doctor’s frequent castigations of the comic book industry were in large part responsible for the adoption of selfregulation by the sundry comic book publishers in the Comics Code Authority (CCA) rules and placement of the CCA stamp on the cover of many comic books. This was a preemptive move by the CCA made in 1954 and expanded thereafter to more and more comic book titles as Congressional representatives were getting ready to enact laws and impose legislation if the industry failed to clean itself up.

Long John Nebel’s Background Long John Nebel first came to the attention of WOR radio management back in 1951 when its vice-president, Bob Leder, read an article about him and his powers as a highly effective salesman in an issue of Argosy magazine. Written by that magazine’s correspondent, Pierce Fredericks, it inspired Leder to drive out to Nebel’s Auction Barn in Parsippany, New Jersey, and interview the suave, Chicago-born gentleman. Leder was looking for new blood in the then flagging commercial radio industry, somebody that management could count on to peddle sundry wares via the air waves, generating advertising revenue for the station.

Nebel acquired the nickname of “Long John” back in his elementary school days, as he was the tallest and thinnest among his classmates. After completing the eighth grade, at the age of eleven, he quit school to illegally sell fireworks.

When his father, a medical doctor, discovered what his son was up to, he forced him to find other employment. Long John then decided to leave home and join the circus, signing on as a clown. From his circus experience, he went on to manage Siamese twins in a freak show, and then took a turn as a magician. After the circus arrived in New York City, Long John stayed on, whence he became a self-made expert in telepathic communication and fortune telling. Tired of living on the edge all of the time, but realizing that he could sell almost anything, he put his savings to work in purchasing a general story in Parsippany, New Jersey, where he converted it into an auction house. From then on, Long John began his illustrious career of buying, trading and selling everything under the Sun and, in the process, amassing a small fortune for himself.

His fascination with the occult rose from his work as a magician, fortune teller and mind reader. When Leder offered him the job of conducting his own program at WOR, pending the approval of the station’s board of directors, it came as no surprise that the focus was going to be on all aspects of the supernatural.

96

Long John Nebel and His “Party Line” Radio Program, Part IV Popular Contactees Moreso than individuals simply reporting the sighting of a UFO, there is no doubt that the appearance of a contactee on Long John Nebel’s Party Line program was a special occasion for all concerned: the panelists, Long John himself and, of course, the listeners tuning in, to include the callers who somehow managed to get through on the telephone. According to WOR radio’s statistician, keeping tabs of the telephone banks on the nights that a contactee was the featured guest, over 40,000 listeners across North America would make the attempt to call into the show, despite the fact that only some twenty might actually get through.

Of all the contactees, however, only Howard Menger and Daniel Fry were repeatedly invited as guests by Long John Nebel. While George Adamski’s books were popular, Poland-born Adamski had a thick Eastern European accent that was difficult for most radio listeners to understand. Menger and Fry, on the other hand, were both born in the United States and could clearly articulate themselves. Menger was originally from New York but his parents bought a farm and moved up to High Bridge, New Jersey, in 1932; and Daniel Fry was an explosives expert originally from Minnesota who moved to Pasadena, California, in 1919, to live with his uncle Walter there. Later on, with the emergence of a rocket research program directed by the visionary Jack Parsons right there in Pasadena, he would sign on to experimental work with revolutionary rocket motors under contracts with the Department of Defense. From the mid to late 1940s, we find Fry working on the development of the Air Intercept Missile (AIM, a.k.a. “Sidewinder”), being deployed to the White Sands Missile Range in New Mexico. By 1956, Fry was back in Pasadena giving lectures about space research and UFOs, as well as publishing a newsletter, Understanding, dealing with similar and metaphysical themes. Menger usually came up to the New York 97

The Real Resident Aliens

City studio from his home in High Bridge, New Jersey; but for Daniel Fry, Long John had to call him long distance out at his address in sunny California.

Howard Menger Howard Menger (1922-2009) was a sign painter from High Bridge, New Jersey, who claimed to have been in intimate contact on many occasions with the occupants of the everelusive (for most other people) flying saucers.

While the crews of these flying saucers were manned by human-looking beings from sundry planets our own solar system, and even from beyond, most were hailing from our nearest August C. Roberts takes publicity photo of newlyweds Howard and planetary neighbor, Venus.

Connie Menger in 1958 for Howard’s In the November 1957 issue of Argosy book, From Outer Space to You, to be published by Saucerian Press, magazine, Long John Nebel’s panelist, Jules B. St. Clarksburg, West Virginia, in the Germain, the legal consultant for WOR radio, following year. first wrote a detailed article about the New Jersey sign painter’s exploits with the extraterrestrials. It wasn’t long after St. Germain’s excellent piece appeared that Howard became a frequent guest on the Party Line. In the many times that he had since been on the program, Howard Menger provided details of subsequent meetings with his friends from outer space, but most notably the Venusians, with his wife, nee Connie Weber, being one of them. Menger explained to the radio audience that in a time before he incarnated on the Earth plane, he was a teacher from the Saturnian system named Sol-du-Naro working in a temple of knowledge on Venus. While teaching classes on cosmic philosophy in the Venusian temple, he ran into a woman named Marla, whom he immediately recognized as his soul mate and with whom he bonded. When Marla showed up at a flying saucer convention held in his backyard in New Jersey in 1958, Howard immediately recognized her as his soulmate; and both realizing that they were a “natural couple,” were quickly married before the close of that same year.

The criticism launched toward Howard and Connie was fierce, with many demanding corroborations for their stories. In 1958, the newlyweds announced on Long John Nebel’s program that they would try to arrange a group of witnesses to meet with some Venusians or other extraterrestrials for the purpose of verifying their sundry accounts of alien contact. As to why nothing had happened so far in this regard, Menger told inquiring minds that, “The Venusian visitors were greatly annoyed by the presence of uninvited Earthlings and departed in a 98

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

huff. Part of their displeasure was because several of the worldly group carried shotguns and flashlights. Even though the Venusians live to be almost 1,000 years old, with some much more than that, and have conquered disease, they can be killed or wounded by deadly weapons. Further, they have no desire to make contact with the sort of Earth people who show hostility or who are not sympathetic to the Venusian ideals of non-violence and brotherly love.

“As for the flashlights, the reason the space people whisked away is that the spacecraft use a form of power which can travel down the beam of a flashlight and injure the person holding it.”

Menger knows what he is talking about when it comes to flying saucers, for he actually rode in one on several occasions. The contactee, described by Herbert Bailey in 1958 as, “a clean-looking young man of sincere demeanor,” testified to the Argosy correspondent that, “I have been taken for a ride in a Venusian craft to within about a million miles from Venus. I was given a close look at the planet via a three-dimensional television screen onboard the ship.

“They have a much higher form of civilization there. And they are trying, without interfering with our evolution and our domestic affairs, to warn us of the great danger we face in the development of nuclear energy.”

While the Mengers brought along several alleged witnesses to the New York City studio of WOR to corroborate their story, none of them would agree to say anything on the Party Line about their experiences. However, Howard mentioned taking a motion picture film of the space ship landing and taking off in the apple orchard of his back yard in New Jersey. He said that he would show it privately but not publicly in 1958, as various frames of it were going to be included as photographic evidence in a book that he was then writing, which was to premiere in the following year under the editorial auspices of ufologist Gray Barker, From Outer Space to You (Clarksburg, West Virginia: Saucerian Press, 1959).

Long John Nebel expressed an intense desire to meet the Venusians, perhaps having one on as a guest on the Party Line. To this request, Howard Menger stated that, “I will try to arrange a contact; but it would probably be hard to do as I usually receive little notice when the space people wish to contact me. These Daniel Fry presents a lecture on the messages are usually received telepathically propulsion characteristics of the flying saucers at a UFO conference in or occasionally come directly from Venusians Southern California in the 1960s. Photo posing as Earthlings.” source: Unariun Wisdom website 99

The Real Resident Aliens

Daniel W. Fry While Long John Nebel had interviewed dozens of persons claiming contact with extraterrestrials on one level or another, there was none that had the verifiable scientific credentials in so doing like former White Sands, New Mexico, defense contractor and rocket expert, Daniel W. Fry (1908-1992).

Long John first heard about Daniel Fry from the leadership of a New York City UFO research group calling itself Civilian Saucer Intelligence (CSI).

Long John was informed that Daniel Fry, while considered an expert on the development of rocket craft of our own design, was nevertheless going to give a lecture on UFOs to the CSI and, if Long John agreed, two members of the CSI would accompany Fry to the WOR New York City studio to be a guest on the Party Line.

Once on the air, Fry related how on the night of 4 July 1949, after his work at the White Sands Missile Base, he had taken a walk in the cool desert air for relaxation. “As it turned out,” related Fry, the hike was anything but restful. To my amazement, a disk-like craft approached radiating or pulsating with a weird, violet glow. It landed about 100 feet from me.

“I was torn between curiosity and the very understandable desire to return to the base. Finally, my scientific curiosity overcame my more primitive emotions.

I approached the ship rather gingerly and touched its side. It resembled some kind of white metal, unfamiliar to me. It was a queer sensation because I could not actually put my finger on the surface. It slid along as if super greased, yet there was no oil.

“Then a hitherto unseen porthole opened in the ship and a voice said in perfect English, ‘It wouldn’t be wise to touch the ship any more. Would you like to come aboard?’ Then I had to conquer my trepidation and I entered the ship, whence I was directed by the voice to a small room near a porthole, where I could see out. Then the voice inquired, ‘Are there any questions you would like to ask?’

“In the course of the ensuring conversation, the voice informed me that, ‘You are aboard an interstellar craft; or rather, strictly speaking, this particular craft was actually designed for planetary atmospheric travel and observation.

It is remotely controlled by a huge mothership that is hovering some 900 miles above the Earth.’

“There was no crew aboard the observation ship. It was completely electronically controlled. In fact, the voice was coming from the mothership.

The voice refused to tell me from what part of the universe the ship was from, but the implication was that it was from another solar system. The intelligence 100

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

behind the voice seemed to be reading my mind; for it then asked, ‘Would you like a demonstration ride?’

“I agreed and then the ship zoomed off at what was obviously a tremendous speed. However, I felt little or no sickening acceleration. Within fifteen minutes, it was circling over New York City, a distance of 2,000 miles! It was a clear night and I recognized the pattern of lights in the cities we passed enroute. Moreover, the voice indicated the various cities. I had flown over them many times and could easily recognize the landmarks. Even though we were traveling at a tremendous speed, we were also approximately 35 miles above the Earth.

“The ship made a vast circle over the New York City area, descending to about 20 miles, and then returned to its original point of departure in the desert.

The whole trip took approximately thirty minutes with an average cruising speed of 8,000 miles per hour! I gathered the impression that the trip could have been made much faster had not sightseeing been part of the agenda.”

When Fry told of his experiences onboard the observation saucer to some of his colleagues, there were some who were far from as skeptical as one might surmise. Many confided in Fry that they, too, had seen the strange ships hovering over the missile proving grounds on many occasions.

A complete account of Daniel Fry’s story appears in his book, the White Sands Incident (Los Angeles, California: New Age Publishing Company, 1954).

101

Long John Nebel and His “Party Line” Radio Program, Part V Vast Facilities of the Human Mind Dr. Joseph Banks Rhine, Parapsychologist In the late 1950s, Dr. Jospeh Banks Rhine, head of the Parapsychology Department of Duke University in Durham, North Carolina, was considered one of the world’s foremost authorities on extra-sensory perception (ESP), and was thought of by Long John Nebel to at least be the most credentialed and qualified to speak on the subject out of all those guests and panelists who had previously tackled this particular type of psychic phenomenon on the WOR airwaves. While these other guests played “mind games” with the callers, Dr. Rhine presented hard scientific facts garnered from his research in the Parapsychology Department.

The doctor clearly felt that, given the right stimulus, the human mind was capable of developing numerous psychic powers lying latent within it. Dr. Rhine certainly displayed resentment at other contemporary psychologists in academia, to whom he mailed results of his research. He paraphrased a typical response received from any one of them as: “I cannot quarrel with your scientific methods. You have presented ten times more evidence than would ordinarily be required to prove any scientific theory. And yet, if you presented ten times more evidence, still I would not believe it!”

Long John assured Dr. Rhine that he wasn’t alone in facing closemindedness toward the displays of sundry psychic phenomena, manifestations of ESP like mental telepathy, astral projection, clairvoyance, precognition, etc. Members of academia in other branches of science were also refusing to accept any evidence for UFOs as being real objects coming to Earth from other planets, despite the accumulated evidence of UFO sightings reports collected in the files of the Air Force Project Blue Book in Dayton, Ohio, indicating that about twelve percent 102

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

could not be explained in conformity to the laws of physics, as we understood them at that time in those early days of ufology.

Long John pointed out that any time a new scientific theory emerges in an attempt to tackle an emerging but previously unknown phenomenon, it always faces stiff resistance in academia. WOR regular panelist “Tex” Durmont, backed up Long John and Dr. Rhine by signaling that, “Dr. Albert Einstein, who is now the synonym for the acme in science, also had a rough time with the scientists of his day. One day,” he explained, “he (Einstein) was informed by a fellow scientist that, ‘A scientific committee composed of 26 world famous scientists, had unanimously voted against the acceptance of your theory of relativity. They think it is absurd and beyond the bounds of all scientific reason.’

“Einstein replied, ‘If my theory is incorrect, only one true scientist would be needed to disprove it; and he would do it in a scientific way, not by a vote of a committee.’” At that, the radio host Long John Nebel concurred with “Tex” and his assessment of the situation with respect to Dr. Rhine. He also noted how this worked against all of humankind in the fields of medicine, where ofttimes possible cures have gone unlooked at simply because they originated in so-called “primitive” cultures. Pointing to quinine, derived from the bark of the chinchona tree, and later found to be a cure for malaria, Long John wondered how many other chemical cures rested in jungle plants. The knowledge of these Mark Probert channeling entity known could only be gained, however, if researchers as “Yada,” who lived in a supercould humble themselves enough to go to the advanced technological civilization on Earth half a million years ago. Photo so-called “witch doctors” of jungle villages to source: Bryant and Helen Reeve, Flying solicit the required information and dutifully Saucer Pilgrimage (Amherst, Wisconsin: copy it down correctly.

Amherst Press, 1957).

Mark Probert, Trance-Medium On one night, the famous trance-medium Mark Probert of San Diego’s Borderland Sciences Research Associates (BSRA) was the guest in Long John Nebel’s WOR Party Line studio. At the start of the program, Long John asked Probert to define the term “trance-medium,” to which the psychically tuned human instrument replied that, “A trance-medium is one whose body and vocal cords are used by certain departed spirits as a vehicle to communicate with the living.”

103

The Real Resident Aliens

No sooner than Probert gave this definition, the rather meek-appearing, mild-mannered man’s face went white as he slumped down in his chair. Long John and the panelists thought that the psychic suffered some kind of heart attack. But Probert’s wife, who was in the studio, calmed everyone down, matter-of-factly declaring, “One of his spirit guides is taking over,” and added, “I wonder who it is this time? Is that you, Yada?”

Probert answered in an unknown tongue. His wife said the language was known as “Yu” and was spoken in central Asia some 500,000 years ago.

When Long John asked Probert to answer in English, he cheerfully provided a translation. After acknowledging that the entity speaking through him was indeed Yada, he explained that this being from pre-history inhabited a high civilization and wanted to warn us of the dangers in experimenting with atomic energy, which brought about the downfall of his own culture so long ago.

Other spirits were also clamoring to speak through Probert. The next one was Dr. Alfred Luntz, an English clergyman who had passed over through the veil in 1893. At the time of his death, Luntz explained that he only held a ministerial license and could only speculate about the afterlife; but now that he was on the “other side,” so to speak, there was so much more about the spirit world of which he could enlighten the masses now living. Long John noted wryly that “Luntz’ English accent was pretty heavy.”

Dr. William Neff, Magician Dr. William Neff, or “Bill Neff,” as he likes to be called, performed a most amazing feat while a guest on the Party Line. Long John Nebel explains Neff ’s guest spot in the following manner: “Neff was explaining that he was going to do his next magic trick. Having been associated with magicians most of my adult life, and having been a ‘mind reader,’ and what have you, I know the tricks of the trade. What Neff did was no trick. I had people check it from all angles. There were no mirrors, no lighting tricks, nothing. This was the real McCoy. “While Neff was talking, he gradually grew translucent. He was still visible, but you could see through him. This lasted approximately thirty seconds. Then he faded out altogether. The whole procedure lasted approximately three minutes.

Then Neff gradually came back into view, still explaining his forthcoming magic act.”

Long John asked Neff about his ability to make himself disappear, to which the Bernadette award-winning magician replied, “The yogi of the India have been doing this kind of thing for centuries, even to the point of complete 104

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

teleportation. But the yogi regards these manifestations as mere steppingstones, assurances that they will progress to even higher planes of the spiritual.”

Long John’s Take on Party Line Guests For the most part, Long John Nebel was sympathetic to his guests’ views, even though he would frequently proclaim that he didn’t necessarily “buy into” their stories. Being a firm believer in the First Amendment to the Constitution, however, he did acknowledge that every American has the right to free speech and thus all his guests should be afforded a forum on the Party Line in which to air their particular points of view. This also gives his guests the opportunity to defend themselves against many of the charges hurled against them of being “phonies” in the cruel and cynical world at large.

105

Long John Nebel And His “Party Line” Radio Program, Part VI Flying Saucers Come Under Attack Air Force Takes the Offensive The popularity of Long John Nebel’s Party Line radio program was the cause of some consternation with the brass in the higher echelons of the United States Air Force. Long John’s talk show was starting to convince millions of previously doubting and skeptical Americans that maybe there really was something to the UFO phenomena being associated with the visits of spacecraft from other planets to the Earth. And for the religious at heart, if some of the guests on Long John’s Party Line were correct, like contactees Connie and Howard Menger, discussed previously, and Dr. Frank E. Stranges, a California minister of the International Evangelism Crusade in Van Nuys, California, then perhaps some of these extraterrestrial visitors arriving in their flying saucers are angelic, cosmic missionaries warning us to change our ways and thus avert the coming, long-foretold apocalypse.

In 1960, United States Air Force Lieutenant Colonel Lawrence J. Tacker, the chief public relations spokesman on UFOs at the Pentagon, wrote and got published a controversial book entitled Flying Saucers and the U. S. Air Force (Princeton, New Jersey: D. Van Nostrand Company, Inc.). The top Air Force brass had Lt. Col. Lawrence J. Tacker, USAF called upon Tacker to write a concise “anti-UFO (1917-1996), headed up the Air Force Office of Public Information in the book,” to help calm down the public hysteria early 1960s and was that military that had been generated in the American media branch’s official spokesman regarding all questions pertinent to the subject of by people like the former Marine Corps Reserve flying saucers/UFOs. 106

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

Major Donald E. Keyhoe, the director of the civilian National Investigations Committee on Aerial Phenomena, headquartered in Washington, D.C., and Long John Nebel, WOR 710 AM New York radio nightly broadcaster, dealing with all paranormal subjects on his Party Line program, but particularly UFOs. The brass deemed Tacker’s book essential for the inquiring American public to read, precisely because it contained many items of interest pertaining to UFOs, including a collection of letters from civilians and a reproduction of Air Force UFO regulations and press releases, but all slanted to debunk the entire UFO phenomenon. The Air Force leadership got word that Keyhoe would be coming out with a new book in 1960, Flying Saucers: Top Secret (New York City, New York: G. P. Putnam’s Sons), so they wanted Tacker’s book to beat Keyhoe’s to the bookstores. Of course, Keyhoe is mentioned several times in Tacker’s book, but always in a negative tone.

To take the lead in promoting the book, Tacker wrote a synopsis of the Air Force position on UFOs as stated in his book and published it in the March 1961 issue of Argosy magazine (New York City, New York). He chose Argosy precisely because it was a popular men’s magazine that frequently carried articles by and about Long John Nebel, his panelists and guests. Therefore, when an insider at Argosy leaked to Long John that an upcoming issue would feature a bruising article by Lieutenant Colonel Tacker totally dismissing the whole UFO phenomenon, the radio journalist called the magazine and demanded equal time, which was accorded him for an article concerning his good friend and closet ufologist, the “Great One,” comedian Jackie Gleason, who surprisingly had much credible information to offer Long John about the reality of flying saucers.

Therefore, in all fairness, the editorial board at the men’s publication decided that Tacker and Long John’s respective articles would appear in juxtaposition with each other in the March 1961 issue of Argosy.

For Tacker’s part in the Argosy UFO articles, he summed up the Air Force’s official policy toward UFOs, beginning with its very title: “Flying Saucers Are Fakes!” Tacker acknowledged that he was speaking on behalf of the United States Air Force in his article, and Argosy’s editors subtitled it, “The Air Force once and for all blasts off on the myth of the men from space.”

The Air Force’s spokesman stated that, “The belief in flying saucers as space ships under intelligent control from other planets is the biggest hoax perpetrated on the American people since the ‘Cardiff Giant’ affair at the turn of the century and the Orson Welles’ Martian invasion of Earth in the year 1937.”

107

The Real Resident Aliens

Cardiff Giant Background Information The Cardiff Giant mentioned above was one of the most famous of the archaeological hoaxes carried out in American history. It was a 10-foot-tall (3.0 m), 3,000 pound, alleged “petrified man” uncovered on 16 October 1869, by workers digging a well behind the barn of William C. “Stub” Newell in Cardiff, New York. He covered the giant with a tent and it soon became a popular tourist attraction site. An unauthorized copy of the giant was produced by the promoter P. T. Barnum, after Newell refused to sell it to him, which can still be seen on display at Marvin’s Marvelous Mechanical Museum in Farmington Hills, Michigan. As to the original giant, Newell sold it to an Iowa newspaper publisher, Gardner Cowles, Jr., following its display at the 1901 Pan-American Exhibition in Buffalo, New York. After Newell sold the giant to Cowles, he frankly admitted that it was a fake and how he manufactured it and buried it on his property before hiring the well diggers. In 1947, the giant was sold by Cowles to the Farmers’ Museum in Cooperstown, New York, where it can still be viewed today. It is doubtful that most Argosy readers in March 1961 were even aware of the details of this case, so it seems strange that Tacker would even bring it up in reference to flying saucers being fake. And here we are in 2023, 76 years after the Age of Flying Saucers began, still pondering the distinct possibility that flying saucers/UFOs/UAP are, in reality, interplanetary spaceships. The Cardiff Giant hoax long died out, but the subject of flying saucers remains one for the ages.

The Martian Invasion While Lieutenant Colonel Tacker was considered by the Air Force brass to be their primary expert and spokesman concerning UFOs, he certainly was not an accurate historian. Case-in- point is his reference to “Orson Welles’ Martian invasion of Earth in the year 1937” as being, like flying saucers, one of the “biggest hoaxes” ever perpetrated on the American people. In the first place, the famous “Martian Invasion” broadcast took place at 8:00 a.m. on 30 October 1938, the night before Halloween but falling in the regularly-scheduled CBS Radio Network’s time slot for their Mercury Theater of the Air drama program, as hosted by Orson Welles. There was no hoax taking place in the airing of the program, as it was announced at the beginning, throughout the program, and at its end, that it was a science fiction dramatization of H. G. Well’s famous War of the Worlds novel (London: William Heinemann Publisher,1898) with the site of the invasion being moved from the British Isles to Grover’s Mill, New Jersey.

That some never paid attention to the announcements that they were listening to a dramatization is unfortunate. But since Orson Welles clearly stated that it 108

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

was a regular dramatic presentation of the Mercury Theater, it was by no means a “hoax” perpetrated by him or anyone at CBS Radio on the American people.

Tacker never even got the year right.

Tacker Outlines the Air Force Position Tacker continued with his disparaging comments regarding flying saucers: “The unidentified flying object, amateur hobby groups, who have fostered this belief since the well-publicized saucer sighting of June 24, 1947, have yelled ‘wolf ’ so many times since the initial sighting almost fourteen years ago, that the general public no longer believes in their sensational theory that space travel is an accomplished fact.

“Some of these groups, such as the Unidentified Flying Object Research Committee of Akron, Ohio; the Aerial Phenomena Research Organization of Tucson, Arizona; the Civilian UFO Research of Chicago, Illinois; and the National Investigations Committee on Aerial Phenomena of Washington, D.C., have dues-paying members who receive the periodical published by their organization, identifying many saucer sightings which they say prove we are being watched by super-intelligent beings from other planets, operating in our atmosphere in space ships. They stress the fact that they have irrefutable evidence to prove their sensational claims and scream that the United States Air Force, the governmental agency responsible for investigating reported sightings of UFOs, is aware of the fact that we are being watched by these intelligent beings, that space travel does, in fact, exist, and yet the Air Force lies and refuses to confirm this significant scientific discovery to the American people.”

The Lieutenant Colonel then pointed out that at the beginning of 1961, the Air Force had taken note that there were several hundred flying saucer clubs, with a combined membership of over 300,000 persons, operating within the borders of the United States. All of these groups fell under the umbrella of being “nonprofit organizations dedicated to public education on the subject of unidentified flying objects (UFOs) or ‘flying saucers.’” The Air Force officer also pointed out that most of these groups published some sort of newsletter or periodical to place the most sensational UFO stories before the general public. The editors of these publications cite the so-called “evidence” they have managed to gather over the years which prove their group’s contentions for the existence of extraterrestrial spaceships visiting our planet and a massive cover-up on the part of the United States government to hide this fact, particularly the Air Force.

“But,” asserts Tacker, “here is the sixty-four-thousand-dollar question: ‘What evidence?’ There is nothing there that the scientist could truly call 109

The Real Resident Aliens

scientific proof. There is no basis for computations resulting from numerical counts gathered in connection with these sightings.” He explains that he has, over his long career in dealing with the subject of UFOs, never came across any spectrum analysis of light or color with respect to the objects themselves. Most of the reports that came across his desk turned out to be nothing more than vague statements lacking any scientific precision. Tacker said that the Air Force even tried on numerous occasions to reach out to the leadership of these civilian flying saucer groups for help in dealing with the UFO phenomenon in America: “All of these groups have been asked, from time-to-time, by the Air Force, to present their evidence to the Air Force, some other governmental agency, or a nonpartisan civilian laboratory, as an act of patriotism and loyalty, but nothing has been presented to this date which would prove their wild claims. On the basis of this fact, you might say that the flying saucer groups are withholding vital information from the Armed Forces and the American public. However, this is ridiculous, because the very fact that they have not presented this evidence means that they do not possess it.”

The Air Force spokesman revealed that one of the nation’s leading visual astronomers once told him that he had never observed a “bona fide flying saucer” and that the star gazer “had the distinct impression that there exists a strong correlation between the incident of flying saucers and the state of mind of the observer, influenced by fear, hysteria, wishful thinking, or plain, fraudulent intentions.”

Tacker was in total agreement with the astronomer, and speaking for himself as well as the Air Force, declared, “I think this sums up the entire situation beautifully.”

Air Force Still Maintains Interest in UFOs Despite the Air Force’s outward dismissal of the activities of the flying saucer clubs and the entire UFO phenomenon, generally, Tacker expressed a caveat that we have long heard repeated, even to our times with respect to the socalled Red Chinese drones and balloons, which the Defense establishment has conveniently dubbed “unexplained aerial phenomena” (UAP). The lieutenant colonel explained that, “By law, the United States Air Force is charged with the air defense of the United States; and the investigation and analysis of UFOs, or flying saucers, over the United States is directly related to this responsibility.”

Tacker realized that one could not separate the phenomenon of UFOs from defense considerations. As such, the Air Force officer elucidated on this matter, highlighting that, “Prompt reporting and rapid identification are essential to 110

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

the second of the four phases of air defense, namely detection, identification, interception and destruction. Therefore, the Air Force must maintain the UFO program.” This aptly describes the reasons that some military and law enforcement agencies continued to investigate UFO reports, sometimes overtly and sometimes secretly, long after the Air Force Project Blue Book was officially shut down in 1969, following the recommendations of the University of Colorado’s Condon Report that they do so.

To the Contrary

Those listeners to Long John Nebel’s Party Line were frequently presented with then prominent comedian Jackie Gleason (19161987) as an expert on space phenomena and UFOs, particularly. In Long John’s response article to Tacker’s, he introduced Gleason as a, “noted comedian, actor, bon vivant musician, pool player and good friend,” who just happened to be one of the most informed civilians in the United States with a great understanding of the UFO question. Gleason asserted right from the start in his interview with Long John, and title Back in 1961, famous actor and comedian Jackie Gleason announced on of the Argosy article, that, “The Flying Saucers Long John Nebel’s Party Line program Are Real!” that he was willing to reward $10,000 Gleason was such a firm believer in flying in cold, hard cash to any listener who could provide proof for the existence saucers as interplanetary spaceships that he was of flying saucers as spaceships from willing to put up $10,000 of his own money as another planet. a reward for anyone who could provide proof of rational life on other worlds. Gleason made this announcement on the Party Line program, and Long John was duly “shook up” by it. Remember that while $10,000 does not seem like a lot of money today, back in 1961, $10,000 held the value of $100,000 in contemporary 2023 dollars.

“Now, I know that Jackie has, for a long time, held an enormous interest in anything off beat, occult, really far out,” wrote Nebel, adding that, “I was aware that he owned one of the largest collections in the country of books on these subjects. But it wasn’t until he came on my show and made the offer of ten grand that I realized how great his interest was.

111

The Real Resident Aliens

“The whole thing started late one night as I was conducting a talk session.

Suddenly, the studio door opened and in walked Mr. Gleason. We gabbed for a while, and the topic of flying saucers soon raised its green little head.”

Gleason inquired, “John, why don’t you talk about flying saucers as much as you used to?”

Nebel replied, “The real reason is that we haven’t had anyone come up with a new hit in the last few weeks. We are likely to have these lulls from time to time.”

It was right after that the “Great One,” Jackie Gleason, blurted out his statement that, “The flying saucers are real!”

Nebel interjected, “Like Santa Claus is real?”

“No, not like Santa Claus is real,” roared Jackie. “Santa Claus is a myth to keep people happy. The reason that the information on flying saucers is held back by the government is because it is not a joyful myth. This could be very, very serious. The way I figure it, if someone has a flying saucer, they must have an advanced intelligence. And with advanced intelligence comes higher moral concepts. I’m sure that they don’t mean us any harm.”

At this point, Long John wanted to know, as all inquiring minds do, just where these flying saucers were coming from?

“From another planet, obviously,” noted Gleason, further speculating, “Or maybe from bases on the Moon.”

“This is an honest opinion?” asked Long John.

“I really think so,” answered the well-known actor and comedian, further justifying his response: “Let me tell you why. I have read hundreds of books on flying saucers. First of all, I have studied psychic phenomena, and all the other branches of that particular study, and I’ve always bought a book, pro and con, on each subject. But the thing that seems so fascinating about saucers is that someone once saw a saucer and it was round and had a little turret on it. And suddenly, the government is making flying saucers that are round and have little turrets on them!”

I found that comment quite intriguing, especially since the United States government began to fund corporate design and manufacture of the legendary “G-ships” back in the mid-1950s, allegedly constructing a fleet of anti-gravity spaceships of our own based on the back-engineering of crashed saucers in the late 1940s in the American Southwest in the vicinity of nuclear test sites, most notably at Roswell (1947) and Aztec (1948), both in New Mexico. For more information on these TOP SECRET anti-gravity research programs, and the true origins of our secret space program, please check out my seventh book in

112

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

the Venus Rising series, Flying Saucers: From Venus They Come (Terra Alta, West Virginia: Headline Books, 2022).

Long John Nebel also informs us that one of his other guests on that Party Line program with Gleason, also asked this question: “Isn’t it possible, Jackie, that these outer space vehicles might be vicious?”

“No,” answered Jackie, “not only might they not be vicious; the pilots might be very naïve people.”

The other guest interjected, “You know, Jackie, some of the saucer cultists make a connection between saucers and the Bible.”

And Gleason wisely replied, “Some do. But you can’t say a particular thing isn’t true because cultists accept it.”

Long John, for his part, was happy that Jackie came out and declared his firm belief in the flying saucers as being vehicles from other planets. “How strong Jackie’s belief is may be shown best by the fact that he’s already willing to lay out cold, hard cash to anyone who can produce any proof at all that intelligent life exists on another planet,” wrote Long John in the article, adding that, “There is $10,000 waiting for you if you can prove it, also Mr. Gleason’s eternal gratitude for showing his faith in UFOs wasn’t in vain.”

Up to the publication of the March 1961 issue of Argosy that contained Long John’s article, no one had come forward to claim Jackie Gleason’s reward. But the radio program host emphasized that Jackie Gleason was “dead serious about this (the reward) and his belief that flying saucers exist and are piloted by beings from outer space.”

For a full history of Gleason’s involvement with flying saucers, including the viewing of dead alien bodies suspended in a solution in huge glass tanks at Homestead Air Force Base in Florida along with then President Richard M. Nixon, please check out my first Venus book, Venus Rising: A Concise History of the Second Planet (Terra Alta, West Virginia: Headline Books, 2015), pages 165-175.

113

Two Of The Gabor Sisters’ Links to ETs And UFOs Zsa Zsa Gabor (1917-2016), born Sári Gábor in Budapest, Hungary, began her theatrical career in Vienna, Austria, in 1934, and two years later attained notoriety when, upon returning to her country, she was crowned Miss Hungary.

Her two sisters also pursued successful careers in acting, the older being Magna Gabor (19151997) and the younger Eva (1919-1995), both being born in Budapest. Zsa Zsa left Hungary in 1941, before it became occupied by the Nazis, and emigrated to the United States where she ultimately became a prominent actress and socialite, being married nine times. All three of the sisters died in California, Zsa Zsa and Eva in Los Angeles and Magna in Palm Springs. It was Zsa Zsa and Eva who had connections to the age of flying saucers; and these constitute the theme of this chapter.

Zsa Zsa Gabor in the role of Talleah leads a Venusian women’s revolt against a cruel, man-hating monarch to replace her as the Queen of Outer Space (Allied Artists, 1958).

Queen of Outer Space Due to her “European flair and style,” it didn’t take long before Zsa Zsa became one of the most sought-after actresses in Hollywood.7 She played a supporting role in her first two films, Lovely to Look At (MGM, 1952), and followed by, in the same year, We’re Not Married! (Twentieth Century Fox). Director John Huston, esteeming Zsa Zsa as a “creditable actress,” put her in the starring role in his late December 1952-released film, Moulin Rouge. Between Moulin Rouge 7 114

George Barris, Cars of the Stars (MBI Publishing, St. Paul, Minnesota, 2008), 71.

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

and the epic Queen of Outer Space (Allied Artists) in 1958, Zsa Zsa appeared in twelve movies.

Queen of Outer Space is a science fiction adventure film done in Cinema Scope Deluxe Color, which was very impressive for a such a 1958 movie production, of which the majority at that time were still in black and white.

Produced by Ben Schwalb and directed by Edward Bernds, it stars Zsa Zsa Gabor as the Talleah, the leader of the Venusian women’s insurgent force against the evil, man-hating queen, played by Laurie Mitchell. Eric Fleming is Captain Patterson, an American astronaut commanding a 1985 spaceship mission to discover the party responsible for destroying a space station in Earth orbit. The screenplay by Charles Beaumont, is based on an unpublished novel written by Ben Hecht, about a planet ruled by women and originally titled Queen of the Universe.8 Upon its release on 7 September 1958, the film was promoted by Allied Artists and distributed to some locations as part of a double feature with Frankenstein 1970 starring Boris Karloff.

1957-1958 in Ufology It appears that Ben Hecht was doing his research before putting the paper into his Royal typewriter for writing this sci-fi classic; and it seems as though he combined two strains of thought common in ufology throughout 1957 and the first half of 1958. Although the Queen of Outer Space is a parody of other science fiction films of the 1950s, even borrowing props, special-effects clips and wardrobe from several other serious ventures, including Forbidden Planet (MGM, 1956), its premise was fundamentally sound. Considering the wide attention received by such contactees of the era as George Adamski, Orfeo Angelucci, Daniel Fry, Howard Menger, George Van Tassel, et al, all men that claimed to be in contact with beautiful, Nordic-looking Venusian women, it should come as no surprise that Hecht found no difficulty in finding the perfect cohort to populate our neighboring sister planet Venus. Additionally, ufologists of the late 1950s were concerned about any possible hostile intentions from the ufonauts, especially since the contactees had warned that the Venusians and other extraterrestrials would take action against us if we converted our intercontinental ballistic missiles into rockets capable of delivering atomic and/ or nuclear weapons to their home worlds.

8

Royal Books, advertisement for original contact sheets, https://www.royalbooks.com/pages/ books/148889/edward-bernds-ben-hecht-fred-morgan-charles-beaumont-eric-fleming-zsa-zsagabor-dave-willock/queen-of-outer-space-three-original-contact-sheets-from-the-1958-film (Accessed 26 December 2021).

115

The Real Resident Aliens

Remember that Hecht’s story begins with the destruction of an American space station by a deadly burst of cosmic rays emanating far from Earth.

Now consider some of the topics under discussion in just two issues of the Aerial Phenomena Research Organization’s APRO Bulletin (Alamogordo, New Mexico) of November 1957 and January 1958:9 November 1957 Object Seen Over A-Bomb Bunkers: Two Army range patrols at the White Sands Missile Proving Grounds encounter an “egg-shaped object, nearly as bright as the sun, and at least 200 feet long, hanging above an A-bomb bunker.”

Both incidents took place on 3 November 1957, with the first patrol running into the UFO at 3 a.m. and the second patrol meeting up with the mysterious object at 8 p.m., in the same location.

Air Force Base Employee Encounters Unidentified Aerial Object (UAO): James W. Stokes, a retired Navy man and electrical engineering contractor working at Holloman Air Force Base, located ten miles southwest of Alamogordo, in Otero County, New Mexico, filed a report with APRO stating that sometime in the late afternoon on 4 November 1957, while on a job-related trip to El Paso, Texas, driving his personal vehicle east along U.S. Route 54, he encountered a UFO along the highway some ten miles south of Oro Grande, a small desert coffee shop. The engine of his car died, as did the engines of several other motorists on the road. They all got out of their vehicles and observed what appeared to be a “mother-of-pearl-colored egg-shaped object approaching from the direction of the Sacramento Mountains. It was moving in a southwest direction and then seemed to veer off, heading toward the observers. It then ascended in a northwest direction, apparently zooming off into outer space.

When he returned to his car, a late model Mercury, it just started right up. All of the other stalled vehicles started up as well.

Several employees of White Sands Proving Grounds were also known to be among those observers in the stalled traffic. Among them was Alan D. Baker, who allegedly told newsmen that he had taken photographs of the UFO. Coral Lorenzen, the editor of the APRO Bulletin, noted that, “A White Sands-road giving access to Highway 54 from the Proving Ground intersects not too far from the point where the sighting took place. It is also believed that these people made their report to their superiors first, and were cautioned not to come 9

116

Dr. Raymond Keller was a member of the now-defunct APRO and associate of the late Dr. Leo Sprinkle, the premier scientific consultant for that group who also wrote the introduction to Dr. Keller’s first UFO book, Venus Rising: A Concise History of the Second Planet (Terra Alta, West Virginia: Headline Books, 2015).

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

forth to corroborate the story. The pictures are probably in a file at Wright Air Development Center at Dayton, Ohio, by this time.”

January 1958 Radiation Sickness After UFO Sighting/Geiger Counter Registers 150 Micro-roentgens at Site of Saucer Landing: Olden Moore claims he saw a landed “space ship” near the intersection of Route 86 and Hart Road in Montville Township, Ohio, on 6 November 1957, has had his story backed up by a Geiger counter reading which registered 10 times the normal background radioactivity, a day after the sighting. Moore, a plasterer, was driving home from Painesville at 11:30 p. m., when a disc-shaped, bright object just “loomed up in front” of his car and then seemed to split apart. One section “disappeared,” while the other settled down in a field near the road.

When Moore saw the object, he shut off his APRO UFO case highlights radiation lights and pulled his car off the road. When the risks in close encounters of any kind.

An intense radiation beam from Venus object landed, Moore watched it for about 15 wiped out the American space station minutes. After that, he then got out of his car in the classic movie Queen of Outer Space. and approached it. He heard a ticking sound, somewhat like the tick of a water meter. He stopped before he got near the UFO, then went back, got in his car and went home to get his wife.

In all, he had observed the object for about 20 minutes. When they arrived back at the field, the object was gone. At 11:30 a. m. on the following day, Moore’s wife reported the incident to Sheriff Louis A. Robusky by telephone. On 8 November, Olden Moore found himself being questioned by Lake County Civil Defense Director Kenneth Locke, Geauga County Sheriff Louis A. Robusky, army authorities, scientists from the Case Institute of Technology in Cleveland, Ohio, and newsmen from the three Cleveland television stations, WKYC (Channel 3/ NBC), WERE (Channel 5/ABC) and WJW (Channel 8/CBS).

And then the biggest mystery began. Olden Moore was gone for a few days, and when he returned, he wouldn’t say where he had been. But his wife told friends he had gone to Washington, D. C. in connection with the sighting of the UFO. When asked about this, Mr. Moore merely said, “She talks too much. I talked to high officials. I was sworn to secrecy! I won’t say where I was.” Moore 117

The Real Resident Aliens

signed an affidavit containing the details of what he had seen, and the 150 micro-roentgen reading was taken in the middle of an area 50 feet in diameter in the spot in the field where Moore said he saw the object. At the perimeter of that area, the reading dropped to 20 or 30 micro-roentgens. Fifteen or 20 are considered normal readings.

Interestingly, the Cleveland Plain Dealer for 27 November 1957 had no further information in print regarding the incident and nothing got out on the press wires. This is regrettable, of course, and it is important to notice that results of radiation tests were never published. Two other incidents which took place in the nearby vicinity also indicate the presence of radiation after a UAO visitation, and were not given publicity since they were initially carried in the Plain Dealer.

This sighting lends weight to a couple of long held theories about the UAO: 1. The UAO occupants are not concerned with any possible harm they might bring to people as a result of their close contact with them.

2. The United States government and specifically the Air Force silence group in the Pentagon, is going to have to be held responsible for many more such incidents if people aren’t warned that these objects are dangerous when approached.

Eva Gabor and the Hawaiian Saucer Fleet From Honolulu, Hawaii, comes this interesting report from Movieland and TV Time magazine correspondent Joyce Becker, published in the March 1967 issue of that periodical, “Eva Gabor: A Flying Saucer Chased Me!” Wrote Becker concerning Eva Gabor’s visit to Hawaii to entertain sailors and soldiers on leave from Vietnam, during a short hiatus from work on her hit television show, Green Acres, “It was a beautiful, warm, moonlit night and the air was scented like perfume by the tropical flowers. Eva Gabor and her then husband number four,10 television executive Richard Brown, were heading for the island’s posh Outrigger Club. As their car sped along the palm tree-lined streets, Eva slipped her 10 118

Eva Gabor tells of seeing flying saucer fleet from patio of Outrigger Club in Honolulu, Hawaii: “Well, darlings, flying saucers didn’t actually chase me, just frightened me half to death!”

Source: Movieland and TV Time magazine, March 1967, in Keller Venus Files.

Richard Brown, Eva’s husband from 1959 to 1973. She would marry one more time after divorcing Brown.

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

hand into her husband’s. She looked up into the starlit sky and took a deep breath. ‘Darling,’ she said, in her beautiful Hungarian accent, ‘I’m so happy that we chose to entertain our guests at the Outrigger Club. It is so perfect. We can dine out on the patio without having to worry about anything.’ Richard Brown looked up at the sky and gently squeezed his wife’s hand, letting her know that he too felt this was the perfect night which nothing could spoil.”

Eva and Richard arrived at the club simultaneously with their guests, Al and Caro Jones Simon. Al was the president of Filmways, having achieved that position after the launching of the successful Beverly Hillbillies series, another Filmways production that ended up running from 1962 through 1971 on the CBS Television Network. Eva and Caro Jones were elegantly dressed in gowns, while Richard and Al wore dinner jackets. They were quickly recognized as frequenters of the club and their party was escorted to a table on the patio overlooking the Pacific Ocean beachfront.

Despite the wafting tropical breeze, the temperature was in the mid-90s, so they settled on ordering some tall, cool drinks. The women talked about shopping and not wanting to leave the paradisiacal islands, while the gentlemen discussed the television business. Waving to several people they knew in the club, they got down to ordering dinner. And it was during Eva Gabor honored U.S. military that dinner that this strange encounter took personnel by taking an occasional hiatus from the set of Green Acres to place. travel to Hawaii for the purpose of Eva told Joyce, “For some reason, I turned entertaining sailors and soldiers on leave from Vietnam attending Bob away from the conversation at the table and Hope’s USO Shows. Movieland and looked out at the beach and the ocean. Far out TV Time magazine photo from Keller Venus Files. along the horizon I saw them. At first, because of the darkness out there, I thought they might have been ships’ lights blinking on and off. Then they looked as if they were coming right at us. I was shocked. I knew I was seeing flying saucers!

“Without taking my eyes off of them, I told Richard and the Simons what I saw. Maybe I wanted reassurance that my eyes weren’t playing tricks on me! I gasped; as if I was getting ready to run, I pushed my chair away from the table and stood. They kept coming closer and closer. I grabbed hold of Richard’s hand.

Thank goodness he was with me.

119

The Real Resident Aliens

“They were flying in formation, eight or ten of them. They were round and flat. Their lights were red, yellow and green. They kept blinking on and off, on and off. I was more frightened than I had ever been in my life.

“Finally, they seemed to stop flying. They were almost right above us, just hanging there with their lights blinking. They stayed for about two or three minutes, but it felt as if it were hours. I was holding on to Richard’s hand so very tight. Not one word was spoken by anyone on the patio. We just stood there looking at those flying saucers in the sky.

Richard Brown, television executive, “Suddenly, they started to move! I held on to and wife Eva Gabor in Honolulu Outrigger Club on night of UFO Richard even tighter. I heard voices around me; sightings. Others in the club also saw but I didn’t know what anyone was saying! Their the saucer fleet, substantiating Eva’s account. Source: Movieland and TV lights were still blinking and they moved from Time magazine photo in Keller Venus one side of the horizon to the other. Then, just Files. as strangely as they appeared, they seem to have disappeared! They just moved out over the dark ocean, from where I first saw them; and they disappeared into the night.”

Eva concluded her narration of the event, telling Joyce that, “Richard helped me into my chair. Everyone around us was talking about the strange sight. Of course, just as all of us have done, I have read about the UFOs that other people said they had seen. I believed them; but I never thought that I, Eva Gabor would actually see flying saucers.

“Well, I did, for the first time in my life. And I was so petrified. I hope it will be the last!

As fellow ufologists reading this column, I am sure you can appreciate Eva Gabor, the little sister of the Queen of Outer Space, and her testimony of witnessing a fleet of flying saucers with the other patrons out on the patio of the Honolulu Outrigger Club. According to Michael Salla, on a recent program of Ancient Aliens, the Hawaiian Islands have a definite connection to the Pleiades constellation in the Taurus sector, and beings from that region of space, piloting their interplanetary spacecraft, are frequent visitors to those remote islands.

Hmmm, where was Michael Salla when the Gabor sisters really needed him….?

120

“Cosmic Ray” Takes Us To The Interplanetary House Of Pancakes (IHOP)

Photo from Keller Venus Files: Rather than “Take me to your leader,” the first sentence you’re likely to hear from an extraterrestrial visitor is “Got maple syrup?”

Usually, Earthlings go to the International House of Pancakes (IHOP) when they are looking for a good breakfast, at any time of the day. Just ask an interstate trucker, if you still harbor any doubts about this. But where do you Venusians or other extraterrestrials go when they are cavorting through outer space in their flying saucers and suddenly come down with the munchies? In search for answers about this crucial question plaguing the ufology community, I searched through my extensive files and found an interesting account dating back to Tuesday, 18 April 1961.

On that momentous day, a little before 11 a.m., farmer Joe Simonton, who also served as the small town of Eagle River, Wisconsin’s auctioneer and plumber, had even sighted a flying saucer and its occupant, he heard what he described as a “terrible swirling noise” above his home. “At first,” he said, “I thought the whole house was going to blow away. Then I walked over to the window and saw this saucer come straight down, vertically. I ran out very quick then.”

121

The Real Resident Aliens

Suddenly a flying saucer came down in the backyard of his farmhouse. Joe Simonton, standing all amazed and watching the UFO from his kitchen window come in for a landing, explained that, “The hatch opened underneath the saucer and a man in a black suit got out. He had this water jug and he gestured to me to give him some water, so I did.”

Filing the Initial Reports Simonton did not immediately report this incident, however, as he was not sure how most of the local folks would take it. But two days after the incident, he did get around to revealing the full story to Vilas County, Wisconsin, Judge Frank Carter, whom he understood had long expressed an interest in the subjects of “flying saucers” and “life on other planets.” Carter encouraged the local farmer to make additional reports to the District Attorney Calvin Burton and to the Sheriff John Schroeder, assuring Simonton that these gentlemen also kept an open mind on the subject of UFOs and possible alien connections with them; thus, the experiencer followed through with the judge’s advice.

Continuing with his account of his first contact with the five-foot extraterrestrial in the black suit with the water jug who disembarked from the flying saucer, Simonton reported: “Once I was outside, I took the jug from the alien visitor and ran over to a pump to fill it up with water. When I went to return the now water-filled jug to the spaceman, I got a look inside the saucer and saw some other men. One of the men in the ship was frying food on a flameless grill of some sort. I motioned to indicate an interest in their food by pointing to some pancakes over by the grill, situated next to an instrument panel; and the man at the grill, also dressed in black but with a narrow red trim along his trousers, while still remaining silent, handed me three small pancakes. None of the men aboard the saucer said anything to me.”

“When I went over to get a look inside and saw the other men, they didn’t say anything to me; but I pointed to the pancakes by the instrument panel and they gave me a few.

“Then the first man got inside and the saucer rose slowly to a height of about fifteen feet; but in a matter of seconds, it zipped off at a 45-degree angle, moving so far away in a southernly direction, that I could no longer even see it. In taking off, it made such a ‘whoosh’ that the nearby pine trees were bowled over.”

122

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

Flying Saucer Description

Joe Simonton described the flying saucer as a “gleaming silver, brighter-than-chrome machine that appeared to hover over the ground instead of landing. I estimated that it was about twelve feet from top to bottom and about thirty feet in diameter. I noted exhaust pipes six or seven inches in diameter running along the edge of the saucer.” The farmer thought that perhaps these pipes were used in venting the grill and its heat.

The saucer’s interior was black, approximating the color of wrought iron. The farmer noted Photo from Keller Venus Files: Wisconsin farmer Joe Simonton thinks that, “From the interior of the craft came a slow, he can help his extraterrestrial friends whining sound like the hum of a generator. The make better pancakes, more round and less burnt. Samples from his hatch through which I peered into the ship was pancake stack went to the Air Force about five feet off the ground; and when the and a civilian UFO group for detailed analysis. craft lifted off, the large hatch snapped shut and was machined so smoothly I could scarcely detect where the hatch was after it closed.”

Flying Saucer Occupants Simonton said that throughout his brief encounter he was aware of three occupants aboard the flying saucer, all seemingly males dressed in black, twopiece suits. He estimated that all of them were about five feet tall and weighing approximately 125 pounds each. All of the men had the appearance of being dark-skinned Hispanics. Of the cakes handed to the farmer by one of the occupants, Simonton was of the opinion that they tasted like regular pancakes, although a bit charred around the edges.

Both Air Force and Civilian Ufology Involvement A portion of these slightly burnt pancakes was saved by Simonton for Air Force Project Bluebook investigators, who were dispatched to his Wisconsin farm. The investigators told the farmer that they would pass on the pancake samples to their staff chemists back at Wright-Patterson Air Force Base in Dayton, Ohio, where Project Bluebook was located. An entire pancake was also sent to the headquarters of the then largest civilian UFO investigations group,

123

The Real Resident Aliens

the National Investigations Committee on Aerial Phenomena (NICAP), in Washington, D.C. The pancakes were the only evidence that Simonton had for the visit of the extraterrestrials. After his encounter, he called the local sheriff from the kitchen telephone in his farmhouse, who sent out two deputies to the scene of the saucer landing. As they found nothing out of place anywhere on the farm, and no physical evidence for the landing of a flying saucer, they just went hack to the station and did not even file a report, thinking they would save the farmer a lot of embarrassment.

Simonton also called the nearest military facility, the Air Force radar center at Traux Field in Madison, Wisconsin, who took his report on an official form that eventually made its way to the Aerospace Technical Intelligence Center in Dayton and later to Dr. J. Allen Hynek, chair of the Astronomy Department at Northwestern University in Evanston, Illinois, just north of Chicago, who served as the scientific consultant for Project Bluebook. Hynek later verified that the Traux radar center picked up nothing unusual at or around the time of Simonton’s encounter.

Hynek later told Paul Foght, a correspondent for Fate magazine (Evanston, Illinois, August 1961), that, “Naturally, I was disappointed that Mr. Simonton was not able to take a photo of his visitors and their ship. In my twelve years of investigating UFOs and flying saucer contacts for the Air Force, I have never located a photo which could be identified beyond any doubt as a flying machine or mass of unknown origin.

“I do feel, however, that Joe Simonton’s Eagle River visitors present a good example of a saucer contact case; and consequently, as a result of my recommendation, a complete investigation was begun- even though the Air Force normally does not conduct extensive inquiries of reported sightings or contacts where only one witness was involved.”

Hynek felt sure that Simonton’s experience was real. The farmer’s neighbors assured the Northwestern scientist that they knew Joe Simonton to be a “sober and sensible person.” Up to the time of the report, Simonton lived in Eagle River for 30 years, served as the Chamber of Commerce Santa Claus each Christmas, and was highly esteemed by all local authorities. Sheriff Schroeder remarked that, “Joe really believes everything he says; and he isn’t a drinking man. He talks sensibly.”

County Judge Carter held a similarly high estimation of Simonton, declaring, “I am convinced that Joe actually saw the ‘saucernauts’ because I am unable to think of any way in which this man could profit if the story was a hoax.”

124

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

As a result of the Wisconsin farmer’s good standing, his UFO report was thoroughly checked out by Dr. Hynek, Air Force Major Robert Friend, and an unnamed officer from the K. I. Sawyer Air Force Base in Gwinn, Michigan.

Hynek, however, feared that Simonton might become the subject of ridicule from some quarters. “Speaking for myself and the other Air Force investigators in this case,” said the Illinois astronomer, “we are delighted that Mr. Simonton has come forth with his account. The Air Force hopes that other qualified and competent witnesses will, like Mr. Simonton, not be discouraged from making reports of flying saucer sightings to Project Bluebook, where such information regarding the UFO phenomenon will be properly processed through our clearing house at the Aerospace Technical Intelligence Center at Wright-Patterson Air Force Base in Dayton, Ohio.”

Other UFO Reports in the Eagle River Area In the process of their investigation, Hynek and the other Air Force investigators discovered that there were four other independent reports of UFOs in the Eagle River area. Savino Borgo, an Eagle River insurance agent, sighted a flying saucer on Wisconsin State Highway 70 about one mile from Simonton’s farm at around the same time that Simonton alleged that the alien spacecraft came down on his farm. Additionally, Gibb Sanborn, the manager of the Wisconsin State Employment Service at Eagle River and Jack Long, a Boulder Junction, Wisconsin, merchant, said they also sighted flying saucers in the days previous to Simonton’s report. There was also a UFO report from five Rhinelander, Wisconsin, residents that attracted the interest of the Air Force investigators.

The details of this UFO report were published in correspondent Foght’s previously referenced Fate magazine article: “At 6:45 p.m., on 27 April 1961, Brent Lorbetski, 20, and Tim Hunt, 17, were in an automobile near the Lorbetski home in Sugar Camp Township near Rhinelander.

“The young men spotted a high-flying, silver-colored, circular object. The object was passing overhead at considerable altitude and at high speed; but was making no noise.

“The youth called to the other members of the Lorbetski’s family who came outside in time to see the object. The family then reported the sighting to the Oneida County Sheriff ’s Office. Brent Lorbetski’s father, who was not home at the time of the sighting, is chairman of the town of Sugar Camp. Inquiries to

125

The Real Resident Aliens

local authorities indicate the witnesses have excellent reputations for reliability and veracity.”

Secrecy and Fumbling The Air Force, sadly, never released its findings to the public concerning the extraterrestrial pancakes from the chuckwagon IHOP saucer.

As for the civilian UFO group, NICAP, that also received extraterrestrial pancake samples, they totally dropped the ball with their investigation, or lack of investigation, in letting the sample get ruined. Unlike Dr. Hynek and the Air Force personnel investigating this case, Richard Hall, a spokesman for NICAP, upon receiving word of Mr. Simonton’s sighting and a sample of the alien food product, immediately announced that, “NICAP is highly skeptical of Joe’s story.

Our investigating committee might analyze one of Joe’s cakes which was sent to us by the Eagle River judge; and will probably conduct a routine investigation.”

NICAP’s Hall was totally oblivious to Joe Simonton’s outstanding community standing and credibility, and completely ignored the multiple sightings in the Eagle River and Rhinelander area with a circumference of 20 miles.

Unlike the competing civilian UFO investigating group, Aerial Phenomena Research Organization (APRO) in Arizona, NICAP was noted for its refusal to consider that any UFOs might be landing or occupants sighted or encountered by human beings. In the estimation of the NICAP director, Donald E. Keyhoe, a retired Marine Corps aviation major, the UFOs were simply conducting an aerial surveillance of our planet and our military capabilities, preparatory to an invasion.

Coral and Jim Lorenzen, the co-directors of APRO and also originally from Wisconsin, like Mr. Simonton, were of the more open-minded opinion that if the extraterrestrials wanted to conquer the Earth, they would have done it a long time ago. The flying saucer occupants, being scientifically advanced and curious, would certainly want to meet humans from all walks of life, especially after they travelled the vast distances between worlds and maybe solar systems, to get here.

126

Field Location #2: Brown Mountain Lights of North Carolina

Mysterious light scoots over north ridge of Brown Mountain, North Carolina, photographed during UFO flap in October 2011. During that same month, 27 tourists vacationing on the mountain disappeared and have never been heard from since. Source: https://mysteriousfacts.com

Mysterious Fires and Lights At the end of the 1960s, those “in the know” among the contactee community, realized that the apple orchard on Howard Menger’s farm in High Bridge, New Jersey, was Field Location #1 for the landing of scout ships from Venus. But astute ufologists like Saucer News (New Brunswick, New Jersey) publisher James W. Moseley and Allen H. Greenfield, editor of the UFO Sighter (Atlanta, Georgia), surmised that if space people were landing their saucers on Earth, it would make no sense for them to limit their contacts to just two Earthlings, the sign painter from New Jersey, Howard Menger, and his attractive wife Connie.

Greenfield, the originator of the alternate reality theory of UFOs, speculated 127

The Real Resident Aliens

that some of the UFO hot spots may turn out to be regular landing zones for interplanetary space ships.

Greenfield had gotten wind of some mysterious fires and lights, locally called “ghost lights,” hovering over the ridges of Brown Mountain, located about fifteen miles north of Morganton, North Carolina, and about 65 miles halfway between the two nearest larger cities of Charlotte to the east and Ashville to the west. Greenfield had spoken to UFO investigators from the then largest civilian UFO investigations group, the National Investigations Committee on Aerial Phenomena (NICAP), with their headquarters in Washington, D.C., to get a rundown on these so-called “Brown Mountain Lights.” What he learned was that long before European settlers had ever arrived in North Carolina, the indigenous population was reporting “strange lights which appear to roam about the mountain peaks without any apparent source.”

He also learned about sundry legends that had sprung up about the lights.

One of these legends was that the lights were caused by the spirits of Cherokee and Catawba braves flying above the mountains and scanning the valleys below, looking for their maiden lovers. According to Native American lore in the area, both the Catawba and Cherokee tribes were engaged in a big battle hundreds of years ago, where most of the tribal warriors were killed off. This proved to be an historic fact, at least insofar as six Native American graves had been dug up in the area back in 1966, dating back to pre-European settlement. Going back at least 75 years, however, a local resident, reflective of the feelings shared by many in the community about the mystery lights, stated that, “There is something even more odd and peculiar than Indian spirits at work in the valley below.”

“Who ya gonna’ call?”

When Greenfield made phone calls to Timothy Green Beckley of Flying Saucers magazine (Amherst, Wisconsin) and James W. Moseley about Brown Mountain and the mysterious lights hovering about in its vicinity, they unanimously made the decision in February of 1969 to visit the area where these UFO sightings were taking place to personally investigate the matter. Upon their arrival at the air strip in Morganton, they were met by Greenfield and a local resident, Paul Rose, who drove them out to the base of the mountain. It was there, that Rose pulled his car into a state park, took out a map of the park, spread it out onto a picnic table, and stabbed his right index finger on a lookout point higher up on the mountain road. It was cloudy and windy that day and the temperature was only ten degrees Fahrenheit, with a light falling snow, so all four of the men were freezing. Anyway, they were all dedicated to discovering 128

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

the truth about Brown Mountain, so it was now or never. The road was rocky and slippery in parts due to icing, but Rose was driving a 1960 Willys 3-speed, Utility Wagon Jeep that was more than apt for the ascent ahead.

Upon reaching the lookout point, Greenfield introduced Rose to his two ufologist friends, Beckley and Moseley. “There are two guys in Morganton who have gotten closer to the Brown Mountain lights than anyone else, and you are meeting one of them right here,” said Greenfield, waving his hand in Rose’s direction. “You will meet the other guy later on, once we get back into the town.”

Paul Rose then went on to explain that, “My first sighting came when I was just a youth in about 1916. At the time, it was thought that the lights might have been caused by the headlights on locomotives running through a nearby valley.

However, during one rough spring, all bridges were knocked out and roads were too muddy to enable cars to pass. Yet, the Brown Mountain lights were seen in greater numbers and brighter than ever before, weaving up and down over the trees on Brown Mountain.

“I think the lights are intelligently controlled,” Rose mused, adding that, “I base this on the fact that I have seen them fighting, butting into each other and bouncing like big basketballs. I’ve also tracked them at speeds of almost 100 miles per hour.”

Two UFOs Pose Radiation Hazard!

All three ufologists were impressed and wanted to know more. Rose continued with his account, “On one particular night in the late 1950s, when excitement about the lights was at an all-time high, two of these lights appeared out of the valley, approached this tower I had built for the purpose of watching them over the If you think smoking cigarettes is problematic, here’s some news from trees, the tower we are in now, and climbed to Brown Mountain lights experiencer within several feet of this very position. The next Paul Rose: “Some UFOs can be hazardous to your health!” Art source: day, I and a friend who had been with me, both “UFO + Hazard” by Michael Irwin on became violently ill. This led me to conclude https://dribbble.com. that these lights are highly radioactive.”

Ralph Lael and the Venus Connection Ralph Lael was a life-long resident of the Brown Mountain area of Alexander County, North Carolina. Born in 1909, he was already 60 years old when the three ufologists Beckley, Greenfield and Moseley finally got around to interviewing 129

The Real Resident Aliens

him during their last stop in Morganton on the day before they were scheduled to fly back to their respective hometowns.

Somehow Raymond A. Palmer, the editor and publisher of Flying Saucers magazine, had gotten word of the owner of the so-called “Outer Space Rock Shop Museum,” located on State Highway 181, on the outskirts of Morganton, Ralph Lael (1909-1978), who was bragging to everyone that not only had he encountered Venusians in a landed flying saucer up on Brown Mountain in 1962, but that these extraterrestrials conducted him through an interdimensional portal in the side of the mountain and a little later took him with them to Venus in for a two-day guided tour of that cloudy planet. It was Palmer who tipped off his columnist Beckley that if he ever got down to North Carolina, he should check out Lael and his fantastic story.

Back in 1948, Lael ran for Congress and lost by a few thousand votes. At least up until 1962 and his alleged encounter with our friendly neighborhood Venusians, most locals took him for a fairly credible guy. Even in late 1961, just claiming to have seen the Brown Mountain lights like so many other local residents, raised no eyebrows and no one was thinking that Lael had slipped a mental cog or two.

Lael claims that from the first time he encountered the Brown Mountain lights in October of 1961, he felt that there was some kind of intelligence behind them that had initiated communication with him. During his initial encounter, Lael was basically at the same spot that Paul Rose had been during his first runin with the lights. Lael also felt impelled by some strange attractive force to visit this contact site on several subsequent occasions.

The reasons for these treks up to the mountain were explained by Lael thusly: “Deciding that the only way to uncover the source of these lights was to go into the almost impassable mountain area itself. I started my own investigation. It was shortly after 12:00 one night in 1961, when I got within 100 feet of a light that had risen up from a large hole in the ground. Within 10 to 15 minutes, the first light had been joined by as many as twenty more. Shortly after, they all took off into the timber and disappeared from my view.”

But Lael’s adventure was not yet over. Lael continues: “Just half-an-hour later others began popping up along the mountainside in a smaller valley below. One came so close, within 10 feet, that I felt I could have read a book by it.” Jestingly, he added, “But not a scary one, of course; the UFO sighting was scary enough for me.”

130

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

Deciphering Answers In his article, Beckley notes that, “Several expeditions and months later, Lael discovered that by asking the lights questions, they (the entities behind the lights) would answer by either moving up and down for yes or back and forth for no. After this form of communicating had been established, one of the light beings led Ralph Lael to an actual door of solid light which leads inside of Brown Mountain!”

Magical Mountain Gateways Surprisingly, this type of etheric mountain entrance is nothing new. Such doors and gates of light have been noted in the European Alps since the Middle Ages. In Chapter 2, “Hidden Venus,” in my Venus Rising: A Concise History of the Second Planet (Terra Alta, West Virginia: Headline Books, 2015), I provide the readers with a detailed and erotic encounter enjoyed with an alien queen by a Teutonic knight, Tannhäuser (1200—1270), who fought valiantly in the Crusade of 1228-1229 and upon his return home was enticed by the goddess Venus to pass through a magic gate of light that instantaneously transported him deep inside an Alpine mountain. There he remained as a lover of the enchanting Venus for one calendar year, helping her out with the many duties in supervising her realm, which she called “Venusberg,” a crystalline city of light. But despite all the fantastic wonders of Venusberg and the unparalleled beauty of her reigning goddess, at the end of one year our knight is pining to return to his natal land.

Venus reluctantly agrees to let him go, assured that his erotic desires for her would eventually lead him back.

Another gentleman who passed through a door of light into a magic mountain was the Bolivian contactee Luis Fernando Mostajo Maertens, a dear friend and fellow speaker at the annual summer “From Venus with Love” conferences sponsored by Rob Potter up in Mt. Shasta, California. In his most recent book, The Dragon Seal (Los Angeles, California: Sacred Dragon Publishing, 2021), Mostajo Maertens delves into his many contacts in Bolivia’s Andean range with sundry Ascended Masters from a higher dimension of Venus, but most particularly an entity known as Soromez, his initial contact and spiritual guide.

Soromez first introduced Mostajo Maertens to the Venusians’ subterranean Genesis Inner Retreat in the bowels of the sacred Sajama Mountain back in 1977. Soromez, like Lady Venus with Tannhäuser, took Mostajo Maertens by the hand and simply walked him through a gate of light that just opened up on the side of the mountain. The Sajama is about a four-and-a-half-hour drive from his home in La Paz; and it was at this retreat where he met other members 131

The Real Resident Aliens

of one of the many councils of the Galactic Confederation of Light that inhabit it. Soromez also informed Mostajo Maertens that the Genesis Inner Retreat was the same Temple of the Seven Rays that he escorted the late astroarchaeologist Dr. George Hunt Williamson (1926-1986) and his companion, the latter-day prophetess Dorothy Martin, a.k.a. “Sister Thedra” (1900-1992), to back in 1956.

Luis Fernando Mostajo Maertens and dedicated seekers of illumination comfortably await the arrival of Venusian Ascended Masters passing through the face of the sacred Sajama Mountain in the Andean Range of Bolivia, about a four-and-a-half-hour drive from La Paz. Photo source: https://www.dailymotion.com.

Inside the Crystal Room Once he passed through the door of light, Lael found himself in a room measuring 8 square feet, with the walls made of pure crystal, “as clear as glass,” according to the gentleman’s testimony to the ufologists. Spotting a blurry image on the crystal walls, Lael put his face right up to the glassy surface, whence he was able to see in great clarity the whole Brown Mountain area for “miles and miles.”

Suddenly, a loud voice rang out in the small room: “Do not fear. There is no danger here!”

The voice continued to explain to Lael the history of an alien race called the Pewam, from which some of Earth’s diverse peoples can claim as their ancient ancestors. The Pewam, it seems, inhabited a planet in our solar system that once was fixed in an orbit equidistant between the orbits of Mars and Jupiter.

Unfortunately, the Pewam were scattered over various nation states, with two 132

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

superpowers among these that deployed nuclear weapons against each other, sadly resulting in the total destruction of their world. Hence, our solar system now has a vast asteroid belt circling the Sun on the orbital path where the Pewam’s planet once was positioned.

The voice explained to Lael that he was telling him all of this so that he could relay this information about the Pewam and their exploded planet to the peoples of our world in order to help prevent this same type of nuclear destruction taking place on Earth. The voice also stated that he was a Venusian, and that many of the Venusians, like some of the people of Earth, could claim Pewam ancestry: “About two million years ago, there were small contingents of the Pewam living on Earth and Venus when their world, which was known as Maldek, blew up into smithereens,” the disembodied voice from Venus declared, adding that, “The Pewam at the time took note that the highest form of life on Earth seemed to be some proto-humans living in small grass huts along a river in the Olduvai Gorge on the eastern side of your African continent.”

Venus in a Higher Dimension

Lael did not know what to make of the invisible entity behind the voice. The entity could sense that this contactee was getting nervous. Lael was thinking that he was trapped inside some kind of cage with only a ghost for company. That’s when the entity calmly said, “We are not bound to the surface of your world “Rock on” at Brown Mountain with or ours. We do not eat or drink, either, but live Ralph Lael, contactee, in his Outer Space Rock Shop and Museum in on a gas called ‘pethine,’ which we absorb from Morganton, North Carolina. Photo through the bright aura you see around us. We taken by Georgia ufologist Allen H. Greenfield. could perish, however, in Earth’s less diffused atmosphere, if we stayed here too long in an un-transmogrified state. We were once as you are now, physical beings, that is, but eons ago transferred to a higher dimensional plane of existence.”

“You see,” the entity continued, “We live on Venus, which in a much higher dimension is a planet of pure crystal, as you see surrounding you in this room.

Notice that the crystal is as clear as your air. Venus is completely surrounded by water vapor about 150 miles above its surface. The pethine is trapped in the droplets of water vapor and is released and absorbed into our auric shells when we pass through the denser atmosphere of Venus.”

133

The Real Resident Aliens

Return to Brown Mountain No sooner had the entity finished explaining about the Pewam connections to Earth and Venus, than the mysterious being told Lael that, “Now that you know about us, please come again to see us at this same location in one year’s time. Good bye for now, friend.” At that, Lael suddenly found himself standing right outside the base of the mountain, staring at sold rock with no light door in sight.

Exactly one year later, in October 1962, Lael returned to the same place at the base of the mountain. After the light door opened, Lael was bid welcome by the disembodied voice of the entity and even offered a ride to Venus onboard a flying saucer parked in a vast hangar deeper inside Brown Mountain. He gladly accepted, and then the entity lit up like a firefly from head to toe, revealing the presence of “one rather attractive woman named Noma, who was quite beautifully dressed in a bra and panties set,” assessed the boggle-eyed Lael of the Venusian beauty.

Noma said that she was a direct descendant of the Pewam and a queen among her peoples’ colony on Venus. When Lael saw the parked saucer, he inquired of Noma, “Couldn’t we just walk through the light door and get to Venus a lot faster?

Noma replied, “I could, but you could not. You have not yet developed as a species who spirituality is advanced enough that you could accomplish this feat. Many of the great avatars sent among you, like Jesus or Paramahansa Yogananda, could easily do it. But you still have a lot of celestial evolution to go, collectively as a species, before more of you could successfully make such a trans-dimensional jump.”

Following Noma and Lael’s boarding of the flying saucer, they rendezvoused with a mothership about an hour and half later, and then they were on their way to Venus, arriving in just two days’ time. While on Venus, the contactee was shown some three-dimensional newsreels in a Temple of History about life on the Pewams’ former home of Maldek and also some newsreels of Earth, taken

by Venusian drones, or what ufologists then called “registered disks,” or what we now erroneously refer to as “tic-tacs.”

The newsreels of Earth showed Russians banging their shoes and shouting at the “imperialist Yankees” during an assembly of the United Nations and various military ships and planes massing off the coasts of Cuba. Lael thought the world was coming to an end and that the Venusians, for some reason unbeknownst to him, wanted to save him from the destruction resulting from World War III. Maybe there would be a few survivors and they, like him, could start over on 134

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

this paradise world. All I can say about that, is “Thank you, President John F. Kennedy, for saving the world!”

“We’ll nuke those commie bastards, Mr. President!” On 6 October 1961, after attending a ballistic missile launch test and hearing military brass assess the Soviet threat, President John F. Kennedy rather pessimistically stated that, “Americans ought to start building nuclear bomb shelters!” Photo source: Politico

Ufologists’ Appraisal Noma then explained that the Pewams were just one of many tribes from all over the Milky Way Galaxy settled on Venus; and that the original inhabitants of that cloudy world were a form of super-sentient honey bee, each one some five to eight feet in length.

Timothy Green Beckley felt the story was “unbelievable;” but he felt the same way about the Brown Mountain lights. Lael told Beckley and the other two ufologists that, “There are many things that I have seen and heard that I cannot reveal here because of my obligations to the Pewam people that I made during my several encounters. Whether you believe or disbelieve what I have told you is of no importance. But I admonish you and others now, those who have read these things, that you should have fervent love for the peoples of Earth and those inhabitants of the whole Universe!”

Damn good advice, I would say! After all, can we really count on a president of the high caliber of John F. Kennedy coming along in our generation to pull our feet from the fire….?

135

The Venus Gospel: An Account of George Adamski’s 1963 Visit to Denmark and Belgium, Part I

From Keller Venus Files: Adamski arrives at the Copenhagen Airport in Denmark on 29 April 1963, bringing a message of love from our brothers and sisters of Venus and other worlds in the Galactic Confederation.

Scandinavian UFO Information (SUFOI) Invitation The Scandinavian UFO Information (SUFOI) was established as a public interest group in the city of Sunds, situated on the mainland area of Denmark, called Jylland in Danish or Jutland in English, on 17 December 1957 by the late Danish Air Force Major Hans C. Petersen for the express purpose of “promoting information and carrying out research about unidentified flying objects.”

136

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

SUFOI’s structure was organized along three departments: Research, Reports Collection, and Information Dissemination. SUFOI still exists today and publishes the quarterly UFO-Nyt as well as UFO-Vision, a yearbook of UFO literature, both of these in the Danish language. Occasionally, SUFOI comes out with a special Newsletter in English. Their current address is P.O. Box 6, DK 2820 Gentofte, Denmark. Their website is http://www.cufo.dk.

In 1963, Petersen was still serving as SUFOI director. While his organization clearly maintained an objective policy regarding the extraterrestrial hypothesis (ETH) with respect to the origin of some of the UFOs in our skies, the majority of the membership was not yet willing to go along with a full-endorsement that even a few of the UFO reports could decisively be attributed to the arrival of advanced extraterrestrial beings piloting flying saucers, which could be interpreted to mean interplanetary spaceships. However, the SUFOI members would never flinch at allowing advocates of the ETH, to include the contactees, from speaking at SUFOI meetings and conferences.

Of all the contactees on the worldwide ufology scene in 1963, Petersen was fully convinced that George Adamski from Southern California, the author of three books about his encounters with Venusians and other extraterrestrials, would prove to be an outstanding speaker at the next SUFOI conference. As the director of the group, his recommendation for the keynote speaker would certainly carry the most weight.

Based on his readings of Adamski’s books, along with his own research into the UFO phenomenon, Petersen came to the following conclusions: 1. People from other worlds in our (solar) system are visiting our planet.

2. People from other worlds are in contact with certain political and scientific circles in East and West.

3. People from all walks of life, official and unofficial, all over the world, have been contacted by people from other worlds; such contacts have been kept secret so far.

4. The philosophy brought to the world by Mr. George Adamski is considered an aid helping to uncover the truth of our origin and our future destiny.

Clearly, this information seems to have been a bit too much for the majority of conference planners to accept all at once, lock, stock and barrel. Nevertheless, and despite Petersen’s attempts to convince them to accept the Venus Gospel according to Adamski as their guiding philosophy, at least an invitation to Adamski was formulated in order that the members might make up their minds on an individual basis with respect to the California contactee’s claims.

137

The Real Resident Aliens

Brief Biography of George Adamski George Adamski was born in Poland on 17 April 1891. When he was but one-and-a-half years old, his parents immigrated to the United States, meeting up with relatives already established in Dunkirk, New York, and settling in there.

His parents were deeply Roman Catholic and great lovers of nature, instilling in their son a quest for spiritual knowledge and a closeness to the natural environment.

The young Adamski attended public elementary school and after the eighth grade continued with private lessons tailored to his interests and paid for by his loving parents. He served time as a soldier in the 13th Cavalry, garrisoned on the Mexican border and was honorably discharged in 1919. On 25 December 1917, he married Mary A. Shubersky, who remained with him until her death in 1954.

At the age of 39 George and Mary Adamski moved out to Laguna Beach, California, where he set up shop as a teacher of Eastern Philosophy. Although George did not have a formal degree from any institution of higher learning, his students called him “Professor” because he was so proficient in most of the mystic arts, thereby instructing his followers in various methods they could employ in developing the sundry extrasensory powers latent within them. Word of his vast knowledge and cordial personality spread far and wide throughout the Southern California listening area, and soon he was delivering metaphysical lectures over radio stations KMPC in Los Angeles and KFOX in Long Beach.

Adamski had a vision of establishing a community based on universal laws.

With some of his pupils from Laguna Beach, he and Mary moved out with the best of these students to form a colony at the base of Mount Palomar, where the then largest telescope in the world was located, being a 200-inch reflector.

As Adamski was well informed on the Theosophical teachings of the gurus and masters of the Far East, he came to recognize that some of them were in telepathic contact with advanced beings from other planets.

The great Hindu metaphysician, Paramahansa Yogananda, always a constant inspiration for Adamski, after being inspired to move from India to the United States, had established his Self-Realization Fellowship in Los Angeles in 1917.

Yogananda preached in his Bhagavad Gita commentaries that he knew for a fact that there was life on other planets. According to Joseph Selbie, a prominent disciple of Yogananda, the most enlightened guru revealed that, “Souls continue to reincarnate on Earth until they achieve liberation; and they also incarnate on other planets.” Selbie also noted that Yogananda would frequently point out that extraterrestrials can found in many different planetary environments and even other dimensions of time and space and that not all maintain a recognizably 138

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

human-like appearance. Some beings are composed of pure light and refined energy such that they remain invisible to those without spiritual discernment on the material plane. See Joseph Selbie, Ananda website, “Life on Other Planets,” 20 December 2011, https://www.ananda.org/ask/life-on-other-planets-2/ (Accessed 8 December 2022).

During the great meteor storm of 1946, Adamski and his students at Palomar observed a large cigar-shaped object that remained motionless for some time above a mountain ridge to the east of the telescope complex. It was at this time that Adamski’s interest in unidentified flying objects was aroused. From then on until 20 November 1952, when he and a party of six others had physical contact with a flying saucer and its occupant, Adamski was taking photographs of the mysterious objects and coming to the conclusion that these were interplanetary space ships.

Details of his initial contact are found in his first non-fiction bestselling book, co-authored with the British nobleman Sir Desmond Leslie, Flying Saucers Have Landed (New York: British Book Centre, 1953). Accounts of his subsequent encounters with friendly Venusians and other extraterrestrials are found in his second and third UFO books, Inside the Space Ships (New York: AbelardSchuman, 1955) and Flying Saucers Farewell (New York: Abelard—Schuman, 1961). In these volumes, the California contactee describes his journeys to Venus and Saturn as well as a fly-by of the back side of the Moon, where he saw vast domed colonies tucked inside the ridges of craters in addition to vast spaceports.

Adamski’s Arrival in Denmark Petersen was pleased that Adamski accepted the invitation. The contactee arrived at the Copenhagen airport on 29 April 1963 and stayed in Denmark until 15 May 1963. SUFOI paid all of Adamski’s expenses and Petersen met him at the airport with both a SUFOI and Danish media contingent. Petersen wrote about Adamski’s Denmark visit in his book, Report from Europe (Sunds, Denmark: SUFOI, 1964), 179, in glowing terms: “George Adamski had a tremendous success in Denmark. He did not meet one negative person, although he saw and talked to thousands throughout his stay. He was given five minutes on the Danish state-controlled television. They met him at the airport like they meet any official coming to the country, and he was also taken to an interview in the television house (broadcast station).

“He spoke to 700 people at the SUFOI Congress and he met people every day while here.”

139

The Real Resident Aliens

Adamski’s Keynote Speech at SUFOI Congress in Denmark, 5 May 1963 After Adamski was settled in at his hotel in Copenhagen, he presented the keynote address at the SUFOI Congress in the public auditorium in the nearby municipality of Fredericia on 5 May 1963. Major Petersen, who was fluent in English, having spent some time with joint North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO)-Denmark operations at the Wright-Patterson Air Force Base in Dayton, Ohio, rendered a Danish translation of Adamski’s speech which took the form of a summary at convenient intervals other than of a direct translation. Time factors would not allow for a more detailed approach to the task, unfortunately.

His speech follows below: Section I I first want to thank you all for the fine courtesy you have shown me here in Denmark.

All you good people here, I am not here to convince you nor do I want you to accept what I have to say. But all I want you to do is to listen to what I have to say and you can make up your own minds.

We all know the circumstances of the world, and that we are going through a period of transition which is actually a new way of life. Every one of us will want the new way of life if we can have it, for it will be better than the present.

And as you well know, I was not the first man to be contacted by people from other worlds. Yet I was the first man to be publicized as having such a meeting.

(Cosmic Ray’s commentary: Adamski’s “coming out,” so to speak, about his contacts with the Venusians and other extraterrestrials, no doubt generated a lot of antagonism against him in the emerging “scientific” UFO community.

To some extent, the ridicule hurled at Adamski carried over into the subject of flying saucers, generally. The newspapers of the mid-1950s through the mid1960s tended to portray Adamski and the contactees that followed in his train as members of the so-called “lunatic fringe.” Nevertheless, most ufologists will admit that Adamski played a vital role in bringing the subject of flying saucers as interplanetary space ships to the public’s attention, capturing, as it were, the imagination of people from across the globe and inspiring in them a lifelong interest in exploring the UFO enigma and all the possibilities inherent in it.)

140

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

Section I continues: I did not desire publicity; but when the contact was made and there were six other people there, the news was soon out. Four of them, including George Williamson, were from Arizona; and when they returned, they took the story to the newspaper. The paper tried to contact me, but I had no telephone so they went ahead with the story. And it was written differently than I would have told them.

Of course, from there on I was on the spot and there was no way for me to back out. I am not a brave man; and I failed to consider the criticism that lay ahead from the critics and the people of the world. It may be that had things taken place in a different way than they did, I would have withheld the information; but maybe not, for I had this to do.

Now you all know how I happened to get into the picture; therefore, we will go from there on….

141

The Venus Gospel: An Account of George Adamski’s 1963 Visit to Denmark and Belgium, Part II

From Keller Venus Files: UFO enthusiasts from all over Scandinavia show up to hear Southern California contactee and guru on all things Venus, George Adamski, address Scandinavian UFO Information (SUFOI) group assembled in Copenhagen, Denmark, on 5 May 1963.

Following Adamski’s initial comments at the 5 May 1963 Scandinavian UFO Information (SUFOI) group’s conference in Denmark, both pro and con, on the impact of media publicity with regard to his ministry of enlightening the masses as to reasons for the extraterrestrial presence on Earth, the California contactee continued with his keynote speech:

142

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

Section II I know that I would do the same thing that many people around the world have done- question the contact in more than one way. It was something strange, something new, something different, something unexpected that was happening on that day, the 20th of November 1952.

But I am glad that I am privileged to bring what knowledge I gathered through these contacts. For now, I see where it is going to help us and provides the knowledge needed for us to put it into use. When I say “use,” I don’t mean by any one small group but by the world of people. All have the right to know the truth and it is not a religious program, but purely scientific- a changing time that is taking us into a finer future.

We still do not know what the future may be; but it looks bright. And when I say “bright,” I am excluding the atomic bomb and the possibility of an excited person pressing the wrong button that would deny civilization the privilege of enjoying the future. And when I say “the future,” I mean when an individual will exercise patience, for the human mind cannot be changed overnight.

(Cosmic Ray’s commentary: At this point in the address, Adamski discusses his reasons for continuing the mighty task of presenting the Venusians and other extraterrestrials’ message to the people of Earth. He doesn’t claim any exclusivity to this message as it was not meant to be given to any one secular or religious group. Rather, it was given to Adamski to pass on to all humankind for the purpose of creating a brighter future for every one of this now beleaguered planet’s inhabitants.)

Inhabitants of Other Worlds Adamski now continues in Section II, discussing the characteristics of our other planetary neighbors and their space ships that we refer to as the “flying saucers”: You have heard stories of the men and women who came from out of space being vegetable men and all types of forms that the imagination of man could produce. But the truth is that any one of you sitting here could be one of the space people, for they are just like us. The range in heights from four feet to seven feet and have the same measurements as the humans in our world.

One thing that did happen when they me here was that the impossible became possible.

When I say possible, I have reference to humankind’s ability to fly. For have not men and women, as far back as we can remember, wished that they could fly 143

The Real Resident Aliens

above the Earth and journey to the stars? But finally, the human being decided that it was impossible. But when this human being observed what we now call the flying saucers and saw these instruments operating contrary to all accumulated knowledge of humankind, the human being wondered where they came from.

These objects were able to go backward as fast as they did forward; and they did turns and all kinds of maneuvers that we, at one time, thought human beings could not endure.

It made no difference if a human being classified them as ten-headed creatures or vegetables or even humanoids with five legs; their maneuvers in the sky challenged our intelligence. And as a result, our intelligence was not going to be outdone; therefore, we began to think in the same terms. For whatever or whomever operated these objects, they were intelligently controlled. Thus, on 29 July 1958, the American government formulated a bill which was signed by President Eisenhower that started our space program.

(Cosmic Ray’s commentary: Apparently, the extraterrestrials provided an impetus for the American political leadership to initiate a program of space exploration by sundry examples of their advanced technology as evidenced in the numerous flying saucer reports being made around the world by the citizens of all nations.

In my second book in the Venus Rising series, Final Countdown: Rockets to Venus (Terra Alta, West Virginia: Headline Books, 2017), I revealed how many of the German scientists brought over to the United States following the defeat of the Nazis in World War II, under the auspices of the United States intelligence operation known as Project Paperclip, were firm believers in the notion that beings from other more technologically advanced planets have been visiting our world for centuries and guiding certain humans in the advancement of knowledge concerning astrophysics and the creation of vehicles to get us to these other older and highly developed civilizations that we would surely find out there. For instance, when the German rocketeer Dr. Wernher von Braun served as director of the Marshall Space Flight Center in Huntsville, Alabama, and placed in charge of the National Aeronautics and Space Administration’s (NASA) lunar exploration program, he made the following comment with respect to the extraterrestrial question: “We were helped by people from other worlds.”)

144

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

Section II Here George Adamski opines concerning the emerging United States space program: All of us know that some success has been made by America and Russia in sending men into space to orbit the Earth, which a few years back was thought impossible.

In not too many years, it could happen any time. We will send astronauts to Venus and other planets. Until that time, the chances are very good that the confusion and questioning and skepticism will remain with us.

When John Glenn orbited the Earth, he was talking back and forth from his capsule to the tracking stations; and this was televised throughout the world. There was no question in the minds of men and women whether he made the trip or not, for they knew that he did. And when we send one astronaut or more to Venus or Mars and it is televised, the whole world will know it. And a contact will be made on another planet by our own astronauts. And it could be possible that the people of that planet may question the ones from our planet.

Venus Will Be First Planet Visited by Earth Astronauts Take note how Adamski remarked that we would “send astronauts to Venus and other planets.” Even a few years ago, most space scientists were scoffing at the idea of sending the first explorers of another planet to Venus. They wrongly assumed it would be Mars. Now, however, the tune has changed decidedly in favor of Lady Venus.

On 26 September 2022, the prestigious The Independent newspaper, headquartered in London, United Kingdom, published an article titled, “Astronauts should visit Venus before going to Mars, experts suggest.” Written by The Independent’s chief space correspondent Adam Smith, the news piece points out that recent findings made in the global astronomical community provide strong reasons for suspecting the presence of “microbial extraterrestrial life” in the Venusian atmosphere. Logically, the presence of a microbial ecosystem in the clouds of Venus lends hope that more complex organisms may also be discovered elsewhere on the planet’s surface or even underground. Astronomers, exobiologists and other space experts from all space-faring nations agree on the point that, “Venus is a better target for a crewed mission to another planet than Mars.”

145

The Real Resident Aliens

George Adamski predicted that the first explorers of another planet would visit Venus first. That he was right is evidenced by the following quote: “The discovery of a possible sign of life on Venus highlights our ignorance of what is going on within its swirling clouds and on its (allegedly) ‘furnace-like’ surface.

It’s time to go there and find some answers.”

-Peter Gao, space correspondent for New Scientist magazine, in article, “It’s time for us to revisit Venus to uncover its many mysteries,” (18 September 2020) London, United Kingdom. Drawing source: New Scientist magazine.

146

The Venus Gospel: An Account of George Adamski’s 1963 Visit to Denmark and Belgium, Part III The Southern California contactee, George Adamski, having had ten years of experience answering questions on the flying saucer lecture circuit since the publication of his first non-fiction UFO book, Flying Saucers Have Landed, well anticipated the oft-asked inquiry made to him at the 5 May 1963 conference of the Scandinavian UFO Information (SUFOI) group in Denmark, that being: “Why didn’t the space people contact high officials right away instead of a fellow like you or someone else?”

“Take Me to Your Leader!”

To this valid question, Adamski replied, “The chances are just as good that we will not contact high officials when we land on some other planet in the beginning. It is usually customary to send someone to test a condition, whether pertaining to space travel or daily affairs, before the ‘big ones’ are contacted. And I happened to have been the one picked.”

Section III Major Governments Contacted Many leading lights in the American ufology community have maintained all along that some extraterrestrials have contacted key figures in positions of power in all major governments of the world, especially the ones with spacefaring capabilities. Adamski himself confirmed this, and revealed the following in his special introductory SUFOI address:

147

The Real Resident Aliens

“But since then,” Adamski affirmed, “all major governments have been contacted directly, and even some of the minor ones. There was a number of ways in which the contacts were made. In the Korean war, there was one that caused the government (of the United States) concern; for a number of space craft appeared.

“On one occasion, the United States Navy, as published in the newspaper, said that a destroyer was standing by saw ‘two missiles,’ as they called them, come out of the blue and hit the water with a terrific impact that buckled the plates on the destroyer. And that three months later it had to come into San Diego for repairs. When the ‘missiles’ went into the water, the big ships in the vicinity immediately circled and started (launching) depth charges, hoping to get them. While they did this, the missiles were caught going out on the radar.

“So, you can see that the government could not help but be concerned, and began to look into it a little better to see what was happening. Thus, fine contacts have been made by these people (extraterrestrials) with major governments.”

Reasons for Nondisclosure George Adamski also foresaw the next question: “Why don’t the governments come out and tell us the truth that they have?” The contactee, however, sensibly and shrewdly surmised the state of affairs the extraterrestrials would be in should they follow through on that course of action.

The UFO prophet believed that propaganda would play a major role in this scenario, to which he explained: “Propaganda is spread every day on the air in one way or another. If the American government was to come out with the truth that it has, the Iron Curtain would say ‘propaganda;’ and if the Iron Curtain came out telling us what they know, the American government and all the satellites would say the same, ‘propaganda,’ and the people at large would be more confused than they are today and not know what to believe. So, the time is not yet at hand to tell the world just what is happening and there is only one answer. And that is to put a man into space, let him land on another planet, and keep broadcasting while he is going there and back again. It is the only answer to solve this problem between the powers that be who do not believe one another.”

(Cosmic Ray’s commentary: The reader notes that Adamski made the stipulation that during the space mission to another orb in space, that the United States’ National Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA) or whatever nation and their respective space agency would be behind that particular launch, 148

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

would “keep broadcasting while he (the astronaut) is going there and back again.”

With regard to the crewed lunar Apollo missions that took place between 1969 through 1972, where American astronauts actually walked on the lunar surface, one must keep in mind that the astronauts that landed there only covered a few miles by walking or while riding around in their Moon buggies. Since there are slightly over 14 million square miles on the Moon’s surface, one could hardly see these brief excursions onto the surface as anything so conclusive that they provided proof that there were no alien beings to be found anywhere or even below the surface of that mysterious sphere. Even the orbiting lunar command modules in each of the Apollo missions, taken collectively, only photographed twenty percent of the Moon’s surface in any detail, and even at that, were NASA authorities allowed by the intelligence services in the United States to show us all of the photos taken or without being doctored in some way? It should also be taken into account that the Apollo landing sites were all relatively close to the Moon’s equator and only on the side of the Moon which always faces us; and all of these lunar regions had been predetermined to be desolate by NASA specialists and their photographic analysis of prior images obtained through the unmanned lunar orbiters.

In addition, the transmissions coming from the Apollo astronauts contained many code words to disguise their explanations for the UFO activity that they observed off in the distance, with aliens apparently monitoring their historic activities. There was also a time lag in the radio and television signals coming from the Apollo spacecraft to Houston Control; so, there was plenty of time to filter them. For a detailed report of what is really going on up there on the Moon and below its surface, please see “Chapter 9: The Moon is a Venusian Colony,” of my fourth book in the Venus Rising series, The Vast Venus Conspiracy (Terra Alta, West Virginia: Headline Books, 2021), pages 129-139.

Insofar as TOP SECRET compartmentalized information about the Moon, known to be true, only by the highest executive and military authorities of the United States government, and explored in my fourth Venus book, I can positively state that: 1. The Moon at its lowest elevations, has a substantial atmosphere of some six pounds per square inch.

2. The Moon has a much higher gravity than has been previously theorized, being about 50 percent that of Earth’s.

3. The Moon has water and vegetation.

4. There are substantial variations in the lunar environment between the side always facing us and its backside.

149

The Real Resident Aliens

5. The Moon is occupied by extraterrestrials, primarily Venusians. There are some artificial structures and bases on the front side, largely camouflaged, but more natural bases on the far side. Most of these have been photographed and cataloged by American, Chinese and Russian space experts.

For additional information on the subject of advanced extraterrestrial life in our solar system, this author also highly recommends fellow American Navy veteran, and nuclear specialist Daniel K. Ross’ UFOs and the Complete Evidence from Space: The Truth About Venus, Mars and the Moon (Walnut Creek, California: Pintado Press, 1987).

150

The Venus Gospel: An Account of George Adamski’s 1963 Visit to Denmark and Belgium, Part IV Adamski on Religion in the Age of Flying Saucers The Southern California contactee, George Adamski, during his keynote speech to the Scandinavian UFO Information (SUFOI) assembled in Denmark on 5 May 1963, lamented that since the dawn of the Age of Flying Saucers, “opportunists have made a new religion out of these important events (UFO sightings and encounters) with instructions given by supposed space people and spirits.” His reasons for this critique follow below in Section IV: Section IV Adamski was emphatic that, “The space people are no more spooks and spirits than we are here. They have been made so by mysticism and that has hurt the program far more than even the other type of propaganda (government disinformation). Their program is purely scientific and has nothing to do with any religion. You do not have to change your belief to learn about the program any more than you have to change when you go to a university to study for an engineering degree.

“The program and the things that are happening in the sky belong to the population of the world, which is three billion people (in 1963, a little over eight billion today in 2023). They all must be informed if the true benefits are to be enjoyed.”

Importance of Philosophy to Science and Religion Many of Adamski followers wondered why he spoke so often of the space people’s philosophy, in contrast to their science or religion. “You might ask why I have put so much of their philosophy in my book,” the contactee declared, 151

The Real Resident Aliens

further elaborating, “Well, philosophy is more scientific than anything else, as science is founded on philosophy, and so are religions. So, one cannot talk about hardly anything without implicating philosophy; and that is why it was included in the books. And the philosophy in Inside the Space Ships (1955) was not given for anyone to accept against their will. But I have been asked, ‘What kind of life do thy lead?’ and ‘Do they believe in God?’ And the answers were put into the book. But that does not mean that we have to accept their way of life, unless we want to. If we think it is better, we, without any fear, can change if we want to; but I did not suggest in the book any religion that we have, or any other.”

Some Catholic Hierarchy Receptive Adamski was raised in the Roman Catholic tradition, although his Uncle Sydney in Dunkirk, New York, early on in the young George Adamski’s life, beginning at the age of three, exposed him to the teachings of Helena Blavatsky and the leading lights of the Theosophical Society. As a baptized Roman Catholic, however, Adamski took the opportunity to visit the Vatican when he lectured in Rome during his first European excursion four years earlier, in 1959.

Of his meeting with the Catholic hierarchy and their reception the space people’s cosmic philosophy, the contactee, noted: “The program is not religious at all, yet when I lectured in Rome in 1959, those who really understood the problem, like the forty cardinals (ecclesiastical leaders), accepted it on scientific grounds.

For they knew that humankind must progress and new things must come up, even in religious talks. Humankind must be progressive and we are progressing towards a wonderful goal if we will survive the present uncertainty.”

Who’s blessing who? George Adamski maintained that the cardinals at the Vatican accepted the Venusians’ cosmic philosophy on “scientific grounds,” after he thoroughly explained it to them back in 1959. Photo credit: Daily Beast, 12 July 2017 152

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

(Cosmic Ray’s Commentary: There is little doubt that the Bible and other sacred texts are replete with passages that attest to the presence of unusual visitors to the Earth, coming from the Celestial Realms, in times past. These sacred accounts describe contacts between human beings and supposedly supernatural entities such as “angels,” “devils,” “ghosts,” “gods,” etc. For the most part, these entities conform to an anthropomorphic body type, in their outward appearance, at least. Given the extraordinary powers attributed to these beings from beyond Earth, it is not unreasonable to assume that some of these may, in fact, exist in a semi-material state. This is evidenced by their alleged materializations and dematerializations and the working of miracles.

In the majority of cases, these entities present themselves as peaceful messengers in service to humankind. With the exception of the demons or devils, these entities have generally followed the verse of Hebrews 13:2 in the King James Version of the Bible: “Be not forgetful to entertain strangers: for thereby some have entertained angels unawares.” In other words, angels are working on our behalf from behind the scenes, revealing themselves only when necessary. In this context, one could speculate that the terms “angels” and “aliens” are synonymous. And with this acceptance, comes a knowledge and an understanding, or “gnosis,” that a true cosmic philosophy would concede a true spiritual component to the extraterrestrial hypothesis, i.e., the existence of intelligent life beyond the Earth that has been interacting with humankind since at least the beginning of our recorded history, if not since the very beginnings of life on this planet.

When taking into account the spiritual component in the Age of Flying Saucers, it becomes clear that the seeker of enlightenment in matters pertaining to this phenomenon, need not look to any specific religion or to give up their own religious belief system. The student of cosmic philosophy can readily see the interventionist hands of the extraterrestrials in the formation of many religious systems that have helped to spur the evolutionary thought processes taking place in humankind down through the ages. According to Dr. Marco Aurelio de Seixas, M.D., a Brazilian researcher into the extraterrestrial influence on the development of religions, “Extra-planetary people have always been in contact with humans. This assertion is easily extracted from the argument that an abstract force, like a celestial being who descended to Earth to teach humanity, requires a philosophical reasoning unlikely to exist in an uneducated community of thousands of years ago and probably in many people today.”

(Hence, the need for contactees like Adamski to enlighten us and spread the gospel of our space brothers and sisters.)

153

The Real Resident Aliens

Dr. Aurelio de Seixas continued, “To accept as true the universality of the evolutionary principle and the law of progress, it is much easier to accept the idea that other communities may have already reached a stage of unimaginable technological development that allows them to make long trips through the cosmos.”11 As to the opportunists, or UFO cultists, there is little doubt that Adamski’s warnings have come true. The Heaven’s Gate group, led by the mysterious “UFO Two” a.k.a. Bonnie Nettles (1927-1985) and Marshall Applewhite (1931-1997), was the saddest and deadliest example of just such a cult. And then there was the unauthorized UFO Education Center, with chapters in California, Mexico and Wisconsin, headed up by one-time Adamski associate Charlotte Blob, that came under intense scrutiny and prosecution for cult activities in many venues.

Many of the members had to be abducted and deprogrammed. Should Adamski have lived a little longer, he surely would have opposed Blob’s efforts to organize this religious cult based on some of his more esoteric teachings. The reader is invited to see my chapter, “Beware of Flying Saucer Cults” in my seventh book in the Venus Rising series, Flying Saucers: From Venus They Come (Terra Alta, West Virginia: Headline Books, 2022), 138-144.

George Adamski warned that the time would come when opportunists and cultists would usurp the message of the friendly space brothers and sisters. Above: Bonnie Nettles (L) and Marshall Applewhite (R), a.k.a. the “UFO Two,” Heaven’s Gate cult leaders attempt to recruit Southern Californians into their deadly ranks. Photo credit: Los Angeles Times

11 154

Dr. Marco Aurelio de Seixas, M.D., “Ufology, Religion and Extraterrestrial Life,” UFO Matrix, Vol. 1, No. 5, 2011, United Kingdom.

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

It is important to keep in mind that Adamski never started a religion or even advocated for his own Roman Catholicism. He also never asserted any exclusivity to his message or philosophy, rather stating that it was for all of the Earth’s population. He also never derided any of the other contactees, and frequently shared the same platform with many of them on several occasions. There is no doubt, however, that there is a spiritual component to all of Adamski’s philosophy, and that of our space friends, as well, as espoused in all of his books. Being a true Theosophist, it seems that this Southern California contactee adhered strongly to Helena Blavatsky’s second object of the Theosophical Society’s program: “To encourage the comparative study of religion, philosophy, and science” among all of those that counted themselves his disciples.

As for myself, in book four of my Venus Rising series, The Vast Venus Conspiracy (Terra Alta, West Virginia: Headline Books, 2021), in “Chapter 1: On the Book of Abraham and the Plurality of Gods,” pages 11-20, I look at the impact of angelic extraterrestrials in the formation of the Latter-day Saints restoration movement (Community of Christ, Independence, Missouri) from my own religious background and unique perspective.

155

The Venus Gospel: An Account of George Adamski’s 1963 Visit to Denmark and Belgium, Part V Precarious Economic Situation In the world’s then most noted contactee, George Adamski’s concluding remarks to those flying saucer enthusiasts assembled at the 5 May 1963 conference of the Scandinavian UFO Information (SUFOI) group in Denmark, he emphasized the importance of heeding the messages of our brothers and sisters from Venus and the other planets of the Galactic Federation insofar as the peoples of Earth needed to keep their eyes focused on surviving the dangerous age of uncertainty in which they found themselves bogged down in, especially their precarious economic situation.

“The economy of the world today is shaking; and we all know it,” declared Adamski, further stating that, “In previous years, we could resort to wars to build it up through destruction and reconstruction; but in these days with the power that we have of annihilation there is no other way out and there is only one answer. When we start building spaceships, whether for research or going to other planets, this condition will be relieved. For all of the ships will have to be built on Earth, including the instruments and everything needed. Then the economy will be stabilized and learned individuals do not fight.”

Of course, in the United States, we, as American citizens, can be proud that our National Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA) was founded on July 28, 1958 for the express purpose of the peaceful exploration of outer space.

According to NASA spokesman Brian Dunbar, https://www.nasa.gov/specials/ value-of-nasa/, the American taxpayer receives an exceptional value in return for every half cent collected out of every tax dollar and allotted to their organization.

For example, one reads on the aforementioned-site that, “NASA funding helps small businesses research new ideas and develop innovative aeronautics, human 156

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

exploration, science, and space technology solutions. Our partnerships fuel growth in industries that will define the future, such as artificial intelligence and advanced manufacturing.” The visionary Adamski foresaw all of these marvelous benefits resulting from our continued space exploration.

Section V George Adamski pointed out: “That will be the first time in the history of this civilization that the economy will begin to stabilize and become firm towards space and satisfy humankind’s desire to travel to distant stars. And people will want to go further and continue exploring. Humans will keep on moving and every step they make will call for improvements on the spacecraft and instruments which will be made here. Humankind will have a secure economy and, in the research, will bring out many wonderful things. Even today (in 1963), we already have some of these that will eventually allow every person to live like a queen or king in a world of robot servers. This world is waiting for us to go forward towards that goal, a world that is just a little way off. There will be plenty of time then for everyone to develop themselves. This is really the plan.”

This is quite in line with what futurist Dr. Michael Salla predicted, that there is a veritable “Star Trek future” awaiting all of us as we collectively move beyond the confines of this planet.

Economic System of Abundance In an interview conducted by the Mount Shasta, California, Promise Revealed director, Robert Potter, with Moonbase Clarion Commander Aura Rhanes on 20 November 2019 at Cheat Lake, West Virginia, he asked her the following question: Q. 8.) I realize money as we think of it does not exist on Venus and that your society works as one mind in accordance with natural laws. What can you tell us about how we can achieve the abundance and prosperity enjoyed by the Venusian society here on the Earth?

Commander Rhanes replied: Again, it seems to me that a false belief is coming into play. Economic problems on Earth ARE largely due to false beliefs that are imposed by the leaders on this planet, and it’s in many fields that, “there is only so much that can go around.”

This means that your people must fight over the crumbs of the pie, let alone getting a full slice of the pie, which, of course, can only be enjoyed by the oligarchs.

157

The Real Resident Aliens

On Venus, we long ago determined that the solution of this problem is to bake more pies so that everyone can be satisfied.

Credits are based on what we can do to help our sisters and brothers meet their needs.

On Venus, we even have a Department of Happiness to oversee this process.

Continue in the Light of Venus.

This is Commander Aura Rhanes. Blessings to all in the ultimate Victory of the Light.

158

The Venus Gospel: An Account of George Adamski’s 1963 Visit to Denmark and Belgium, Part VI Professor George Adamski Answers Hundreds of Questions Throughout his time speaking in Denmark to the Scandinavian UFO Information group (SUFOI) assembled for their congress in the municipality of Fredericia outside of Copenhagen during the period of 5-15 May 1963, the Southern California professor of the mystic arts, George Adamski, fielded hundreds of questions about extraterrestrials and their From Keller Venus Files: Danish Air Force Major Hans C. Petersen (L) with spaceships that traverse our skies, the objects Professor George Adamski of Southern that we casually refer to as “flying saucers.”

California (R) at the Scandinavian UFO Information Congress (SUFOI) in Adamski claimed that he had flown into outer Fredericia, Denmark, 5 May 1963. space on eight separate occasions but had only visited the planets of Venus and Saturn, although he orbited the Moon several times to get a gravitational assist from Earth’s natural satellite before moving further out into our solar system; but he never touched down there.

The following represents a cross-section of some of the more pertinent questions asked to Adamski in Denmark and the astounding answers he provided: Brutality on Earth Q. Why is Earth, our planet, inhabited by human beings, some of whom display the most horrifying brutality? Indeed, in this case, is the word “brutality” too mild an expression?

159

The Real Resident Aliens

A. It is true that Earth is inhabited by mentally subdued individuals. However, we are not born with that brutality. We absorb it from the negative cultural influences that have surrounded us since birth. We learn it at the movies, on television, at school, in college, in the print media and our whole lives through.

Frankly, a change to the better will demand an alteration of the minds of this planet’s inhabitants, starting with you and I. If we start with ourselves, kindness may spread out like ripples in the water. It won’t be long after that that conditions worldwide will show a registered improvement.

Paradise Lost Q. Why did the Creator provide the people of Earth with Edenic planetary conditions, i.e., clean air and pure water, when the greater part of these are being misused in the most dreadful way?

A. All planets are abundantly provided with those resources which will allow the people living on them to enjoy a carefree existence. The universe is filled with countless inhabited worlds, and on some of these their respective inhabitants manage their natural wealth even more carelessly than we do. However, the more highly evolved civilizations, which predominate in outer space, utilize their resources better than we do, that is to say more efficiently. One day we, too, shall learn to utilize our planet’s resources in a more proper and effective way.

Latent Psychic Powers Q. Do the space people have a “third eye?” Are they able to see the human aura and the radiation emitted from everything in nature?

A. Three times yes! The so-called “third eye” is a sectarian expression for telepathy. The human aura is the magnetic radiation of a human being. Like everything else in nature, it emits its own radiation. All human beings are provided with these three faculties; but only a very few know the science of accessing them, and this because they do not know themselves.

Extraterrestrial Infiltration Q. Do you think that there are space people inside the Danish government?

A. Probably not in the Danish government, as they mostly work in connection with the governments of larger nations, like the United States or the Soviet Union. I would not totally rule it out, however, insofar as I am aware of their presence, in a few cases, in the governments of some smaller nations in Africa and Latin America. Most frequently, however, they bring their influence to bear in scientific work under the auspices or in connection with the respective 160

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

governments. Therefore, any extraterrestrial infiltration of Denmark is probably taking place in the civilian sector.

World Government Q. Mr. Adamski, are you of the opinion that the space people can or will further the establishment of a possible world government; or must such an objective necessarily wait for a sufficiently high development of humankind?

In other words, must the leaders of national governments realize for themselves the necessity of a world government and take the appropriate steps to have it established and duly recognized?

A. There is no doubt that national governments will take the initiative, but only if the people, through elected representatives, voice a genuine interest. We all know the saying, “The will of the people is the will of the country.” Anything short of this will result in an oppressive dictatorship where everyone suffers as they currently do in China, Cuba, the Soviet Union and all its satellite countries.

The space people will not deal with thugs in control of the world.

161

The Venus Gospel: An Account of George Adamski’s 1963 Visit to Denmark and Belgium, Part VII A Southern California Contactee Visits Belgium On Tuesday the 21st and Friday the 24th of May 1963, the famous Southern California contactee, George Adamski, gave lectures in Belgium at the great Antwerp Exposition Hall, built just five years earlier, and filled it to its capacity of 2,000 attendees during the first meeting. The second meeting saw the hall as only half filled, insomuch as the scheduled trip to Finland was cancelled on the day prior due to security concerns. Adamski and Hans Petersen, therefore, decided they could stay another day in Antwerp, but had little time to promote the meeting with formal announcements in the local newspapers.

Sandwiched between these dates, on Thursday, the 23rd of May, the contactee returned to Denmark where he addressed a smaller group of several hundred students, members of the Scandinavian UFO Information (SUFOI) group at Kolding, along with the directing adults and others interested in UFOs and the possibility of life in outer space. Thanks to the work of the director of the SUFOI in Denmark, then Captain Hans C. Petersen of the Danish Air Force, and others engaged in the zealous ground-laying work of that organization, in the week prior to Adamski’s arrival, the Belgium UFO Information (BUFOI) group was organized and launched. BUFOI personnel were responsible for receiving the well-known American contactee and making all of the arrangements for his speaking engagements for his two appearances in Belgium.

As was usually the case, Adamski presented a slide lecture of one hour to those in attendance at the meetings of the 21st and 24th, followed by a half hour of answering questions from the audience. For the student presentation on the 23rd, the contactee simply talked about his books and went over some of his slides;

162

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

but afterwards joined the attending students in a campus dining hall where he answered random questions to those seated at and gathering around his table.

Questions and Answers on 21 May 1963 The following questions and answers were taken at random from the BUFOI transcript of George Adamski’s 21 May 1963 lecture in Antwerp, Belgium: Production for Meeting Needs Q. Are the conditions of living the same on the other planets, as they are here?

A. Conditions of living, in general, yes. But the government, it’s a little different, you might say. They do not work for profit. The produce for need only. So, the conditions there are different that way. The social system has no divisions, like caste systems (poor or rich or black or white). It recognizes one human congregation of human beings, like a big family. Allow me to continue in this line.

In 1929 the whole United States stock market crashed. The whole world was affected. After that, (Franklin D.) Roosevelt was president. A lot of factories were standing idle, doing nothing. He (Roosevelt) opened them up for one purpose: production for use and not for profit. So, the industry got to running again. And perhaps, if the opposition would not have been so strident against the president, we could have had that system throughout the world by now. Production for use, not for profit, because it is the profit that is the element causing all of the trouble in this situation.

Many Others Have Met the Space People Q. How are you so well-acquainted with the programs of the government?

A. Since 1952, I have been in steady contact with the space people, meeting them and talking with them. When I say, “I am meeting those people,” understand that I am not the only one. There are others who have met them; and there are, for the most part, no governments to this day, small or big, that have not also met them in one way or another.

Cure for Cancer Q. When can we cure cancer on our planet?

A. I get letters every day from people, and some doctors, from different countries, asking, “Why don’t they (the extraterrestrials) give us something to cure cancer?” We actually have a machine that can cure cancer. If it were put into 163

The Real Resident Aliens

widespread usage, and made available to everybody, in five years’ time it could eliminate cancer and other diseases off the face of the world. Yet, the machine is not being used today because it is still under wraps, being labeled “experimental.”

It has actually passed that phase; but it has been kept off the market because you and I would then be able to go out and buy one, quite economically, and have it in the house so that all the family could be treated with it for almost nothing. It would cost you only $100 for the machine (back in 1963). It is not a big machine.

And while everyone would be all the healthier for using it, there would be a lot of doctors and other medical personnel out of work. Naturally, you can expect persons employed in the medical field to fight for their livelihoods by keeping this machine and other medical inventions secret and off the market for as long as possible.

(Cosmic Ray’s comments: Many in the audience persisted in asking George Adamski questions about this machine and the technology behind it. Basically, Adamski described the device as looking like a pair of gloves that dangle from an X-ray-like machine suspended over a patient’s bed. The doctor runs his special gloved hands over the patient’s body until one of them comes over the spot of the cancer or other anomalous disorder in the body. When the spot of bodily disfunction is located, a ray from the machine is focused on it. Adamski told the Belgians in attendance that day that, “If you understand the human boy, you would be able to see what is happening. The molecules that make up the human body are negative and positive, like shoe lacing. What happens here is that the ray separates the pairs (the laces), the positive from the negative. And when they are separated, there is a space; there is nothing there anymore because the solids there in the body have been suspended. Then they (the doctors) can get in there and replace the bone or other body part, or in some cases, relace the molecular structure altogether into a new configuration.” There is no pain, no blood or no cutting in the relacing process, although it takes more time to accomplish.

According to the contactee, in the relacing process, “The molecules get together and close up on their own, and no mark is showing. They (some doctors) have been experimenting with this since the early 1950s.”

Adamski also revealed during his Belgian tour that, “Every human being has his or her own frequency and the molecular structure of the human body can be adjusted with transmissions directed to their own frequency level.” The double-helix structure of the deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) molecules is truly representative of just what this Southern California contactee was talking about in Belgium in 1963. DNA’s double-helix structure wasn’t discovered until 1953 164

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

and work with it largely remained in the experimental stages through 1977, when Dr. Frederick Sanger introduced rapid DNA sequencing techniques, which ultimately led to the mapping of Huntington’s disease in 1983, the detection of DNA indicating susceptibility to breast and ovarian cancers in 1990 and the start of the Human Genome Project in the same year, the cloning of Dolly the sheep in 1996, etc., with more and more medical advances year after year.

While the contactee was leery of the specialists and big wigs in many industries and government positions of power holding back critical information and technology that could lead to fantastic leaps in the advancement of human evolution on this planet, with the slower than he expected innovations which have occurred over time in medicine, space research, transportation, etc., Adamski, nevertheless, proved himself to be a prophet of the coming New Age, abetted by the friendly Venusians and other extraterrestrials providing him such valuable insight into a much improved world of tomorrow for all of us.)

Telepathy Explained Q. Exactly how do you communicate with the space people?

A. In Norway, some years back, if you remember, it was published in all your papers, too, there were two sisters who were picking berries- that must have been in the fall of the year, when one of the big space craft came down.

A man talked to both of the sisters in a language they did not understand and even indicated to them that they could go out and rise in the ship, take a ride.

One was married, the other was not. They refused and were afraid. Of course, they kept this to themselves; but one of the sisters acted funny. So, her husband wondered why she acted that way. It (the encounter with the extraterrestrial) had been a shock to her and she could not forget it; so finally, he questioned her until she admitted what had happened; and that is the way the story leaked out.

Some reporters from Norway wrote to me and wanted to know if it was the same kind of contact as I had.

They have also contacted the Frenchman, Mendes France, and they spoke French with him. You have space people in Europe, that we have not in America, that can speak seven or more languages fluently. These people are so advanced as to construct interplanetary spaceships. With such vast intellects, it is easy for them to learn anything, including a multiplicity of Earth languages. Besides, they can also tune into our television and radio transmissions and learn that way very easily.

On top of that, they use the only identical language in the world, or in the cosmos, or even throughout eternity. It is the same language that the Creator 165

The Real Resident Aliens

uses with all of His creation. It’s a language that everybody understands; and they use that. The language that I am speaking about is the one that everybody is born with. You don’t learn that language. It’s given to you from birth. But you forget it because those around you impose the language that we now know upon you.

The language we talk about now has been named “premonition,” or “hunch,” more colloquially. In science we know it as “telepathy.” It is an impression language. You can take all the nationalities of this world, talking different languages, and tell them to ask God one thing, all at the same time, and every one of them will be answered, if God deems to answer them. Yet everyone will express that answer in his or her own language.

In an expressive language, where I ask you something, I give sound to it, after I have conceived the idea, which was an impression in the first place. You are accustomed to sound or words to convey the idea; but you understand the idea a ot better without my words. Artists are very good at transmitting ideas through their work and all great inventors use it. For instance, an artist my have received a beautiful image in her or his mind by impression. Then the artist starts putting that image down on a canvas; and if the quality of the impression that she or he had in their mind is not up to par with the image on the canvas, the artist is disappointed. The image on the painting can never truly match fine and delicate quality of the image in the mind’s eye of the artist, which was an impression. That is the language we have forgotten.

Yet the animal kingdom uses that language. You can walk up to a strange dog; and if you are going to hurt the dog, the dog already knows. And if he is on the defense, and if you are going to paddle him, he is going to wag his tail, trying to approach you and make friends. Even where a ship at sea is sinking, or going to sink, you will notice that the rats try to leave the ship before any of the human beings know anything about the danger they will soon be facing. And in thousands of such cases, you will see evidence of the language we have forgotten.

We have never cultivated it; but now even some national governments recognize it. In the United States and the Soviet Union, there are secret schools attempting to develop this psychic power in astronauts/cosmonauts and military personnel. More and more high officials in other governments are finally taking an interest in telepathy, realizing its strategic importance and potential.

Therefore, you see how the space people have this higher form of communication to deal with. In other words, they get your impressions of what you are going to say and convey their impressions to you. This is sometimes seen

166

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

as a type of mindreading. Many of you have probably experienced it yourself, at one level or another.

For example, you take a walk down a seemingly lonely road. You don’t see anyone on the road, thinking you are all alone. But all of a sudden, you get the feeling that somebody is either watching you from behind a tree or there is somebody following you- stalking you- and you look around again and discover that is actually the case. Now there is your psychic impression and you now know that it never fails you. It is always right. That is one language you can count on, if you only would learn how to use it.

The problem is that we depend on sound too much and too little on the feelings we get. All impressions are feelings, after all. This is when you become conscious of something that you were not aware of before. It’s born with us.

The space people use this kind of language almost all the time. That’s why they have practically no crime on their planets. Everyone can read minds, getting impressions of intent, and that is why everyone is always careful and circumspect in their behavior. When you have a society like that, you’ve got to guard your thoughts and act appropriately. You know that somebody is going to read you; and if you are up to something, planning to do wrong, then they’ll know all about it. You’ll quickly see the futility in pursuing criminal activity.

(Cosmic Ray’s comments: George Van Tassel (1910-1978) an aircraft mechanic from Ohio who moved to Southern California to run the airport at Landers Field, about 17 miles northeast of Yucca Valley, where he held Interplanetary Spacecraft Conventions annually from 1954-1977, was also a famous contactee who conducted telepathic communications sessions in his home carved out under the famous Giant Rock. The quartz in this rock was shown to possess piezoelectric properties which Van Tassel claimed served as a type of cosmic battery in augmenting mental telepathic signals to and from interplanetary spaceships, most notably from Venus that were drawn to the area.

Van Tassel asserted that the Venusians had a “tensor beam” which could transmit thoughts word-for-word directly between one brain and another, heard inside one’s head just as if they were listening to a radio signal through headphones.)

Fellow Ufologist Aimé Michel: UFOs as Preclude to Invasion Aimé Michel (1919-1992) was the foremost French “go-to guy” for information about UFOs in the 1950s and into the mid-1960s on the European continent. Having university degrees in philosophy and psychology, as well as a certificate as a radio station sound engineer, Michel applied his knowledge to 167

The Real Resident Aliens

write numerous books on the possibilities of life in outer space and the existence of some UFOs as being interplanetary spaceships, which can frequently be observed traveling along flight paths between certain population centers determined through the science of “orthoteny,” defined in the context of the plotting of UFO sightings by time sequence as clustered around particular grid lines. In other words, Michel was what we might refer to today as a “nuts and bolts” ufologist.

Most of the members of the Belgian group were familiar with Michel’s work; and while believing that some UFOs were extraterrestrial, were still doubtful about the more metaphysical contact experiences extolled to them by the likes of George Adamski and other contactees. Ergo, the followers of Michel in Europe were much of the same ilk as retired Marine Corps Major Donald E. Keyhoe’s adherents in the United States, declaring that while UFOs were real and coming from other planets, they were most likely unmanned, remote controlled probes sent to our world for the purpose of conducting a military reconnaissance, possibly in advance of an invasion.

And if there were any extraterrestrials manning some of these ships, they were probably few in number from another solar system, but were being deployed from bases established on the far side of the Moon, on Mars or Venus, or even under our seas and oceans, biding the time when reinforcements could arrive from their home world or worlds in sufficient numbers to initiate an attack.

For these reasons, the Belgians wanted to know what George Adamski thought of fellow ufologist Aimé Michel.

Q. What are your feelings about Aimé Michel?

A. As far as Michel is concerned, I am not against him, as even the Bible speaks of fallen angels and other evil beings existing outside of the Earth. After all, the universe is a big place.

It is filled with beings both good and bad, some more spiritually advanced and others more less evolved and subversively minded.

I talk from another angle; and we all have different experiences. Therefore, Michel can only speak from his research, investigations and experiences while I, on the other hand, talk From Keller Venus Files: George from my own.

Adamski in Belgium expressed a kinder view of the extraterrestrial presence on Earth.

168

The Venus Gospel: An Account of George Adamski’s 1963 Visit to Denmark and Belgium, Part VIII Dedication to the Youth The noted Southern California contactee, Professor George Adamski, had specifically asked the leadership of the Scandinavian UFO Information (SUFOI) group, to set aside Thursday, 23 May 1963, as a day dedicated to the youth of Denmark. It was important to Adamski that no section of any country’s population be afraid of the unknown, for the space people had revealed to him and other contactees that humankind’s destiny lies in the stars. Too many of the Earth’s masses remained ignorant of the teachings and program of the space people for the elevation of humankind’s consciousness preparatory for further contact with their emissaries now working behind the scenes in every nation on the planet to promote peace and understanding among us.

Adamski took note of the hysteria following Orson Welles’ Halloween 1938 broadcast about an invasion from Mars supposedly taking place in New Jersey.

Although it was announced at the beginning of the program that it as just a dramatization, many who did not hear the introduction thought that it was all for real, that the end of the world as we knew it was finally upon us. In order to avoid the panicked response from happening again with any announcement about the existence of UFOs as crewed interplanetary spaceships, Adamski cautioned the future ufologists assembled that they should take extra care in presenting information about alien beings and flying saucers, i.e., informing the masses by incremental degrees, as it were.

Importance of Space Research in Coming UFO Revelations In the initial stages of UFO revelations, Adamski urged the Belgian youth assembled to press for more of their own government’s involvement with 169

The Real Resident Aliens

space research, looking for signs of life on the Moon and other planets in our solar system and helping to engineer space vehicles which will take us to these other orbs in the years to come. Adamski expressed his belief that although the authorities in the United States and other countries in the North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) know where the UFOs come from, what they are and why they are here, they have chosen not to keep the public informed about them.

Professor Adamski talked about various space phenomena, including the so-called “fire-fly effect” exhibited by the UFOs sighted beyond the Earth’s atmosphere by the Friendship 7 astronaut John Glenn in his several orbits that he made of our planet in the Gemini capsule. Adamski asked the young people in attendance, “Has John Glenn seen fireflies in space?” All of the students answered in the affirmative.

From Keller Venus Files: George Adamski in center of back row, sporting thin necktie, with members of the Scandinavian UFO Information (SUFOI) Youth Study Group at Kolding, Denmark, on Thursday, 23 May 1963, along with senior leaders and teachers, Mr. and Mrs. Dybkær of Kolding.

Then the California metaphysics professor commented: “Just think about it.

Would Glenn have seen these fireflies if he had not been in space?” There was a negative reply to this question from all assembled.

And lastly, Adamski further questioned the students: “How has it been possible for me to describe them (the fireflies) seven years before Glenn and in the same way he has?” After a brief pause, he answered his rhetorical question thusly: “Well, in order to know about the fireflies, I must also have been in space.

170

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

Other things about outer space, too, that I had written in my 1955 book (Inside the Space Ships), have been confirmed by our satellites.”

Summary of Life on Venus For the younger audience, Adamski briefly went over some of the same answers that he provided to the Belgian adults on the previous day: Religion: The space people let themselves be guided by their “religion.” They worship the invisible, the Causal Principle or the Creator.

Politics: Political parties simply do not exist among the inhabitants of Venus or other planets in the Galactic Confederation. And if any of them found themselves in disagreement over policy matters, they worked together, setting aside their egos, in order to reach a consensus, finding common ways of thought directed toward achieving the very same end, that being the common good.

Ethnocentrism/Racism: Neither castes nor ethnic and racial discrimination exist on the other planets.

Telepathic Power: Every human being is born with telepathic power. All nature kingdoms (animal, vegetable, etc.) are able to make use of this means of communication which is life in the world of the forms; and life here is not dependent on the human being.

At first you will get an impression like presentiment, clear sightedness, etc.

It has many names. Finally, you will be mentally awake through the impressions which turn up. You will now find yourself in a condition where you are impressionable, a condition where you are mentally conscious, and where you will see the things round about you in their spiritual light. The impressions will be there before the spirit will be able to catch them. They are active and exist independent of the spirit; but they have no life without consciousness….

It is through telepathy that God communicates with the created. We are here to learn the different natural laws which have been given to us; and thus, we shall neither know about pain nor sorrow.

United States Space Exploration: I believe that it would behoove the Congress of the United States to authorize a 50% increase in funds allotted to researching conditions on the Moon and other planets and the building of spacecraft to eventually carry American astronauts to these far-off worlds. It is extremely important for the United States to establish bases on the Moon and other planets before some insane dictator in a communist country “presses the wrong button,” if you catch my drift.

171

The Real Resident Aliens

(Cosmic Ray’s comments: The implications in the contactee’s remarks about the American space program are two-fold: First, if life as we know it is obliterated from the surface of the Earth as the result of a nuclear war, there will at least remain remnants of a space-faring Western civilization to start anew in outer space colonies, under the protective guidance of the Venusians and other planetary members of the Galactic Confederation; and second, should humankind somehow manage to avert such an apocalypse, all of Earth will benefit all the more by advancing further along in our cosmic evolution as a peaceful, space-faring civilization, all the more worthy of being included as the next planetary member represented in the councils of the ruling galactic body.)

172

The Venus Gospel: An Account of George Adamski’s 1963 Visit to Denmark and Belgium, Part IX Aftermath of the Cuban Missile Crisis Having returned to Antwerp, Belgium, 24 May 1963 was Professor George Adamski’s last official day of lecturing on that year’s European tour. When the North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) was formed in 1949, Belgium was one of the 12 founding member George Adamski wondered if the nations. In the Cold War then taking place Venusians intervened to stop World War III during the Cuban Missile Crisis between the United States and the Soviet Union, of October 1962? Art credit: https:// the official policy of the Belgian government in mcebiscoo.com/ 1963 was decidedly pro-American. At the 24 May 1963 conference, taking place just seven months after the Cuban missile crisis, it was no surprise that the Belgians and other Europeans in attendance would want to know what the Venusians and other extraterrestrials thought of the tense and ongoing Cold War situation that existed between the world’s then only military superpowers. Most expected that Adamski, being born in Poland and coming to America when he was only three years old, being brought over with his family when they immigrated to New York State in 1894, would definitely side with the Americans in opposing Soviet hegemony over Eastern Europe, to include his homeland of Poland. Taking into account Adamski’s neutral stance in answering the following question, the attendees were in for a surprise.

Q. Are the space people aware of the current situation existing in the Cold War between the United States and the Soviet Union? And if they are, what are they going to do about it?

173

The Real Resident Aliens

A. Yes, they are aware of it; and they are being very careful. They don’t want to act impetuously in any manner that might cause a mistake. As you know, since the Cuban missile crisis, a direct line between the Soviet Union and the United States, between Khruschev and Kennedy, has been set up. They can now talk immediately and let each other know what is going on in their respective countries. World peace is in the balance. The space people do not want to do anything that might upset that balance. The fate of your world, and others in the solar system, depend on conditions of trust and peace prevailing between the two militarily strongest nations on our planet.

United States Air Force Project Blue Book In 1963, the then official United States Air Force UFO investigation unit, Project Blue Book, had been in existence for nine years. The Belgians asked two questions to Adamski, soliciting his opinion on the Air Force’s findings to date concerning UFOs and sundry aspects of the phenomenon; and several more about the camouflaging of spaceships in cloud formations.

Q. What has the official United States Air Force committee investigating UFOs determined so far?

A. Well, they have so far concluded that ten percent of the reported UFOs remained classified as “unidentified.” That’s a big percentage.

Q. We members of Belgian UFO Information (BUFOI) have read in the press about seven such cases from America where Air Force investigators could not explain away the UFO sightings. What can you tell us about such cases?

A. Sometimes Air Force personnel will admit that some objects are “not identified.” But that is for their press releases and public consumption. In the higher echelons, the Air Force brass know what they (the UFOs) are. They just do not want to name them. For instance, John Glenn took a picture of them during one of his orbits in the Friendship Seven capsule. The American astronaut described these objects in space as “fireflies,” for the lack of a better term.

About a month ago, before I left on this trip, I saw a spokesperson for the National Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA) showing film clips from the camera onboard the Friendship Seven that Glenn had taken in space.

This was the same kind of camera that had previously been used by NASA to capture on film the fast-moving missiles launched from Cape Canaveral.

“I will show you a film that John Glenn took with this special camera,” said the NASA spokesperson, adding that, “He (Glenn) did not classify the object seen on the film. He did not name it. That’s all I can say for now, that it is unidentified.”

174

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

In the film that was shown on television, that lasted for three seconds, one could clearly see in the left-hand bottom corner, what looked like a perfect flying saucer. The NASA spokesperson refused to identify it nor make any comments about it. We definitely have a lot of this going on at NASA and in the American Venusian Mother Ship surrounded military, which also does not want to name by ionized scout ships in Earth’s upper atmosphere over Southern these objects. Therefore, they just refer to them California as photographed by George as “not identified.”

Adamski on 29 May 1950. Photo credit: UFO Nachrichten newspaper Yes, we do know where they (the UFOs) (Obergünzburg, Germany) come from. And as far as the officials at NASA and the military are concerned, they have been identified as interplanetary spaceships; but to the public, they remain “not identified.”

Mysterious Cloud Formations Hiding UFOs Q. How do the saucers evade detection, both visually and on radar?

A. They produce what we call a force field. John Glenn talks about it. I reference his comments in my forthcoming book. He says that when he was out there (in orbit around the Earth), he saw clouds; and in those clouds appeared what looked like “light balls.” Well, the light balls were the ships and the clouds were produced by a forcefield, but not a forcefield of a transparent nature.

Rather, it (the energized cloud) was opaque and fairly well condensed. The most radiating spot appeared like a fireball in the midst of the clouds.

Q. How can you explain that this forcefield gives the impression of a cloud?

A. The forcefield is produced from that magnetic drive of the ship. It ionizes the air around the ship. You ionize the air through what we call static electricity, or negative radiation from the ship. Particles in the atmosphere become excited and glow.

Q. So, the cloud is an effect of ionization?

A. That’s right. The cloud is simply a mass of ionized atmospheric particles.

Q. When they are above and outside the atmosphere, what do they have to ionize?

A. The atmosphere, although very tenuous even hundreds of miles out, is still present in enough quantities for the spacecraft engines to generate an ionization effect or cloud. If you were out there and did not know what was going on, you would see a fast-moving cloud, a luminous one. But space being dark and the ship moving through dark space, it will appear as a moving star, except stars do 175

The Real Resident Aliens

not move as fast. So, it moves very fast; and you don’t even see the outline of the ship. In deep space, the magnetic drive feeds off the pulsing waves of neutron energy emitted by the mother ship.

Q. Was the magnetic field produced by the ship’s engine?

A. No, the magnetic field of the Earth itself was channeled through the engine to produce the electromagnetic energy required for the scout ship’s magnetic drive and forcefield. The forcefield, in turn, is negative radiation that is thrown out from the body of the ship to repel any debris- small meteors, dust particles, etc. Thus, in the atmosphere or atmospheric envelope, the scout craft utilizes this negative ionic radiation to generate both a cloaking cloud and a protective force field.

Radio Signal from Venus Q. Has anyone been able to decipher the radio signal received from Venus back in 1955?

A. About eight years ago, there were reports in all the American newspapers about a code that had been transmitted by radio coming from outer space. Radio astronomers pinpointed the signal as originating on the surface of Venus. This code, they said, was intelligently sent. It wasn’t misinterpreted static. When a code comes in you can tell whether it is intelligently controlled or gouged up. By gouged up, I am referring to atmospheric interference, such as electrical storms, or something like that. Radio astronomers at the Naval Observatory, I believe, first picked up the coded signal. They began working on deciphering it in conjunction with other radio astronomers at Ohio State University in Columbus, Ohio, and both teams of scientists concluded it was an intelligent code sent to Earth from Venus. Frankly speaking, I can tell you that communications in varied forms have been taking place between Venus and other planets in our solar system for quite some time. The Venusians and the inhabitants of other planets in our solar system regularly exchange communications and we, of the United States, have broken down the code as of seven years ago (1956), just one year after the initial communication was received by the Navy radio astronomers. We now know what these space people are talking about, what they are interested in about our planet. Besides that, I am not at liberty to say much more at this time.

(Cosmic Ray’s comments: For the complete details on this radio signal from Venus, please read my first book in the Venus series, Venus Rising: A Concise History of the Second Planet (Terra Alta, West Virginia: Headline Books, 2015), pages 250-251.)

176

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

Anticipating Retirement The “Professor,” as George Adamski’s followers had consistently called him since 1935, when he started his career as a metaphysical teacher and guru with the Royal Order of Tibet in Laguna Beach, California, had just turned 72 years old when he began his tour of Europe in April 1963. The old professor realized that time, as it passes on Earth in the material plane of existence, had taken its toll on him, and that he needed to slow down. The remainder of public lectures were cancelled on the 1963 European tour, as Adamski would use his remaining time on the continent to visit and confer with fellow ufologists as well as civic and religious leaders. I suspect that the contactee knew that his time on Earth was running out, as he would transition to the other side of the veil in slightly under two years.

On the last day of lecturing in Belgium, Adamski was asked the following two questions, to which he supplied some revealing answers: Q. Was it a symbolic title, when you called your last book, Flying Saucers Farewell?

A. No. I called it, “Farewell,” because I am going to take it easy myself. In fact, I am too old to be running around the world. I’d like to settle down for a little bit in Mexico and start living there.

Q. Why is it better in Mexico?

A. Because of the climate and the low cost of living, for instance.

Immediately following his 24 May 1963 presentation in Antwerp, Belgium, May Morlet, a founding member of the Belgian UFO Information group, drove Adamski, along with Dora Bauer, a ufologist from Austria who would serve as his German translator, to Basel, Switzerland, in a rented car, where the contactee would meet up with Lou Zinsstag, a second cousin of the famous Swiss psychiatrist and psychoanalyst, Dr. Carl Gustav Jung, who was obsessed with the contactee aspects of the UFO phenomenon and author of the controversial book, Flying Saucers – A Modern Myth of Things Seen in the Sky (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1959), who was also serving as one of the coordinators of this tour.

Zinnstag was one of Adamski’s close associates from the start, and she was with him on his first European leg of his world tour in 1959. The information that she gathered about Adamski and other UFO experiencers she would forward to Dr. Jung.

Zinsstag claimed to be a contactee herself; and with the Adamski’s second visit to Europe, she was eager to discuss the Southern Californian’s purported visit to a meeting of the Galactic Confederation of Light in the Saturnian system, 177

The Real Resident Aliens

which many in the ufology community had pooh-poohed as just too much “woo” for their way of “nuts and bolts” thinking. After speaking with Adamski about it, she came to feel that he was being unjustly maligned and denigrated.

If he didn’t visit Saturn on the physical plane, perhaps he went there on the astral level. Regardless of how he got there, she believed that he was there and the message he brought back of universal love and understanding should not be glossed over.

Having arrived in Basel on 25 May, the party remained in that beautiful Swiss city until 29 May, whence they departed for Rome, arriving there in Morlet’s rental car on the following day, Thursday, 30 May 1963. They were invited by Sir Desmond Leslie, an earl of the British royal family, to reside in his brother Jack’s “palazoo”12 on the outskirts of the Eternal City, which they gratefully accepted.

On Friday, 31 May, Adamski felt inspired to visit Pope John XXIII in the Vatican.

Morlet, Zinsstag and Jack Leslie all voiced their doubts that the Pope, with such a heavy schedule, would have the time to grant Adamski a private audience. The Pope was also reported to be in ill health at the time. But much to their dismay, when the Pope heard it was the famous contactee George Adamski, he made time to meet with him and even presented the American with a gold Vatican medal for his efforts at promoting world peace and a better understanding of life on the other planets. Two days later, on 2 June 1963, Pope John XXIII passed away and Adamski was driven to the Rome airport, where Morlet returned the rented automobile, and he departed alone for London, Belgian UFO Information group in the United Kingdom, where his plane was member, May Morlet, bids “farewell” to George Adamski at the airport in met by Sir Desmond Leslie, the co-author of Rome, Italy, on 2 June 1963, whence the contactee’s first book, Flying Saucers Have he flew to London, United Kingdom, rendezvous with his co-author of Landed, published ten years previously. Morlet to Flying Saucers Have Landed, the Earl of bid farewell to Adamski at the airport and took Clancarty, Sir Desmond Leslie. Photo https://www.the-adamski-case. another plane back to Brussels, Belgium, where source: nl/ Adamski remained with Leslie at his she was met by the leadership of the Belgian estate for a few days and then flew back the United States, having successfully and Scandinavian UFO Information groups to completed his tour. and presented her report.

12 178

A palatial home with a private zoo.

On the Quirkiness of Ghosts and Revelation: Musings of the “Cosmic Ray” Keller on Life in the Material World and Beyond Helen and Betty Mitchell, Contactees Extraordinaire It’s Thursday, 30 March 2023 and I’m getting ready to drive tomorrow to visit my cousin Sandy, arriving on Saturday in Lafayette, Indiana, and also do a special presentation to the local UFO club in the public library there on the topic of “Finding Your Starseed Connection,” from noon to 5:30 p.m. on that same day of 1 April, which ironically is April Fool’s Day. As I was looking through my archives for something unique to reveal to the world regarding the extraterrestrial presence SPACE ANGELS FROM MARS: From Keller Venus Files: Sometime before on Earth at that meeting, I found a longthe end of 1959, the Mitchell Sisters forgotten photograph of the Mitchell Sisters of Florissant, Missouri, Helen (L) and Betty (R), were translated to the planet (Helen and Betty) of Florissant, Missouri, Mars to be with their extraterrestrial whose frolicking experiences with a man from boyfriends, Elan of Venus and Velas of Mars, respectively. Looking spiffy Venus, named Elan, and another man from in their white pantaloons and light Mars, named Velas, I wrote about in Chapter 4 blouses, and sporting shades that gave them that cool Hollywood look, of Volume VI in my Venus Rising series, Flying they returned to Earth in 1964 to do Saucers and the Venus Legacy (Terra Alta, some grocery shopping at a Kroger’s supermarket in Florissant, where they West Virginia: Headline Books, 2022), pages were spotted by a couple from a St. 74-79. The chapter was appropriately titled, Louis, Missouri, UFO club, with the wife being the one who snapped this “The Mitchell Sisters and the Space People.” It picture of the enigmatic sisters. If you’ve seen these angels lately, don’t hesitate to covers Helen and Betty’s initial contact with the contact Cosmic Ray at rkeller1@mix. extraterrestrials in a St. Louis, Missouri, coffee wvu.edu.

179

The Real Resident Aliens

shop back in 1957, Helen’s ride into outer space in a flying saucer, and pioneer ufologist Gray Barker’s “psychic interpretation” of all the events that purportedly took place between these two young women and their boyfriends from beyond Earth.

Timothy Green Beckley (1952-2021) Most in the paranormal and UFO research community are familiar with the legacy of New Brunswick, New Jersey’s Timothy Green Beckley. He was famously known as “Mr. UFO” and “Mr. Creepo,” a pioneer in the emerging fields of the paranormal, ufology and all things bizarre. He was an author, editor, producer and publisher with Innerlight Publications, publishing and marketing over 200 books on sundry esoteric subjects. Previously, he served as the editor of UFO Universe magazine and a film reviewer for Hustler magazine. He ran the New York School of Occult Arts and Sciences and worked promotions for the School of Rock and Roll.

Timothy Green Beckley was a frequent radio guest on Mount Olympus Radio’s Hercules and the Space Gods with Marc and Phyllis Brinkerhoff, SURN Radio, 21st Century Radio, Coast-to-Coast A.M. with Art Bell and later George Noory, and many more. He has appeared on the Travel Channel, UFO Hunters, Weird or What with William Shatner, the Joe Franklin Show, and many other television shows and news interviews. My connections with him go back to the mid-1960s through the early 1970s, when I corresponded and exchanged publications with him when he wrote a column for Raymond A. Palmer’s Flying Saucers magazine out of Amherst, Wisconsin. Toward the end of his life, he was a podcast host on KCOR Radio’s Exploring the Bizarre with Tim Swartz, out of Las Vegas, and just a few weeks before he died on 31 May 2021, I was one of the last guests that he interviewed on that program, answering questions about the strange case of Valiant Thor along with Julie Stranges, the surviving spouse of the late Rev. Dr. Frank E. Stranges of Van Nuys, California, who first brought the Valiant Thor story to light through his International Evangelism Crusade.

While going through the old issues of Flying Saucers containing Beckley’s “On the Trail of the Flying Saucers” column, I came across an item about the Mitchell Sisters and their disappearance under mysterious circumstances in Issue #64 of April 1969. According to Mr. UFO, during a visit to St. Louis, Missouri, he came across a very enthusiastic group of Flying Saucers readers in a UFO club led by Warren and Nora Bartling. The Bartlings happily reported to Beckley that membership in their local club had grown substantially over the years. To the residents of St. Louis, Warren’s UFO research, together with coverage of his 180

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

club’s activities in the local media, had garnered him the title of “Mr. Flying Saucer.” Thanks to the sponsorship of the Bartlings, many of the leading lights in ufology had come to speak to the St. Louis club. Lecturers included many then famous contactees such as Wayne Aho, Daniel Fry and Buck Nelson. Psychics from the St. Louis Mark-Age Center also made frequent appearances as guests at the club meetings.

Mars Needs Women In writing about the St. Louis UFO club, Timothy Green Beckley noted that, “While in St. Louis, we (he and the Bartlings) tried to locate the Mitchell Sisters, who were responsible for quite an unusual contact story which appeared in print several years ago.” The story being referenced here was Betty and Helen Mitchell’s own book, We Met the Space People (Clarksburg, West Virginia: Saucerian Press, 1959), with Gray Barker as editor.

Beckley continued, “It seems that no one has seen them for at least five years. As one long-time space researcher told us, ‘Since the two Space Brothers promised to take the girls on a trip to Mars, it is possible that they are there now. No one seems to be able to find them. Their former landlord said that they left without giving a forwarding address.’” Their last known address was 1415 Bernadette Street, Florissant, Missouri 63033, according to my files.

The older St. Louis ufologist did inform Beckley that the last time he had seen the sisters was back in 1964, standing out in a grassy vacant lot on the edge of the parking lot at Kroger’s supermarket in Florissant’s then bustling Cross Keys Plaza. Like any good UFO investigator worth her salt, so to speak, Nora Bartling always had her Kodak camera at the ready in their car, just in case a flying saucer would appear, and asked Helen, the older of the two sisters by two years (Both were in their early twenties during their first encounter in 1957), if he could get her camera out of the car and snap their picture. “Suit yourself,” replied Helen. As you can see in the photo, both of the sisters, all dressed in white with pantaloons and loose blouses, along with the snappy sunglasses and cheerful Southern California looks, seemed like they just stepped out of the Matrix from some future place.

Other members of the St. Louis UFO group, many subscribers to Flying Saucers magazine and readers of Beckley’s column, had fond memories of the Mitchell sisters. One female member in her mid-20s recalled traveling out to Kansas City, on the other side of the state, to hear the sisters address a meeting of the Kansas City, Missouri, Saucer Club. When it came time for Helen to speak, she started rambling on in some strange tongue: 181

The Real Resident Aliens

“Mel Bez de Son. Ras, de ta ol de ieon qua son twila um bon-tabon Zabat dra um ta daga de tra-ce-te de ta io um bont. Zahabat rma zabar, ott ta rma qua zabat gavon-ta-bo um-quat que Ban gav ban um ta ban ta zabat nas qua pa qua zabat ta old at um ta rama. Mel Bez de Son.” Her traveling companion asked her, “Are you a Pentecostal and were you speaking in tongues, Helen?”

“Well, I am a Christian but not a Pentecostal. This is the language of the Martians, one of the many species of extraterrestrials in the Galactic Confederation of Light, which I learned in the past few years in which I was off planet.

It translates as: ‘Peace be unto you, Beloved, in the evolving mind where one chooses to serve humankind, thus turning the forces of Love in one’s own direction.

When searching is difficult, these words facilitate advancement. The adversary must now work more harder to place obstacles in the path of advancement. Now, let darkness fade to the nothingness that it is. Let the full manifestation and potential of the light take its place. Peace be unto you.’”

Timothy Green Beckley wanted to know, “If anyone out there knows the whereabouts of the Mitchell Sisters, we would certainly like to contact them.

Their present whereabouts would be kept confidential as we understand that they have two young children (one each) which they are busy raising.”

From the start of their respective relationships, Helen went with the Martian and Betty with the Venusian. It seems that the two young women had made it off world as translated beings, along with their beaus.

Ghostly Adventures The experiences of the Missouri UFO buffs with the Mitchell Sisters caused me to evaluate my own encounters with sundry translated beings: Annalee Skarin, Dolores Barrios (Lady Orda), and her posse, Lady Encara, Annabell Krebs (Lady Columba) and Lady Aurora, the Rev. Dr. Frank E. Stranges, etc. In a way, it’s a lot like living with ghosts.

Native American Wisdom My friend and close associate in paranormal and UFO research, the late Phyllis “Krsanna” Duran (1948-2020), a Native American originally from Oklahoma but living most of her life in Missoula, Montana, was the author of the epilogue in my third Venus book, Cosmic Ray’s Excellent Venus Adventure (Terra Alta, West 182

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

Virginia: Headline Books, 2017). The epilogue was titled, “American Heritage and the National Security Act,” and details Native American connections to those claiming contact with the flying saucer occupants throughout American history.

The epilogue contains many first-hand, never-before-published materials that she received from her mentor, the late rocket scientist Daniel Fry (1908-1992), who allegedly flew from the White Sands Missile Base in New Mexico to New York City, and back, in a remote- controlled flying saucer back in 1949. Krsanna herself had several ultra-dimensional contacts with Bigfoot-like beings hailing from the Arcturus star system and was the author of several popular UFO and time-travel books.

As Krsanna and I would discuss various types of paranormal phenomena that we had encountered in our research, we both agreed that the late John A. Keel (1930-2009) was the expert on this subject. Keel especially noted the deep psychic connections shared by Native Americans in contact experiences with extraterrestrials and ultra-dimensional beings.

Krsanna and I wrote about this in an article which appeared as Chapter 6, “Evolution of an Enlightened Ufologist,” in my book, Flying Saucers: From Venus They Come (Terra Alta, In the footsteps of pioneer ufologist West Virginia: Headline Books, 2022), pages John A. Keel, Krsanna Duran (1948104-107.

2020) explored the mysteries of UFOs and inter-dimensionality through a As to the UFOnauts themselves, Keel’s Native American perspective in her Time Star website and many intriguing amassed documentation revealed that, “They books. In addition, Krsanna worked also pick out people with very interesting closely with the “Cosmic Ray” in religious and racial backgrounds.” Of particular investigating ethereal Venusian connections to one of the first flying note, the ufologist comments that, “If you have saucer clubs in the world, established Indian (Native American) blood in your veins, in Paradise, California. Their findings are detailed in Dr. Keller’s third UFO you are more apt to be contacted than any book, Cosmic Ray’s Excellent Venus other type of person. This is, if your great, great Adventure (Terra Alta, WV: Headline Books, 2017). grandfather was an Indian or a Gypsy, by the way.” Keel elaborated: “Gypsy or Indian blood is very important and the majority of contactees do have either Indian or Gypsy blood. But, if you are Jewish, your chances of being contacted are almost zero. We have very few Jewish contactees, for some reason; and on the other hand, we have a great many contactees. “So,” Keel surmised, “the religious factor seems to be of some significance, but the Indian factor is the most important of all.”

183

The Real Resident Aliens

Keel believed that if you had the good fortune of living near an Indian reservation, with enough tact and persuasive ability you might be able to gain the confidence of some Native Americans to the point that they would tell you a great deal about the UFO phenomenon because, after all, “they know all about it.” Keel declared that, “A great many of them have been contactees for years and years.” But to find out more about UFOs, one would have to get a Native American to open up about their experiences, which most are somewhat reluctant to do. Keel continued, “You would have to spend some time there. You couldn’t do it in an afternoon.

You would have to spend some time there to win their confidence. But it would be very useful to you if you could do this because you would learn a great deal.”

Native American Thunderbird Necromancy and the Contactee Phenomenon In the process of pondering my various encounters with supernatural entities, mostly human beings who had been “translated” to our sister planet Venus, and who occasionally visit our world in the appearance of a human form, I could not help but relate these to encounters with ghosts as described in sundry occult literature. Where Keel refused to disassociate extraterrestrial encounters with other types of paraphysical manifestations, I thought it was time for me to explore this avenue of approach to looking at ufology through a different lens, that of necromancy, which can appropriately be defined as “the practice of magic or black magic involving communication with the dead by summoning their spirits as apparitions or visions, or by resurrection for the purpose of divination; imparting the means to foretell future events; discovery of hidden knowledge; returning a person to life, or to use the dead as a weapon.”

See Wikipedia, https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Necromancy (Accessed 31 March 2023). This leads us to the question of whether UFO occupants are just as much condensed ghostly apparitions as they are extraterrestrials? And to further inquire as to the nature of “reality” on distant worlds, and even our own planet, if it might exist in parallel dimensions or various densities beyond the perception of our normal five senses?

184

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

Important Caveat Whatever the UFO occupants say they are, however, the ufologist or researcher of paranormal phenomena would be wise to keep in mind that they should always exercise caution and not initiate the contact themselves as you never know what kind of entity beyond the Earth’s material plane will turn up.

On the other hand, if the entities initiate the contact, you can be sure that they are who they claim to be.

Truth in Poetry I know that my late friend Krsanna would agree with the sentiments of another Oklahoman Native American, Rachel Jacobs, 78, a poet from the Potawatomi Nation, who wrote the following poem, “Ghosts,” which deals with both their nature and influence on human affairs: GHOSTS

By Rachel Jacobs with commentary by “Cosmic Ray” Keller The adventure begins Somewhere down the line The clock is ticking Marking each second of this journey we take Introspects and all that’s magic and myth Combine into a heady mixture of fantasy and reality (Cosmic Ray: Those who have dared sought for answers outside the box of this so-called “reality” or “matrix” are sure to find that magic and myth completely surround us, shaping our destiny and moving us along the path of illumination.)

So where do we exist?

Somewhere between The shadows of yester-years And the sweet dreams of tomorrow (Cosmic Ray: This is the “eternal now.” Our supernatural friends find us when we come to the realization that everything exists, all that we ever were or 185

The Real Resident Aliens

ever will be, or even ever needed, right here in the “eternal now.” We stand ready to receive further light and knowledge from our star friends, and even more, from our own Cosmic Oversoul.)

Or do we really not exist?

And what appears as normal Is nothing more than fading portraits And candles soon to lose their flame (Cosmic Ray: Our material form is transitive, illusory. It is as much a reflection of the light as the Moon is a reflector of the light from the Sun. We are the light, not just a manifestation of it.)

I can still dream And if my dream perchance come true I’ll not waste a moment But hasten to my journey’s end And tell all those who follow after That the quest is not in vain But all will be forgiven here And what is past will fade With morning’s light Until the ghosts that love to linger Find some other place to haunt.

(Cosmic Ray: There is a new heaven and a new Earth coming where pain and sorrow no longer exist. Nobody is crying anymore, unless they are tears of joy. Everything is forgiven because, after all, we have only been human. Our star friends have done their job and mentored us along the way to celestial light.

Now they go on to help others in this world and others to find their way as well.)

186

Inhabitants Of North America Put on Alert: Latter-Day Prophecies Of UFO Contactee Paul Solem And Native American Chiefs Now Coming True (Part I) Most people living outside of the mountains and valleys of Idaho, Nevada and Utah have never heard of one of the more flamboyant UFO contactees of the late 1960s and early 1970s, the Mormon prophet and friend of the Native Americans Paul Solem of Howe, Bingham County, Idaho. At the height of his ministry in 1969 and 1970, Solem together with a contingent of Native American elders and chiefs, consistently called down flying saucers in the presence of massive crowds and issued prophetic proclamations of startling events that At Hotevilla, Arizona, in 1969, Venus would come to pass on the Earth, especially contactee Paul Solem, at left in white shirt, stands behind Hopi chief the United States, well into the middle of the Dan Katchongva, wearing necklace. twenty-first century.

Katchongva was leader of the Sun clan in the Hopi Nation who worked closely Paul Solem, a rancher by trade and with Solem in propagating his message among Native American peoples. Photo Scandinavian by ancestry, was born at West source: Find a Grave website Springs, Cook County, Illinois, on 28 January 1921. He lived for 91 years, passing away on 11 February 2012. Solem’s spouse, Ada (1914-1989), was seven years his senior and they were both members of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints. They were married in 1943 and had one child, a daughter Sylvia, who was born in 1944 and lived through 1975.13 13

“Paul Renshaw Solem,” entry in Find a Grave, https://www.findagrave.com/memorial/88132621/ paul-renshaw-solem, 2023 (Accessed 21 December 2023).

187

The Real Resident Aliens

First Encounter with Extraterrestrials Paul Solem’s first encounter with UFOs and extraterrestrials took place back in June 1948. He and Ada invited his brother-in-law, who lived nearby in Howe, over for dinner. After finishing their meal, the three went out onto the front porch of the ranch house. That’s when Paul took note of three round, glowing objects speeding toward them over the field where he grazed his cattle. When the UFOs were about 500 feet from his home, two of them veered away, passing over Saddle Mountain to the north. The other object was left to hover directly in front of the witnesses.14 All three being Mormons, they could not help but attach spiritual significance to the appearance of these mysterious objects. Paul remembered from the Priesthood Quorum lessons that the prophet Brigham Young once taught that, “Adam was the person who brought the animals and the seeds from other planets to this world. He brought a wife with him and stayed here.”15 When Young made this statement, he was providing his interpretation to one of the Latter-Day Saints’ scriptures, Chapter 5 of The Book of Abraham, which describes conditions existing on other inhabited worlds, more advanced than our own.

For Paul Solem, he held no qualms about the existence of intelligent beings existing beyond the Earth, nor having developed advanced vehicles that could transport them from their planet to ours. He believed that there were probably beings inside those objects, piloting them, and that perhaps they were angelic, coming from one of the higher degrees of the Celestial Kingdom. If there were angels onboard, Paul reasoned that they could probably read the intentions of his heart, a psychic ability that we now refer to as “mental telepathy.”

“Maybe I can communicate with the pilot or some of the crew of that spaceship if I can frame a question in my mind for someone onboard to answer,” the rancher reasoned. Concentrating, Paul Solem thought hard, formulating pertinent questions for any beings that might be tuning in to his thought process.

He could only come up with two. “Who are you?” and “Where are you from?”

No sooner did he come up with these questions than he heard a voice inside his head, replying, “We are from another planet. You can be sure that you will hear from us later.”

14 15 188

Michael Kameron, High Strangeness: A Lifetime of Alien and Paranormal Encounters (London, United Kingdon: Flying Disk, 2023).

“Brigham Young versus Joseph Smith, Sen.,” (sic), True Latter Day Saints’ Herald, Isaac Sheen, editor, Vol. 1, No. 1, January 1860, Cincinnati, Ohio, page 284.

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

Second Encounter It was not until the fall of 1952 that Paul Solem got to see another UFO. This time there was a multi-colored light, hovering in the sky directly over his ranch.

As it started to move, Paul got in his car, turned the ignition and revved up the motor. He was bound and determined to follow the object in his car for as long as he possibly could. He kept the UFO in sight, following it in his car for three miles until it landed in the Lost River Sinks. Once it came to full rest on the ground, the lights on the object dimmed and went out. In the full light of the Moon, Paul observed a metallic disc, like one of those “flying saucers” that the fellow Idahoan and civilian pilot, Kenneth Arnold, had seen speeding over the tops of Mt. Rainier in neighboring Washington State, the ones he described to the news reporters in the summer of 1947.

An Alien Being In this encounter with the unknown, there was a tremendous difference.

Instead of a disembodied voice speaking in his head, there was a splendid being standing next to the flying saucer. At first glance, Paul Solem took this entity to be a slender woman of above average height, about six feet in stature with long blond hair and clothed in a white uniform, something akin to a jump suit with gold trim. Upon closer examination, however, Paul determined that this rather tapered individual was not a woman, but a man, quite androgenous in his overall appearance. “So, this is what an angel looks like,” the contactee mused to himself.

The alien being was the first to broach the silence, speaking orally instead of telepathically. “Greetings, Paul. As you surmised, I am, indeed, the one you communicated with back in 1948. The planet I come from is Venus, the second one out from the Sun in its orbit. In a sense, our souls have been linked throughout the eternities. You are a physical aspect of myself, while I am a sort of guardian angel, watching over you. I am simultaneously keeping my eye on many other aspects, incarnations in other timelines and physical dimensions.

You might say that I understand you better than you can understand yourself.”

“I’m stunned,” replied Paul Solem. “But tell me, please, what is your name?

How should I call you?”

“For the time being, since we have so much in common, let’s just say that I am Paul Two. “Before you arrived on Earth,” he added, “we lived on Venus and served the Collective there as a spiritual teacher. I want you to know that I was ever at your

189

The Real Resident Aliens

side in the past four years.16 I know that you were discouraged when your bishop and priesthood authorities in your ward failed to take your report of the flying saucer seriously. Even your community at large, despite being mostly Mormon, failed to grasp the gravity of you and your kin’s experience with us. But I and others within the Collective value your insight and believe that you can still help us with our informative mission here on Earth.”

“What do you want me to do?” Paul inquired.

“In your current incarnation, you are to direct your attention and work toward the Indians of North, Central and South America. You will strive mightily with them in the coming gathering, preparing them for the building of the City of Zion, a postapocalyptic utopian social order in which money will be outlawed and all people will live communally, and in harmony one with another.”

16 190

Hebrews 13:2 (KJV).

Inhabitants Of North America Put on Alert: Latter-Day Prophecies of UFO Contactee Paul Solem and Native American Chiefs Now Coming True (Part II) Since Paul Solem’s encounter with the Venusian angel in 1952 until 1969, there were many clandestine contacts with numerous Venusians and celestial beings from some of the other planets in our solar system and beyond. These exalted beings would direct Paul to the leaders of various Native American Venus contactee Paul Solem of Howe, Idaho, felt it was his duty to continue tribes throughout the Western states, as well the mission of the Mormon prophet as to other contactees like George Adamski, Joseph Smith, Jr., in bringing gospel light to the First Nations people of Truman Bethurum and Daniel Fry for timely the Americas. According to Smith’s advice. These ones could provide Paul with understanding of The Book of the assistance he needed in the fulfillment of Mormon, “Before the great day of the Lord shall come, Jacob shall flourish his mission to bring the Venus message to the in the wilderness, and the Lamanites masses of the First Nations peoples. Paul would (Native Americans) shall blossom as the rose.” See Doctrine and Covenants also appear at many small assemblies of Native 49:24 (Kirtland, Ohio: LDS Church, Americans or others interested in finding out 1835). Solem also believed that this prophecy must needs be fulfilled in more about the visiting Star People, such as the order for our planet to become part of members of UFO clubs. a greater galactic community. Painting

by Edward Williams Clay and Henry R. For Paul, during this seventeen-year period, Robinson (1844), source: Smithsonian he tried to avoid the limelight in which the other Natural Museum of American History.

Behring Center, Washington, D.C. contactees were basking in order to more fully empower Native American leaders to step up as more acceptable representatives for the extraterrestrials and their message to be faithfully transmitted to the members of their respective tribes. The Idaho contactee felt that the Mormon 191

The Real Resident Aliens

Church had failed in this regard insofar as the Indians of the Americas, at least in his estimation, were not being treated on the basis of equality by the elders sent to them from the Mission Training Center at Brigham Young University in Provo, Utah.

This was unfortunate, because when the Church of Jesus Christ of LatterDay Saints was established at Fayette, New York, and The Book of Mormon was first published, both of these events taking place in 1830, one of the first tasks to be carried out by that then small church’s president, Joseph Smith, Jr., was to send missionaries to the First Nations peoples in the areas surrounding upstate New York. These included the Seneca in the vicinity of Buffalo, New York, as well as the Wyandot near Sandusky, Ohio. The prophet Joseph Smith emphasized to the membership that the Native Americans, called the “Lamanites” in The Book of Mormon, were descendants of a lost tribe of Israel and that they needed to be brought into the church organization on the basis of full equality. Byron R. Merrill of the Brigham Young University Religious Studies Center in Provo, Utah, recently wrote that, “According to The Book of Mormon, Indians, or Lamanites as they are called therein, stand on a level of equality with all others in the eyes of God, who is ‘no respecter of persons.’17 They enjoy a heritage as descendants of a chosen lineage; they are a people of promise.”18 The Call is Given It was time for Paul Solem to extend his outreach. His oversoul, the Venusian spaceman calling himself “Paul 2,” communicated with Paul via mental telepathy in late June of 1969. It was around 2 o’clock on a night towards the end of that month when Paul woke up from a deep sleep. The contactee was startled because he left his radio on and it began making strange, crackling noises. This static, he would later learn, was induced by Paul 2’s generation of radio interference aboard his Venusian scout ship, which had been hovering overhead, purposely kept unlit in the darkness to avoid observation.

Paul Solem could not get back to sleep. Once out of that brief phase between sleep and being awake, known as “hypnogogic transition,” Paul was fully aware of his surroundings and heard his oversoul’s familiar voice once again in his head. On this occasion, Paul 2 was directing him to contact his friend, the Shoshone Indian Chief Don Ingop from the Fort Hall Indian Reservation, situated off State Route 91 about halfway between the Idaho cities of Pocatello 17 18

192

Doctrine and Covenants 1:35 (LDS version, Kirtland, Ohio, 1835). The Doctrine and Covenants is a compilation of ongoing revelations outlining the organization and administration of the church.

Byron R. Merrill, “Joseph Smith and the Lamanites,” (Provo, Utah: Religious Studies Center, 2023): https://rsc.byu.edu/joseph-smith-prophet-man/joseph-smith-lamanites (Accessed 22 December 2023).

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

and Blackfoot, approximately 13 miles due north of Pocatello on State Route 91.

Today, Interstate 15 runs between Pocatello and Blackfoot, passing by the Fort Hall Indian Reservation, so there is not so much traffic along the state route as there used to be. Howe, on the other hand, is about 90 miles northwest of Pocatello and 78 miles northwest of the “Rez,” as the local Native Americans like to refer to the Ft. Hall Indian Reservation.

The Idaho contactee therefore picked up his bedside telephone and dialed Chief Ingop. After about seven rings, the chief picked up the phone, still in need of a little rest. Paul excitedly exclaimed, “Dear friend Don, the time has come.

Our Space Friends have agreed to put on a UFO show for the benefit of all those scoffers out there making fun of us. What say we get together at your place as soon as possible to plan a big UFO disclosure event?”

“I’m game,” said the chief, but interjected, “Why don’t you come by tomorrow at noon. We can plan this and then drive over to the Journal in Pocatello before their offices close to put a notice in the paper.”

“OK, that’s our plan then. See you tomorrow.”

193

Inhabitants Of North America Put on Alert: Latter-Day Prophecies of UFO Contactee Paul Solem and Native American Chiefs Now Coming True (Part III) Coming of the Saucers In the 16 July 1969 edition of the Pocatello, Idaho, Journal newspaper, that publication’s staff writer, Barbara Boren, reported on the fantastic UFO disclosure event that took place on the night of Saturday, 12 July 1969, organized and led by Paul Solem and the Shoshone Chief Don Ingop from the Fort Hall Indian Reservation.

The gathering took place on the reservation at the Tilden Bridge on Ferry Butte Road. Previous to this assembly with both whites and Native Americans, Paul and Chief Ingop had united with Shoshone elders at four smaller campfire meetings, to introduce them to Paul’s history of contact with sundry extraterrestrials, but Venus contactee Paul Solem (L) and Shoshone Chief Don Ingop (R) in the with an emphasis on the Venusians and their forefront, in front of tepee at the inner prophetic message relayed to Paul, which would circle campfire ceremony on the Fort Hall Indian Reservation in Idaho on ultimately prove very important to the destiny 12 July 1969. Source: Pocatello, Idaho, of the Native Americans scattered throughout Journal newspaper. the Western Hemisphere. As Paul and Chief Ingop explained to the elders at these campfire meetings, “The authentication of the Venusians’ message to the Indian movement was the reason that the flying saucers would be showing up on the night of 12 July 1969, for all to see and thereby believe.”

194

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

Security Measures 150 people had showed up on the bridge, but only 125 were admitted inside a high, double fenced off area. Shoshone elders who had attended a previous campfire meeting stood as sentries, reading the intentions of the heart of all those who could go beyond the bridge into the more secure area, closer to Paul and Chief Ingop. Hopefully, doubters and hecklers could be screened out in this process. Nothing should be done that would inhibit the Space People from showing up or blocking the Venusian revelations of Paul and Chief Ingop from coming through. Both Paul and Chief Ingop insisted that no money was to be charged to attend the event, as this would nullify the Venusians’ participation in it and at any further such gatherings.

The Meeting Once inside the fenced area, a massive campfire was ignited with all admitted taking a seat on well, evenly-placed logs, positioned around it in a great circle.

It was 9 p.m. and Chief Don Ingop, a full-blooded Shoshone, began to chant Indian songs and play a drum. A tepee had been erected near the campfire, which Paul Solem would stand in front of to invoke the coming of the saucers and deliver the message of the Venusians after the chief finished with the Indian songs.

Once the chief had finished with his singing and drum playing, Paul Solem stood up in front of the tepee and invoked the appearance of the Venusian spaceships. It was a clear, cloudless night, so expectations to see the flying saucers were high, at least in the inner circle. After a brief period of silence, what appeared to be fixed stars above moved out of their respective place, forming a circle, and then spread out into the shape of an Indian arrow pointing to the then Evening Star of Venus, about 45 degrees above the western horizon. Chief Ingop then stood up, standing at Paul Solem’s side, and declared, “This is the true sign. Hear what our white brother has to say.”

The Prophecy In his preparatory remarks, Paul Solem explained that the Venusians were now in direct telepathic communication with him. He said that they were telling him, “Paul, in you we are well pleased. You are doing the best you can to get our message across.” Then two flying saucers, each about 50-feet in diameter, swooped down, seemingly out of nowhere, hovering about a thousand feet over the campsite. Two strong rays emitted from the bottom of the saucers, a red ray

195

The Real Resident Aliens

shone directly on Chief Ingop’s head and a white one directly on the head of Paul, even as he spoke.

Once the two flying saucers dimmed their respective rays and sped quickly upward and out of sight, Paul declared, “Now you are ready to receive further illumination. Once upon a time, in a previous incarnation in Jerusalem during the time of Jesus, The Christ, he anointed and ordained me for this very purpose of reaching out to my Indian brothers and sisters, in this, my current life. There were many Venusians who incarnated upon the Earth plane along with Jesus.

We came as angels, ready to minister to him in any ways we could, helping him to complete his mission. And we are still here. Many other Venusians continue to arrive on Earth, both incarnating and coming in spaceships. We are here on Earth because you, its inhabitants, are living in what your Bible calls the ‘Latter Days.’

“When I lived on Venus,” Paul continued, “I was a spiritual leader and wellreceived. Here, among the Mormons, however, most of them think I am crazy and even seem to despise the Indians, to whom Joseph Smith commanded them to be kind and bring them back into full fellowship. That is why I have come directly to you, the Native Americans descended from a lost tribe of the House of Israel, to preach the gospel of your deliverance and the building up of the City of Zion.

“It will all begin with a mass migration from North, Central, South America and the Caribbean of all peoples of Indian blood, full-blooded and otherwise. At first, this migration will begin as a trickle, but by a quarter way through into the next century, this migratory wave will become unstoppable.

“There is a Hopi legend that parallels The Book of Mormon concerning a great deluge of fires and lights in the sky that will come upon North America at the peak of this immigration. At that time, two leaders will emerge, one among the Indians and one among the whites. The Indian leader will be called ‘Echa Tah Echa Nah’ and the white one referred to as ‘Chisee Suma.’”

Solem further explained that this last one will rise out of the ranks of the Restoration churches (Latter-Day Saints) and will come to a high position of power in the government of the United States.

In a summary of this lengthy prophecy, it appears that after the two leaders have combined their groups, the United States will extend itself from the North Pole to the South Pole, and a capital city, both spiritual and secular, will be established in the northwest portion of Missouri. The stones to build the temple there have also been cut and stored with a remnant tribe of Indians living underground since ancient times. The Hopis teach us that we are living 196

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

in the death throes of the Fourth World, which long ago was facilitated by the emergence of an underground people. And thus, history shall repeat itself with this, the emergence of the Fifth World, where we will also commune with extraterrestrials and become part of a greater Galactic Confederation.

“I am but a forerunner of Chisee Suma,” said Solem, adding that, “If I do not live to see these things come to pass, then I shall surely reincarnate at the appropriate time.”

Then Paul Solem declared that he had appointments to meet with the elders of other tribes, beginning with the Hopi. “The Venusians,” said Paul, “have ordered me to proceed to Hotevilla, Arizona, where I am to meet with some of the clan leaders there.”

An interesting aspect of this case is that among the 25 people excluded from passing beyond the fence and into the inner circle, none had witnessed anything out of the ordinary in the night sky, at least as pertaining to the vision beheld by those 125 chosen by the Native American elders.

Also of note is that Paul Solem’s prophecy was inclusive of the mestizo populations of the Americas and the Caribbean, peoples that a plaque on the Great Pyramid of Tlatelolco in the Square of the Three Cultures in Mexico City, proclaims: “On 13 August 1521, Tlatelolco, heroically defended by Cuauhtémoc, fell into the power of Hernán Cortés. It was neither a triumph nor a defeat, but the painful birth of the Mestizo people….” It was this dialectical transition phase of history that prompted the historian Dr. Jaime E. Rodríguez O. of the National Autonomous University of Mexico to declare the emergence of the Mestizos the new “Cosmic Race.”19 In this sense, despite the decimation of Native American numbers from 23,000,000 at the time of Christopher Columbus’ arrival in the Americas in 1492 to just 2,300,000 by 1530 (90% decline), their blood and legacy lived on in the new Cosmic Race. That this group constitutes the majority of the largest and current immigration wave is the fulfillment of this latter-day prophecy.

19

Colin M. MacLachlan and Jaime E. Rodríguez O., The Forging of the Cosmic Race: A Reinterpretation of Colonial Mexico (Berkeley, California: University of California Press, 1980).

197

Inhabitants of North America Put on Alert: Latter-Day Prophecies of UFO Contactee Paul Solem and Native American Chiefs Now Coming True (Part IV) Summer of ’69: Saucers Among the Hopi A contingent of Native American elders led by the Shoshone Chief Don Ingop from the Fort Hall Indian Reservation in Idaho accompanied the Venus contactee Paul Solem of Howe, Idaho, on his celestial-appointed mission to the Hopi Reservation in Hotevilla, Arizona, at the start of August 1969. There Paul requested that they be allowed to meet with When Venus contactee Paul Solem and his Native American contingent arrived Chief Dan Katchongva, then 108 years old, the in Arizona, they were met with a huge leader of the traditionalist Sun Clan, which was UFO flap. Artwork source: https://www. bibliotecapleyades.net. the smallest but most spiritually-oriented of the five Hopi clans. “We bring an important message from the Star People for Chief Katchongva,” maintained Solem.

The contactee and Chief Don were led into the presence of Chief Dan Katchongva by some of the younger Hopi men. When Solem explained to Chief Dan why he had come to the Hopi lands, some of these younger men broke out in laughter. “You don’t actually believe this guy?” said one of the young men.

Chief Dan solemnly insisted, “Most certainly I do. Everything he has said is all part of our religion.”

One Young Man Takes Paul Solem Seriously Titus Lamson, one of the young men from the Sun Clan, took Paul Solem’s words quite seriously. “Five or six months ago,” he testified, “I saw a brilliantly lit 198

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

object sail over Hotevilla, moving in a westerly direction. It was a saucer-shaped construction with a dome and aerial on top. It became transparent as I watched it. Inside, I could see the back of someone dressed in a gray ski-jump outfit. The man wore blond hair reaching to his shoulders. He was facing an instrument panel. The object descended slowly until it nearly touched the ground and then disappeared over a ridge. I tried to search for it with my flashlight, but could not find it or any trace of it.”

Legends of Star People Visitations to the Hopi The aged Chief Dan then relayed to Titus Lamson and the others assembled one of the ancient Hopi legends. “Countless thousands of moons ago,” he explained, “there was a great flood that came and inundated the lands of our people. We were much greater in number then; but the flood forced us to divide into four groups, each group migrating in a different direction. One trekked to the east, another to the south, and yet another to the west. We are the descendants of the group that migrated to the north. It was a cold, hard and frozen land; but we were alive and together. Then a very bright star appeared over our camp and our star brothers and sisters spoke to our elders from the midst of the star. They bid us to follow their star canoe that plied the sky both day and night, and they would lead us to a land which would be ours forever, as long as the Sun shined and the grass grew. And thus did the Great Spirit Maasau, the chief of the Star People, guide us to this land we call Old Oraibi, here in Arizona.”

Days of Tribulation and Judgment Coming Soon Chief Dan then imparted some words about the future, but not being specific about any dates. “After Maasau landed the star canoe in Old Oraibi, he disembarked in the vicinity of Second Mesa. There at the mesa, he proceeded to draw a petroglyph depicting a Hopi maiden with a traditional butterfly hairdo being carried in a wingless, dome-shaped vessel. The arrival of this maiden,” he assured us, “signified the Day of Purification. At that time, all of the Hopi who wanted to go with her would be flown Traditional Hopi maiden with butterfly to Venus and other planets on ‘ships without hairdo. wings.’ These are sky canoes similar to the one that brought the Great Maasau here in the first 199

The Real Resident Aliens

instance. The Great Maasau told us that all other worlds are inhabited and that not only are the prayers of the Hopi received by him and other chiefs of the Star People on these other worlds, but that following the Day of Purification, any of the Hopi who wanted to live on these other planets would certainly be most welcomed.”

The Great Spirit Maasau, materializing on the Earth plane, drew this petroglyph signifying the coming of Purification Day, when some of the Hopi would be flown to Venus and other planets to escape the tribulations that would befall the rest of the world’s inhabitants at the End of Days, i.e. the end of the world as we know it.

Paul Solem’s Mission to the Hopi The arrival of Paul Solem among the Hopi was causing some factional splits among them, especially since Chief Dan Katchongva considered his new Idahoan friend to be sent from God and to be his “True White Brother.” There hadn’t been such divisions among the Hopi since 1906, when the tribal allegiances were split between the traditionalist and modernist factions. That is when the traditionalists were forced out of Oraibi and moved over into Hotevilla.

Chief Dan realized the importance of his friend Paul Solem and his mission to the Hopi peoples of Hotevilla and Oriabi, often referred to as “Old Oriabi” by many of the old timers on the reservation, situated some 190 miles northeast of Prescott, Arizona. Paul Solem had extensive experience as a cattle rancher, so Chief Dan let him stay on the reservation with him as long as he cared to. There he would work as a rancher during the day and study and learn from Chief Dan of all the traditions and prophecies of the Hopi peoples at night. Life was hard on the reservation, so Solem set up his wife with an apartment in Prescott.

Paul lived with and was accepted by the Hopi Indians for several years. All of the Hopi recognized that he was the only white man who was taught the Hopi prophecies. And since he was an apprentice to Chief Dan, they knew that he had to possess a special spirit.

200

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

Paul Solem and Chief Dan Go to Prescott, Arizona It was slightly more than one year that Paul Solem had been studying with Chief Dan when the chief realized that his apprentice was ready to begin his public ministry. Just as the Space People in their flying saucers had put on a marvelous sky show over the Hopi reservation lands in the Summer of 1969, it was time again for another fantastic aerial display, but this time it would be for the benefit of the white population settled in Prescott, who had heard rumors about Solem and the Native Americans seeing some UFOs but generally dismissed it all as a “bunch of hooey.”

It all started with a flying saucer flap at the beginning of August 1970.

Initially, there were just some anomalist fires and lights in the night skies during the first week of August, but then on Friday, 7 August 1970, the cosmic dam broke open. Chief Dan confirmed with Paul Solem that this to be the day when the sign everyone had been waiting for would be given. It was time to bring the Space People’s message to the inhabitants of Prescott, a diverse population then consisting mostly of cowboys, Mormons, New Agers and a scattering of fundamentalist Christians.

Joe Kraus, a reporter for the Prescott, Arizona, Courier newspaper, met with Paul Solem on that momentous night of 7 August 1970. Solem had contacted Kraus and requested the meeting. Solem introduced himself as a rancher from Idaho living out on the Hopi reservation with the permission of Chief Dan Katchongva. He said that he came to Prescott, however, at the urging of angelic friends from Venus. These extraterrestrials, Solem, explained, were responsible for the recent increase in UFO sightings throughout Prescott and the surrounding areas. “I’m here this evening because the Venusians are going to manifest their presence in the skies above in order to draw attention to certain Hopi Indian prophecies. They want the people of Prescott to know that they, the Venusians, are real and serious about the message of the Hopi prophecies and their significance for the future of humankind, and particularly for the United States.”

Then Solem stepped apart from Kraus and a contingent of Prescott residents who had gathered with him to see if this alleged UFO contactee was the “real deal.” Solem asked everyone to maintain silence as he gazed up into the sky and began to mentally “call down” his Venusian friends in their flying saucers. After about 15 minutes, Solem declared, “They’re here. I can’t see them yet; but I know they are here. One just said, ‘We’re here, Paul!’ There are several people in the saucer. I can hear them talking.”

Then, after a couple of minutes, as Kraus reported in the Sunday, 9 August 1970 edition of the Courier, “A star appeared in the sky that wasn’t there before.”

201

The Real Resident Aliens

At that point, as Kraus and the others watched it, Solem repeated words that he allegedly received through mental communication with a being aboard the ship: “My name is Paul 2, fourth in command of all ships that enter the atmosphere of the planet called Earth. We come to lend credence, and as a sign or token, that the Hopi prophecy was of a divine nature. Great sorrow and fear will come to this planet very soon and few will escape it. Our leader as spoken of in Hopi prophecy is already here on Earth in mortality and is known as the Apostle John, the same in the New Testament. The white brother shall be introduced by a huge fire and the Earth shall quake at his arrival. We are of the Ten Lost Tribes and we will return for several nights, unless there is contempt for us.” Once Solem concluded his remarks, the new star that appeared overhead, just disappeared.

Of this object’s appearance, Kraus noted, “I stood in a backyard in Prescott with several neighbors and watched spellbound for almost a half hour Friday night. It looked like a star- almost. It rose in the sky, stopped, hovered, wavered to one side and then continued across the sky repeating the maneuvers. A flying saucer? Yes, if we could believe our eyes.” Then, in referring to the alleged prophet who summoned the UFO in the first place, Kraus came to the conclusion that, “Paul Solem is either a hypnotist, magician, has a vivid imagination or he is telling the truth. Whatever, he is dedicated to his work.”

The Prescott Saucer Flap Kraus and his neighbors, in the company of Solem, were not the only ones sighting UFOs that night. In the Sunday edition of the Courier, the journalist wrote about others throughout Prescott who had called in with similar reports. There was a Baptist evangelist from Phoenix visiting a Prescott church to conduct a series of revival meetings, the Reverend John Foster, who claimed to have witnessed a “pulsating light moving across the night sky.”

Others throughout Prescott called in the Courier desk on Friday night to report seeing UFOs “zigzagging through the air” and “executing incredible maneuvers.” This flood of calls inspired Courier staff photographer Chuck Roberts to step onto the roof of the newspaper exposure shows vertical path of office building to see if he could capture a photo Time Pegasus Polar satellite being crossed by of at least one of the UFOs. Not seeing anything arcing, but faint, path of UFO in upper unusual at first glance, other than some star- left to upper center.

202

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

like lights moving across the heavens at an extremely high altitude, he set up his camera to take a five-minute time exposure of the sky for subsequent analysis.

What one of the moving lights turned out to be was the Polar orbiting satellite Pegasus, following a north-to-south vertical trajectory. The other light, however, crossed the path of the Pegasus satellite along a curved track. When the negatives were shown to an astronomer at the Lowell Observatory in nearby Flagstaff, Arizona, this second, arcing object, seen faintly in the photo above in the upper left to upper center, could not be classified as a star, meteor, planet, satellite or piece of space debris. In other words, this time exposure photo serves as proof that at least one of objects reported that night in the skies over Prescott was a genuine UFO. Most Spectacular Sighting One of the more spectacular sightings of 7 August 1970 came from Prescott resident Irene Wood: “We were on a hill on DeMerse Street; and at 8:15 p.m., we saw a huge brilliant mass of light look as big as three moons coming very fast from just over Thumb Butte. It seemed almost over Prescott and went to the east. It halted and a huge mass detached itself and fell straight down behind the hills.

“We came back in the house; and at 8:30 we saw another, smaller object that was reddish in color, with a glow…. No blinking lights, either. It came from exactly the same position and went the same route as the first. But when it got to the place where the first mass had detached its load, it let down six small red objects. There were no breakages apparent. Just as the thing hovered, the six fell and they were spaced exactly the same distance apart. At one time, we saw four of these things in the sky at one time.”

(Editor’s Note: Further UFO sky watches led by Paul Solem would be held throughout the remainder of August 1970, thus adding credence to Solem’s words of warning. The message provided by the Venusians through Paul Solem in Prescott reemphasized the prophecies given at the Fort Hall Indian Reservation in Idaho, i.e. that “tremendous fires and blasts would rock North America before the beginning of a mass migration of Native Americans and peoples with blood connections to Native American peoples (mestizos) to unaffected areas of the continent, centering on the northwest corner of Missouri.” Was he referring to a coming World War III and its aftermath? In Part V of this amazing series, Headline Books UFO correspondent “Cosmic Ray” will elaborate on these issues. -Cathy Teets) 203

Inhabitants of North America Put on Alert: Latter-Day Prophecies of UFO Contactee Paul Solem and Native American Chiefs Now Coming True (Part V) Further UFO sky watches led by Paul Solem would be held throughout the remainder of August 1970, thus adding credence to Solem’s words of warning.

The message provided by the Venusians through Paul Solem in Prescott, Arizona, reemphasized the prophecies given at the Fort Hall Indian Reservation in Idaho, i.e. that “tremendous fires and blasts would rock North America before the beginning of a mass migration of Native Americans and peoples with blood connections to Native American peoples (mestizos) to unaffected areas of the continent, centering on the northwest corner of Missouri.” Was he referring to a coming World War III and its aftermath? In Part V, we will consider these important matters in the light of both history and current events.

Prophecy of Paul Solem and Hopi Chief Katchongva Sparks Saucer Displays If the flying saucer displays called down by Venus contactee Paul Solem on Friday, 7 August 1970, were not enough, he promised the Prescott, Arizona, Courier newspaper correspondent Joe Kraus that more such fruitful sky watches would be held in Prescott and the surrounding areas for the remainder of the month. The saucers, of course, would be guided in by Paul Solem himself, as well as his friend and spiritual mentor, Chief Dan Katchongva of the Hopi Sun Clan.

There would be no doubt left in the minds of Prescott residents that Paul Solem was the “real deal” and that his messages and prophecies, in particular, should be paid the utmost attention.

After all, Solem, the transplanted rancher from Howe, Idaho, revealed that his arrival in Prescott was directed by “angelic beings” from the planet we know as Venus. And the Venusians had revealed to Solem that their intention 204

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

behind putting on the saucer displays was to draw attention to the Hopi Indian prophecies that incidentally coincided with many of the prognostications of the first Mormon prophet, Joseph Smith, Jr., about the tribulations and events that would take place in the so-called “latter days.”

The UFO sightings began early in the month when Hopi Chief Dan Katchongva and his apprentice Paul Solem began distributing 10,000 booklets containing some of the more pertinent Hopi prophecies. The chief informed Kraus that he and Solem had even mailed copies of the booklet to sundry world leaders, various ecclesiastical authorities of the Church of Jesus Christ of LatterDay Saints in Salt Lake City, Utah, beginning with the then president of the church, fellow Idahoan Harold B. Lee (28 March 1899 – 26 December 1973), as well as the elders of First Nations tribal councils scattered throughout North America.

When Paul Solem would speak about the Hopi prophecies, he would frequently point out that following the Day of Purification, there would come a mingling or fusion of the remnant Mormon population with the mass migration of First Nations peoples flooding into areas of North America yet unaffected by the tremendous fires and blasts (nuclear warfare) that will wipe out most of the larger urban areas. These safe areas would be situated in the countryside, at a great distance from the impact points of the bombing and the residual radiation.

Control of “Turtle Island,” the name given by the Native Americans for the North American continent, will ultimately return to the descendants of this land’s original inhabitants. They will work to restore it to habitability and its pristine beauty. Zion will be built up in the northwest corner of Missouri, extending outward from the “Center Place” pinpointed by the Prophet Joseph Smith, Jr., and identified as “Adam-Ondi-Ahman,” in the Doctrine and Covenants, Section 116, in a revelation given in 1838. There was a group of Mormons that briefly settled there in 1838, as directed by Smith, but were subsequently driven out of Missouri during a period of religious persecution against the Latter-Day Saints.

Adam-Ondi-Ahman today is a historic site in Daviess County, Missouri, about five miles south of Jameson. It is located along the east bluffs above the Grand River. According to the teachings of Joseph Smith, Jr., in the previously cited Section 116 of the Doctrine and Covenants, it is the site where Adam and Eve lived in the Garden of Eden. It is guarded by an angel with a flaming sword until the gathering of the Saints is called following the Day of Purification.

205

The Real Resident Aliens

Following a devastating nuclear attack on the United States, First Nations peoples and Mormons will build up the City of Zion on these safe and secure lands in northwest Missouri, the site of the original Garden of Eden (Doctrine and Covenants, Section 116), according to a revelation given by Joseph Smith, Jr., on these grounds in 1838.

August 1970- A Most Remarkable Month News of the “UFO prophet,” Paul Solem, was spreading fast. On the night of Sunday, 9 August 1970, a contingent of some 100 people from Prescott, surrounding Arizona towns and sundry Native American reservation lands, had 206

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

been trailing Solem, along with a smattering of newspaper reporters, in the hope of seeing the contactee call down the flying saucers again, like he had done on Friday. The people were assembled with Solem and Chief Dan Katchongva along the Granite River Basin in the northeast corner of the Yavapai Prescott Indian Reservation. Everyone watched in awe as Paul Solem once again contacted the Space People with mental telepathy, thereby bringing down a fleet of saucers obligingly flying over the Indian lands in a vee formation.

Two young Native Americans visiting the reservation that night, Alvis Smith, an Apache, and Joe Manuel, a Pima, had heard rumors about Paul Solem and Chief Dan and came to meet these so-called “holy men” for themselves. After sighting the saucer fleet, they returned to their own tribes to spread the news of the coming Day of Purification and the work of our brothers and sisters from other planets in supporting First Nations peoples, as taught by the contactee and his friend, the Hopi chief.

The next evening, after meeting up with his Hopi advisors, Chief Dan Katchongva, Ralph Tawangyawma, and Hopi language interpreter Caroline Tawangyawma, at the same Yavapai Prescott Indian Reservation, situated about one mile to the northeast of Prescott’s city center, Paul Solem followed their suggestion to move the sky watch over to Iron Springs Road at the entrance to the Prescott National Forrest, in the hills to the northwest of Prescott. Once everyone had reassembled there, Paul Solem announced, “The spaceships will show up just as soon as the sky clears.”

At about 10:30 p.m., after the rain clouds had dispersed, thus dissipating a slight drizzle, Paul stepped out of his car, along with Chief Dan and his advisors, and together they chanted Hopi prayers invoking the arrival of the spaceships.

The rain kept the assemblage much smaller than the night before; but the fifteen people who did show up were not disappointed. Once Caroline shouted, “Here they come!” those attending got out of their private vehicles lining the road and witnessed a bright flying saucer come sailing by.

Nonnie Skidmore, the correspondence secretary for Chief Dan, was among those in that group of fifteen who observed the UFO that night, and told reporter Kraus, “The craft came in a rolling motion like a moon and was about 500 to 800 feet off the ground. It came from north to south and then turned by the side of a house, due west. It climbed and turned off its light like a light bulb.” A couple from Prescott, the Morrys, also reported a similar type of UFO hovering over the forested area to the northwest of Prescott.

On Monday, 17 August 1970, Paul Solem announced that he would no longer be holding sky watches in the Prescott area, as he and Chief Dan had further 207

The Real Resident Aliens

work to do at the Santo Domingo Pueblo in neighboring New Mexico. “The Space People have a special affinity with the Hopi, so you will continue seeing their ships on your own,” explained Solem. The sightings continued throughout August 1970, but the number of reports diminished daily. Without the contactee and the Hopi chief ’s continued presence in the area, conducting the sky watches, interest in UFOs slackened among the Prescott residents; but not among the Native Americans out on the reservation, who viewed the appearance of the flying saucers as a vindication of the Hopi prophecies.

While Paul Solem made no attempt to contact the Space People and bring down the saucers that night, it is interesting to note that there was one last flap that took place. Some locals tried to blame the intense UFO activity that night on some prankster who had dropped lighted plastic bags from an airplane flying over the city; but Kraus and other Courier newspaper staff members reported seeing the UFOs that night changing colors and zig-zagging. “They did not seem to us to appear as a satellite or a plastic balloon,” noted Kraus, speaking for himself and the other newspaper employees.

Young Nonnie was so enthralled with the appearance of flying saucers over Prescott and the adjacent reservation, that she wholeheartedly came to believe that it (the UFO flap) was the “greatest event in the entire solar system right now.”20 Apostles of Light to New Mexico Chief Don Ingop of the Fort Hall Indian Reservation in Idaho had returned home to continue the preaching work to prepare the Shoshone and other Native Americans of the northwestern states for the arrival of the long-predicted Day of Purification. Paul Solem and Chief Dan Katchongva departed for the Santo Domingo Pueblo in New Mexico, having gotten settled in there by the beginning of October 1970. Their mission was a continuation of the work they had accomplished in the Prescott, Arizona, area, to conduct sky watches and channeling sessions, to thereby try and convince the Native Americans living there of the imminent fulfillment of the Hopi prophecies concerning the coming of the Great White Brother and the times of unprecedented tribulations, that they might survive and go on to a greater and more promising future.

Chief Dan Katchongva summarized the revelation he and Paul Solem would be presenting in New Mexico: “We have seen the flying saucers and have heard their message to us. We know they are real as their pictures were drawn upon stone for all to see near 20 208

Jerome Clark, “Indian Prophecy and the Prescot UFOs,” Fate magazine, April 1971 (Clark Publishing Company: Highland Park, Illinois).

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

Old Oraibi in the very beginning. We know the faithful are to be gathered to escape Purification Day. We give you our testimony and all that we tell you is true, so you have no excuse that you were not told.”

Paul Solem noted that, “The Venusians complained to me that the message has not spread out across the land as quickly as they had hoped. That is why Chief Dan and I are going on to conduct an even bigger sky watch in New Mexico. This one will also be on Indian lands, but it will take place in broad daylight. And we will have reporters and cameramen from the big networks there, so there will not be any doubts or questions any longer. This time we will try and bring the ship to within 100 feet.”

209

Inhabitants Of North America Put on Alert: Latter-Day Prophecies of UFO Contactee Paul Solem and Native American Chiefs Now Coming True (Part VI) Chief Dan Katchongva- A Translated Being?

Following the exciting UFO appearances over Prescott, Arizona, and its environs, in August 1970, in the following month, the Idaho flying saucer prophet, Paul R. Solem, together with Dan Katchongva, a chief of the Hopi Sun Clan, went on a road tour to bring word of their prophecies to other Native American groups scattered throughout the western states of the United States and also to the Seri Indians along the mainland coast of the Gulf of California in Sonora, Mexico, and starting with the Santo Domingo Pueblo Indians in neighboring New Mexico. Solem and Chief Dan continued in this ministry to the Native Americans until Chief Dan Katchongva, when at the age of 112 years old, was reported as deceased by the council of Hopi tribal elders on 22 February 1972.

There is a definite controversy surrounding Chief Dan’s alleged demise that is discussed by Solem later in this article, something to the effect that the Hopi chief was a “translated being” like the Old Testament’s Enoch. In other words, Chief Dan was physically removed by angels and carried off into the heavens without ever truly dying, as most humans do. Chief Dan, in Solem’s opinion, was a good example of what the Mormon Church’s founder and prophet Joseph Smith, Jr., called a “translated being.”

False Accusations Against Solem and Chief Dan Proliferating There have always been harsh words in the media against UFO contactees since the days of George Adamski and his alleged contact with the Venusian Orthon in California’s Mojave Desert back on 20 November 1952. Therefore, 210

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

it comes as no surprise that Solem and his claims were not widely accepted. As previously noted, soon after the massive UFO flap that occurred in the night skies over Prescott on Sunday, 9 August 1970, a spokesperson for the local Courier newspaper announced that an anonymous tip had been provided the newsroom, declaring that the hundreds of UFO reports that came into the paper’s switchboard that momentous night were due to a prankster who was lighting plastic bags and dropping them from an airplane.

Also, Red Cloud Mason, a Cherokee Indian living in Williams, Arizona, wrote a stinging critique of Paul Solem that appeared in the September 1971 issue of Fate magazine (Highland Park, Illinois), in response to the more positive article published about Solem in the same periodical five months earlier. In Mason’s own words, “Many persons do not feel Paul Solem is all he is pretending to be. Many of us went out when he ‘called’ the saucers into view and we did not see these, nor anything unusual. Mr. Solem claims he brought the saucers into this area. People saw strange lights in different parts of this country long before Mr. Solem made such claims.”

Such disparaging remarks made about him in the press convinced Solem that he and Chief Dan should confine the spreading of their prophetic words only to the Native Americans and select groups of Mormons that he felt they could trust. Therefore, apart from the inner circles of the respective tribal groups to which they would speak and sometimes call down the saucers, little is known of what truly transpired at these gatherings.

Although Chief Dan Katchongva is today held in the highest esteem as a true prophetic voice among all the Hopi and their councils, his involvement with Paul Solem was a matter of grave concern to the tribal elders back in late 1970, whence, as the then leading paranormal researcher John A. Keel exclaimed, “The Hopi Tribal Council ousted Chief Dan from his position as leader of the Sun Clan. Council members said that his association with Solem and his fantastic claims had damaged the tribe’s image.”21 Reemergence of Paul Solem After the death of Chief Dan Katchongva, Paul Solem continued his outreach to Native American peoples in the United States and Mexico, but mostly relegating his communications with them to the tribal leaders in closed assemblies. “It is not so much that these meetings were secret,” asserted Solem, “but rather, they were of a sacred nature insofar as they helped to explain the many legends in the history of these various Indian groups.”

21

John A. Keel, “America’s First UFO Experts,” Saga’s UFO Report, (New York, New York: Gambi Publications), Summer 1974.

211

The Real Resident Aliens

He also reached out to Mormons and members of other Restoration churches, such as the Reorganized Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints (now known as the Community of Christ), with headquarters in Independence, Missouri, as well as some of the more fundamentalist Latter-Day Saints allowing for polygamy in Arizona, Utah, Montana and other smaller colonies of these same in Canada and Mexico. By 2002, we learn from the email posting below that Solem was back home in Idaho. But of his activity with the Utah Mormon Robert A. Hender, Jr., Mormon population in the intermontane west, a.k.a. “R.J.” (1960-2016), began his not too much has come forth. Nevertheless, we interest in UFOs and Native American do have this post that appeared on the Utah sovereignty rights after driving Paul Solem back home to Idaho following UFO Hunters website dated Tuesday, 19 March a presentation by Solem on his alien 2002, titled “UFOs, Aliens, and the Mormon contacts in a Salt Lake City public library in 2002.

Connection?”: (The following email has been corrected for grammar, fluency and spelling.

-Cosmic Ray) My friend, Robert Albert Hender, Jr., a.k.a. “R.J.,” asked me to forward this.

It is very interesting.

Some of you may have already received it from him directly.

Subject: UFOs, Aliens, Indian Sovereignty Date: Tue, 19 Mar 2002 12:40:02 I’m R.J.’ I’ve been in the radio business for 18 years. Last fall I decided to look into the issues of UFOs and aliens. I had no idea of how much evidence there is on these topics. I have met so many people who have seen a UFO or even met an alien. I have two-hour interviews on my website with many of these experts. My website is rjradio.org. (This website is now defunct. R.J. has since passed away on 20 May 2016. -R.K.) One of the most credible people I have met on the subject is Victoria Liljenquist. She claims to have been abducted since she was five years old.

She says we have family who are on other planets. These contacts informed 212

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

her that they would be flying over the Salt Lake City area during the Olympics.

On 21 February 2002, Victoria caught on video the cigar-shaped ships, twice. One television station was there, but I don’t know if they got it.

On the following Saturday, between 2:00 and 3:30 p.m., Victoria showed up at a local library in Salt Lake City to show people this video tape evidence of these ships. I got to see this with my own eyes. I saw that on the afternoon of 21 February, a UFO craft flew over the Olympic rings, just above the University of Utah football field During the same library meeting, a guy who calls himself “Alien Dave,” showed that he caught on his camera pictures of these UFOs. I don’t know where he was at when he caught these things on film.

Only a week after Victoria left Salt Lake and went back to Arizona, I found out about a guy who claims that he’s also met with UFOs and those beings who fly them. Paul Solem has been pursuing these things for about 50 years. Paul claims that these beings told him that they’re from the lost Ten Tribes. For many years Paul Solem has addressed crowds and after he lectures, then Paul calls for the ships and they have showed up. I headed to Idaho and picked up this Paul Solem so we could spend a week discussing these issues. Really, I wanted to see a ship myself.

You may have heard about a Joseph Smith. My third great grandfather was Philo Dibble, a personal bodyguard of Joseph Smith; and I’ve been gathering Philo’s personal records. According to Philo’s own records of comments by Joseph Smith, the City of Enoch took off on a globe that used to be a part of earth. Joseph Smith claimed that the Ten Tribes left the Earth in much the same way. According to Mormon doctrine, someday the Ten Tribes will return to Earth.

Could it be that we have family who live on other planets?

Could it be that some dark side of government wants to hide this information from you and me? Could this battle between the dark side and the Creator be going on, upon this Earth and in the heavens?

This Paul Solem was instructed by the beings from the UFO ships to go and warn the Indian Nations of their intentions, to return to Earth and join the family of Israel. The Hopi people have long believed that they were placed here by the Star People. The Creator caused the Hopi people to be in charge over all the earth and all life. Only a few Hopi have kept this promise and the whole Earth is at risk right now.

213

The Real Resident Aliens

I believe the attack on the World Trade Center was an attempt to keep you and me in fear and a drastic attempt to maintain control of this planet, by the dark side.

I believe huge changes are now under way. I believe control of planet Earth has been torn from the clutches of those who have been pursuing an agenda of murder, plunder and harm. These things must change. These changes may include the involvement of heavenly beings. Some of these beings may be family and friendly and some may not. Can you tell the difference?

I learned a lot from Paul Solem. After I took him home last Thursday, I began my drive home at about 9:00 p.m. For about an hour, just before the Utah border I noticed a bright light, just over my shoulder to the left.

This light just followed me. I took a friend with me on the trip, Shirley. We noticed the bright, white light blinking and blinking and its brilliance was awesome; and then it would turn red and then blue and then white. It just kept going on and on and on, for about an hour, just beside us, 225 yards away or so.

Finally, we pulled over and got out of the car and then the ship or craft or whatever it was, it raised up much higher and then took off, behind us, and it kept moving until it was miles and miles away. As we crossed the Utah border, another light showed up, just like the other one, but this time there were two, three and then five, and they were going up and down, north and south; and they had lights that were so bright. I know that if I had a video camera, even with night vision, that I could have caught a better view of these things. These lights made no noise, but I think they were happy to get my attention.

I believe a new awareness is coming. Hang on tight!

There is one more, very important issue to approach here. Several Indian nations are beginning to stand up for their sovereign rights. I believe that we have lost ours. Why did the Patriot Act take four years to organize? Do you think that the attack on 9-11 came and then the so-called Patriot Act was announced? We are in a real pickle right now. I believe our government has been hijacked. I believe our hope for sovereignty is to allow the Indian nations to stand up and claim theirs. This very movement is now under way. They have asked me to assist them in this effort. We will be posting current news releases on our website. Check it out.

214

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

Clearly, this radio broadcaster, Robert J. Hender, Jr., was inspired to pursue an investigation of UFOs, and thereby become a ufologist, through his meetings with Victoria Liljenquist, “Alien Dave,” and most assuredly Paul Solem. With all three being Latter-Day Saints with backgrounds in ufology, they certainly touched a theological chord in the heart and mind of this most inquisitive Mormon gentleman.

Troubles Follow Paul Solem From Hender’s posting above we learn that Paul Solem had passed on to him a political agenda that resulted from his alliance with Native American leaders, an agenda that involved sovereignty for First Nations peoples throughout the Western Hemisphere. He also believed that the “dark side” had somehow hijacked the government of the United States and was working against the interests of our Native American brothers and sisters, who we really ought to be in an alliance with to further their objectives and well as to secure more personal liberty for ourselves and our posterity. It also seems that he possibly viewed 9-11 as a black flag operation, or at least some kind of excuse to promote the so-called “Patriot Act” to be implemented and imposed upon us and thus take away more of our constitutional freedoms.

Perhaps it was this kind of radical message that called undue attention from the “powers that be” on the activities of Paul Solem. As long as he was talking about friendly extraterrestrials from Venus coming to Earth to help us advance as a civilization, with a special emphasis on empowering Native Americans, government authorities and members of the Mormon Church hierarchy in Salt Lake City had little to worry from him. The politicization of his message, however, was proving to be a definite cause of concern to both of these parties in high places.

Like other contactees before him, once Solem began to talk about the paradisical economic and social systems in place on Venus and other planets, government agents would be assigned to tail him. For an example of the extent that this surveillance of contactees took place, please check out Chapter III, “Putting the ‘Spin’ on Venus,” of my second book in the Venus Rising series, Final Countdown: Rockets to Venus (Terra Alta, West Virginia: Headline Books, 2017).

The higher echelons of the Federal Bureau of Investigation (FBI) thought that contactee George Adamski of Southern California was promulgating a communist philosophy and dispatched agents to cover all of his appearances on the lecture circuit throughout the United States. At one flying saucer convention held at the Skyline Lodge on the slopes of Mount Palomar in Southern California 215

The Real Resident Aliens

and the two- hundred-inch telescope at the observatory there, on 7-8 August 1954, where two other California contactees were also presenting, Daniel Fry of El Monte and Truman Bethurum of Redondo Beach, California, Adamski when reminiscing about that event, noted that, “There were probably more FBI agents there taking notes and photographs than there were flying saucer enthusiasts.” Adamski took time to explain to those in attendance, including the contingent of FBI agents, that the utopian system on Venus was more like the communal living situation established by the apostles of Jesus Christ following his resurrection, as recorded in the Book of Acts in the New Testament, than anything akin to the tyrannical communist governments that held sway over China or the Soviet Union (Russia). Nobody in the early Christian church was coerced into joining and living in accordance with this higher communal order.

It was all accomplished through free association. This was the same type of economic and political situation that existed on the other planets in our solar system.

According to Paul Solem, “Mormon scripture teaches that the keys which the Latter-Day Saints Church holds will in the last days be turned over to the American Indians.” To understand this statement in its proper context, as early as 1970, Solem no longer identified himself either as an active Mormon or an adopted Hopi. Solem explained, “Most of the members of both the religious organization (the Latter-Day Saints Church in Salt Lake City) and the Indian tribe (Hopi) are falling away from their original teachings.”

Dan Carlson, a UFO researcher who lived in the community of Chino Valley off State Route 89, a few miles to the northeast of Williams, Arizona, told Richard W. Kimball, a correspondent for the Prescott Evening Courier, as reported in the Christmas Eve edition in 1995, that the city of Prescott, even before the arrival of Paul Solem, had become a sort of “Mecca” for contactees and their cultist followers. Many of these individuals were either residents of the city or frequent visitors. These extreme UFO buffs started flooding into Prescott and the surrounding area in the late 1940s.

Among the more frequent visitors was the most prominent of the early contactees, George Adamski of Vista, California (1891-1965), the man who wrote three books on aliens from advanced civilizations on Venus and other planets in our solar system coming to Earth in spaceships that we refer to as “flying saucers.” He was previously mentioned as a subject of FBI surveillance. Of course, this contactee also included photos of these spaceships in his bestselling books.

216

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

George VanTassel (1910-1978) was another important contactee frequently visiting Prescott. He held annual UFO conventions at the Giant Rock Airport in Landers, California from 1954-1978. His visits involved meetings with Dr. George Hunt Williamson (1926-1986), a noted anthropologist and a native of Prescott, who was among the first to foresee and warn of a contingent of hostile aliens (led by saurian beings from Orion), and the abductions of Earthlings by them in the-not-too distant future in Chapter VI, “The Intruders,” in his landmark book on extraterrestrials and paranormal activity, Other Tongues, Other Flesh (London, United Kingdom: Neville Spearman, 1953). Williamson also specialized in Native American legends and mythology and their possible connection to the appearance of the more friendly space people in the western United States following above-ground atomic and nuclear testing in this region.

He was also in the party of five accompanying George Adamski when he made his first contact with the Venusian Orthon stepping out of a landed flying saucer at Desert Center, Riverside County, California, on 20 November 1952.

Williamson took the famous plaster casts of Orthon’s footprints, from which I provided the results of an analysis made by his chief scientific consultant in his Telonic Research Association, Peter Kor, in my fourth book, The Vast Venus Conspiracy (Terra Alta, West Virginia: Headline Books, 2021).

Truman Bethurum, another well-known contactee of the 1950s and 1960s, also lived in Prescott at one time, where he started a project to construct an amphitheater where saucers could be contacted on a regular basis. Unfortunately, the venture failed for lack of sufficient funding. Bethurum made eleven trips with the beautiful Venusian Commander Aura Rhanes in her flagship saucer, even visiting the Moon base Clarion on the far side of that orb, as well as splendid cities on Venus where he got to look through a time scope at actual events transpiring in the history of sundry planets in our solar system, including Earth.

More about Truman Bethurum and his fantastic experiences with Commander Aura Rhanes can be found in the pages of The Vast Venus Conspiracy, cited in the previous paragraph.

Daniel Fry (1908-1992) was another frequent visitor to Prescott. Fry was a missile and rocket scientist for the government working at White Sands Proving Grounds in New Mexico who invented many rocket parts that are now in common use on space flights. Ufologist Carlson maintains that Fry actually flew round trip in a remote- controlled saucer from the White Sands base to New York City and back on the night of 4 July 1949 in thirty minutes.

“Most so-called experts try to explain these sightings away,” Carlson noted, but further adding, “I find they always have a ready explanation or excuse. The 217

The Real Resident Aliens

usual explanations are high-flying geese, marsh gas, airport balloons, layer of air inversion, light refraction, rockets, falling stars and satellites. If one is to believe Hopi prophecy, the reasons the saucers are sighted here most often, and contactees seem to be attracted here, is that this is a chosen land. Prescott is within the Hopi circle of sacred ground where the beings from another world are supposed to bring about prophecy.”

Many who followed the career of Paul R. Solem began to feel that there was some kind of collusion between the hierarchy of the Mormon Church in Salt Lake City, Utah, and agents of the state government in Idaho, and perhaps the federal government, when on 12 August 2005 it was revealed in the Blackfoot, Idaho, Morning News, that at some time back in the 1980s Solem was taken from his home and transported to Idaho State Hospital South in Blackfoot, Idaho, an institution formerly known as the Idaho State Insane Asylum. Solem was confined to the psychiatric hospital for a period of 18 months,22 after which time he remained relatively quiet about his contact experiences for some twenty years, not coming out in the public again until the early 2000s, when he made an appearance at the public library in Salt Lake City and then went on, in the following years to conduct sky watches and preach his message of salvation by angelic forces from Venus in his home state of Idaho, Arizona, Utah and the lands of the Seri Indians in sundry states of northern Mexico. On one such visit to the Seri lands in the vicinity of the city of Morelia in the Mexican state of Michoacan, one night in late September 2004, it was estimated that around 2,000 Seri Indians watched in awe as a fleet of saucers, called down from a prayer of petitioning by Paul Solem, passed over their heads.23 Mishongnovi, Arizona, Hopi Petroglyph Typical of the presentations being delivered in the wake of Paul Solem’s reemergence were the special programs held at dusk over the course of three Saturdays in the summer of 2004, these being 25 June, 2 July and 9 July, at the Mackay Dam Reservoir Camp Grounds, north of Mackay in the Big Lost River Valley in the central east part of Idaho.

Solem then resided on the Fort Hall Indian Reservation south of Blackfoot, Idaho, with his old friend the Shoshone Chief Don Ingop. Remember that Solem was the personal advisor and secretary to the late Hopi Chief Dan Katchongva and his counselor Ralph Tawangywama. Chief Dan Katchongva served as Solem’s spiritual mentor and teacher. From all he learned from Chief Dan, in this series of Saturday meetings Paul Solem spoke about the Hopi’s arrival in 22 23 218

Blackfoot Morning News, Blackfoot, Idaho, 12 August 2005 Blackfoot Morning News, Blackfoot, Idaho, 30 September 2004.

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

North America, their four great migrations, the Great Star (starship) that guided them to Oriabi, the Second Mesa flying saucer petroglyph; the arrival of the True White Brother among the Hopi, and the coming of the white Indian brothers and sisters from the stars and the Inner Earth to help facilitate the gathering of the elect to safe areas in North America or even on other planets before the coming Day of Purification, followed by the renewal of the Earth in the days following that period of tribulation.

He also explained how the sundry elements of these legends come from the reading of an ancient rock carving near Mishongnovi, Arizona, that has become a core part of the Hopi Tribe’s religious beliefs. There will be a massive wave of immigration from Indians and people with even a portion of Indian blood from Mexico, the Caribbean islands, Central and South America to North American Indian lands surviving the nuclear devastation and radiation fallout of World War III. Righteous Mormons will also be saved, with a remnant settling in northwestern Missouri to build the City of Zion at a site preselected by the Prophet Joseph Smith, Jr., in 1838. Elders in the Hopi community say flying saucers have a direct connection with both the old petroglyph drawing near Mishongnovi as well as the Second Mesa petroglyph and the foretelling of visitors from space who arrive for the Day of Purification and stay on thereafter to help humankind rebuild civilization. On that Day of Purification, Solem was pleased to announce that, “All wicked people and wrong-doers will be punished or destroyed.”

A Hopi website confirms that Chief Dan Katchongva disappeared in 1972 while he was seen walking into a valley where a UFO had just been seen. His body has never been found. Hence, Paul Solem presumed that his old friend Chief Dan must now live on Venus as both a rejuvenated and “translated” being.

I do not think this so strange. After all, the world’s population of Roman Catholics believe that Mary, the mother of Jesus, was taken up to the heavens in a similar fashion. And then there is the Bible itself, that clearly teaches that both Enoch and Elijah were caught up alive into the celestial realms. These individuals went to another planet, most likely Venus, where they were able to live a comfortable life free of the toils and snares of Earth.

George Adamski elucidated on this subject in his third book on contacts with Venusians and other extraterrestrials, Flying Saucers Farewell (New York, New York: Abelard-Schuman Limited, 1961), page 88 of New York, New York: Paperback Library, 1967 reprinted edition: “All of this proves that when we get spaceships, as the space people do, we should be able to travel to their planets and live there. We have been taught 219

The Real Resident Aliens

Petroglyph on Prophecy Rock near Mishongnovi, Arizona.

this in our religious thought. We uphold the statement made by Jesus of the ‘many mansions.’

We also have the prayer, ‘Thy will be done on Earth as it is in heaven.’ How are we to obey this command unless someone from ‘heaven’ comes down to instruct us? All of these things have been prophesied to us and we have been told they would take place, things such as strange happenings in the skies. These things are being fulfilled, are they not?”

Petroglyph schematic source: http://www.welcomehome.org/rainbow/prophecy/hopi1.html

The petroglyph known as Prophecy Rock symbolizes many Hopi prophecies. Here is one interpretation according to Frank Waters (19021995), part Cheyenne Indian and expert on Hopi culture and legends, and the author of The Book of the Hopi (New York, New York: Ballantine Books, 1963): The large human figure on the left is the Great Spirit. The bow in his left hand represents his instructions to the Hopi to lay down their weapons. The vertical line to the right of the Great Spirit is a time scale in thousands of years. The point at which the great Spirit touches the line is the time of his return.

The “life path” established by the Great Spirit divides into the lower, narrow path of continuous Life in harmony with nature and the wide upper road of white man’s scientific achievements. The bar between the paths, above the cross, is the coming of white men; the Cross is that of Christianity. The circle below the cross represents the continuous Path of Life.

The four small human figures on the upper road represent, on one level, the past three worlds and the present; on another level, the figures indicate that some of the Hopi will travel the white man’s path, having been seduced by its glamor.

The two circles on the lower Path of Life are the “great shaking of the earth” 220

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

(World Wars One and Two). The swastika in the Sun and the Celtic cross signifies the two helpers of Pahana, the “True White Brother.”

The short line that returns to the straight Path of Life is the last chance for people to turn back to nature before the upper road disintegrates and dissipates. The small circle above the Path of Life, after the last chance, is the Great Purification, after which corn will grow in abundance again when the Great Spirit returns. And the Path of Life continues forever....

The Hopi shield in the lower right corner symbolizes the Earth and the Four-Corners area where the Hopi have been preserved. The arms of the cross also represent the four directions in which they migrated according to the instructions of the Great Spirit.

Frank Jacob, visionary filmmaker and The dots represent the four colors of Hopi world authority on alternate timelines.

Photo source: https://www.youtube. corn, and the four racial colors of humanity. com/watch?v=zs9DbalQPgQ The Mishongnovi Petroglyph and Project Looking Glass On Saturday, 9 December 2023, while attending one of the Transition Talks seminars at the Arlington Institute in Berkeley Springs, West Virginia, I had the good fortune to interview my good friend and paranormal researcher, CanadianGerman filmmaker Frank Jacob, thereby discovering how he was influenced by Project Looking Glass as to the existence of alternate timelines and just how we can affect them, individually and collectively. Frank Jacob explained how certain “impending choice points for humanity” can be identified, so that we might all move smartly into a brighter future.

Frank lives in the mountains of southern Germany, near the Austrian border.

He is an award-winning independent filmmaker, editor, director, composer and creative designer, producing compelling documentary and commercial films for a diverse and exciting range of broadcasters and brands. Back in 2014 and 2015, while producing the international awards-winning documentary Packing for Mars, about secret bases on the Red Planet, Frank tapped into the Looking Glass and succeeded in projecting the future into the present. Those that view any of the documentaries by Frank Jacob come away with the realization that they are, in and of themselves, truly powerful, creative beings.

In the course of his lecture in West Virginia, Frank Jacob explained that according to his understanding of Looking Glass technology, the Prophecy Rock at Mishongnovi, Arizona, provided a unique Hopi interpretation of human 221

The Real Resident Aliens

history reflective of extraterrestrial visitations, lost civilizations, and the ongoing conflict between good and evil forces. He believes that the petroglyph clearly shows the bifurcation of timelines at the extreme right, where the Eurocentric civilization fades away as indicated in the jagged upper line while the Native American peoples, and their allies, survive the Day of Purification and go on to replant crops and rebuild the world in a more uninterrupted and harmonious straight timeline, as shown underneath the jagged one.

Frank Jacob also noted that, “Similar symbols (to the ones on the Arizona petroglyph) were used by the Knights Templar. There were plants like squash from the Americas, known 1,000 years ago in Europe. There are also vortex technologies found throughout the world.”

Interestingly, Frank remarked that, “UFO disclosures have been with us since the end of World War II. These have been soft disclosures coming from the so-called science fiction movies of Hollywood, preparing us for what we’ll all soon encounter as we venture out into space.”

Final Thought

Paul R. Solem, outstanding friend to the Native Americans, visionary and flying saucer prophet, he warned us all of perilous times to come and hard decisions we will be forced to make.

222

This series chapter has been dedicated to the memory of Paul Renshaw Solem (28 November 1921- 11 February 2012). The photo below (source: https://www.findagrave.com/ memorial/88132621/paul-renshaw-solem), is the last known taken of the Venus contactee, flying saucer prophet, and brother to all Native Americans.

Coming Soon!—Book 8 in Dr. Raymond A. Keller’s Venus Rising Series, Dr. Frank E. Stranges: God’s Celestial Ambassador Venus contactees Dr. Frank E. Stranges and Rob Potter of The Promise Revealed in Las Vegas, Nevada, 2007.

I want to thank “Cosmic Ray” on behalf of all who will read this forthcoming book for the diligence that he puts forth in not only this book about Dr. Frank E. Stranges, but all of his other books in the Venus Rising Series as well.

There are many who have been touched By Dr. Frank’s lifetime and ministry of service. Dr. Frank’s life is a true tale of a man of God who evangelized millions about the reality of the celestial realms that he was privy to experience. Dr. Frank’s ministry extended worldwide from California to South Korea and he had a following of students from all over the world.

As a young man he created a grassroots church while still in seminary school, despite his teacher’s discouragement in proceeding with this endeavor right away. His fervor and zeal for truth and spreading the word of God, however, was unquenchable and powered by a Divine Hand.

His search for truth extended beyond the traditional teachings that relied only on the Bible. He researched for information as tirelessly as the Venus Rising author Dr. Raymond Keller. He knocked loudly on the secret chambers of his heart and stormed the citadels of governments to find and uncover for the world’s edification the whole truth.

Dr. Frank’s intimate followers and the members of his “Inner Circle” lost a great teacher when he passed over. I was a member of this Inner Circle and I know many in this organization will very much appreciate this wonderful homage Dr. Keller has offered to the world for posterity’s sake.

Dr. Frank preached the truth of eternal life just as Christ did in his ministry.

I will share a short personal story as I visited him in his hospital bed just five days before he ascended to his reward. He had been quite ill when I walked into his hospital room. This was on a Sunday when the rest of his Inner Circle was at the Rio Hotel in Las Vegas listening to one of his lieutenants read his writings that he had prepared for what was to be his last Inner Circle teaching sermon.

As I walked into the room, I asked how he was doing; and he let me know that he was not feeling so good.

I asked if Valiant Thor, the Venusian commander he knew so well, had visited him. He said that “Val” and his Victor One starship’s “Doc” had been to see him and had left just minutes before I arrived. Because they had healed him quite a 223

few times in his life, even after he had been physically assaulted and injured by enemies of God, I asked Dr. Stranges, “Did they heal you?”

He simply replied “I am waiting for the Good News.” I, as a disciple, understood intuitively that he meant he was going to his reward in Heaven. I could tell his demeanor was a bit impatient in that he wanted to be done with this temporal life, being finished, as it were, with his mortal coil.

I felt guided by the Spirit and without asking Dr. Frank, I took out my phone and informed him, “I’m going to call the Master of Ceremonies for the Inner Circle, Bob Dixon, and if he answers, you can address the congregation. At that very moment in the Rio Hotel, his flock was listening to his previously written and meticulously prepared lessons and praying for his recovery.

When he finished without fanfare, he turned on the television and looked at me as if to say “Goodbye.” I simply said, “God bless you, Dr. Frank,” and promised that I would call him later that day. When I did make that call a few hours later, his life-partner Julie informed me that Dr. Frank E. Stranges had just passed over in the hospital; but those of you who read Dr. Keller’s books know that’s not the end of this story. Dr. Keller allows me on occasion to ask questions of the Venusians directly.

A few years ago, I asked the Queen, Lady Orda, about Dr. Frank, as I had a dream or a night class where I was taken while sleeping to Venus; and in my dream, I saw Dr. Frank meditating naked in a cave. Lady Orda replied to my query, “Dr. Frank is a resident on Venus having ascended to the seventh dimension. He still is teaching his disciples night classes onboard the Victor One.” And I am sure of this because Valiant Thor, as well, has mentioned this to me in a subsequent message.

So have no fear of death, dear friends, as these end times draw near; and as the veil between the material plane and spirit grows thinner, we are readying ourselves for even greater revelations.

As Christ has said “Ye are gods and greater things than I have done, ye shall do.”

Christ has Risen from his mortal flesh and ascended to his Father, and so has Dr. Frank E. Stranges.

God bless you, Dr. Frank E. Stranges, and you, Dr. Raymond A. Keller.

Godspeed to you both in your missions of love!

—Rob Potter Associate of Dr. Frank E. Stranges, Member of his Inner Circle, 2003-2007

224

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II, award-winning author and retired History professor, is the author of the Venus Rising trilogy. Final Countdown: Rockets to Venus and Cosmic Ray’s Excellent Venus Adventure are newest in the series. Dr. Keller's books explore various facets of conditions and life on Venus in many dimensions from a perspective of conspiracies, history, theosophy, ufology and current events, especially space research. To date, Venus Rising: A Concise History of the Second Planet, won awards at the Southern California and London Book Festivals. Dr. Keller has lived and worked in 44 different countries and has been writing about UFOs and paranormal activity since 1967. He was the founder and director of the Outer Space International Research and Investigations Society (OSIRIS) of Hilmar, California, as well as the publisher and co-editor of the New Millennial Star, a monthly pre-Internet tabloid newspaper with a circulation of 7,500 copies. He received his doctoral degree from West Virginia University in 2011 focusing on various aspects of the Basque settlement of Venezuela, and received his Master's degree from the same institution in 2004 in foreign language with an emphasis on Magic Realism in Latin American literature.

THE REAL RESIDENT ALIENS

Noted UFOlogist, Dr. Raymond Keller, believes the idea of extraterrestrials and even ultra-dimensional beings from many different planets and alternate realms living and working among us clandestinely is more than just another conspiracy theory. He has been amassing files of such purported cases since his days with the Cleveland Ufology Project (CUP) and the Aerial Phenomena Research Organization (APRO) in the 1960s, and feels there exists enough anecdotal evidence to support this conclusion. With this in mind, he made the time to organize this material into a highly readable, fully-illustrated and enjoyable book, which he proudly presents to you now as The Real Resident Aliens.

Dr. Raymond A. Keller, II